Home

Avaya Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2.0 User's Manual

1. Table 59 describes the items on the IGMP VLAN Configuration page Table 59 IGMP VLAN Configuration page items Item Range Description VLAN 1 4094 The number assigned to the VLAN when the VLAN was created For more information on creating VLANs see Creating and managing virtual LANs VLANs on page 171 Snooping 1 Enabled Choose to enable or disable the IGMP snooping feature 2 Disabled Note This field affects a VLANs The default setting is Enabled 209570 C Configuring application settings 169 Table 59 IGMP VLAN Configuration page items continued Item Range Description Proxy 1 Enabled Choose to enable or disable the proxy feature This feature allows the switch 2 Disabled to consolidate IGMP Host Membership Reports received on its downstream ports and to generate a consolidated proxy report for forwarding to its upstream neighbor Note This field affects all VLANs The default setting is Enabled Robust Value 1 64 Type the robust value in the appropriate format This feature allows you to set the switch to offset expected packet loss on a subnet If packet losses ona subnet are unacceptably high the Robust Value field can be increased to a higher value Note This field affects only the VLAN specified in the page s VLAN field The default settings is 2 Query
2. Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 176 Configuring application settings Type information in the text boxes or select from a list Do one of the following e Click Submit e Click Back to return to the VLAN Configuration page without making changes The new port based VLAN configuration appears in the VLAN Table on the VLAN Configuration page Figure 75 Modifying a port based VLAN To modify an existing port based VLAN 1 From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 75 2 Inthe VLAN Table section in the port based VLAN row of your choice click the Modify icon The VLAN Configuration Port Based modification page opens Figure 77 Figure 77 VLAN Configuration Port Based modification page Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration Port Based VLAN Port Based Setting 1 Learning Constraint VL Port Membership 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 MM M A M M M y MM M M M y y A MM M M M iv iv y Port Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Kai kon kite 209570 C Configuring application settings 177 Table 63 describes the items on the VLAN Configuration Port Based modification page Table 63 VLAN Configuration Port Based modification page items Item Description VLAN The number as
3. Item Description sysDescription The default description of the Business Policy Switch 2000 including the hardware firmware software and ISVN version numbers sysUpTime The elapsed time since the last network management portion of the system was last re initialized sysName The name created by the network administrator to identify the switch for example Finance Group sysLocation The location name created by the network administrator to identify the switch location for example first floor sysContact The name and email contact information of the administratively assigned person to contact regarding switch operation Viewing CPU and memory utilization You can view the percentage utilization of the BPS 2000 CPU and memory capacity over time To view CPU and memory utilization information From the main menu choose Administration gt CPU Memory Utilization The CPU Memory Utilization page opens Figure 5 Figure 5 CPU Memory Utilization page Administration gt CPU Memory Utilization CPU Utilization Last 10 Seconds Last 1 Minute Last 10 Minutes Last 60 Minutes Last 24 Hours From System Boot Up 34 36 36 37 Memory Utilization Available 78 LowMark 78 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 44 Administering the switch Table 5 describes the items on the CPU Memory Utilization page Table 5 CPU
4. 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list Refer to Upgrading software on page 119 for instructions 3 Click Submit Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 118 Configuring the switch The software download process automatically completes without user intervention The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with anew software image Take care not to interrupt the download process until after it runs to completion the process can take up to 10 minutes depending on network conditions When the download process is complete the switch automatically resets and the new software image initiates a self test During the download process the Business Policy Switch is not operational You can monitor the progress of the download process by observing the LED indications Observing LED indications Table 38 describes the LED indications during the software download process Note The LED indications described in Table 38 apply to a 24 port switch model Although a 12 port switch provides similar LED indications the LED indication sequence is associated within the 12 port range Table 38 LED Indications during the software download process Phase Description LED Indications 1 The switch downloads the new software image 100 Mb s port status LEDs ports 18 to 24 only The LEDs begin to turn on in suc
5. Table 72 describes the items on the Spanning Tree Group Configuration page Table 72 Spanning Tree Group Configuration page items Section Item Description STP Group Deletes the group Table x Group The number assigned to the spanning tree group when the group was created Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 194 Configuring application settings Table 72 Spanning Tree Group Configuration page items Section Item Description Bridge Priority For the STP Group indicates the management assigned priority value of the bridge ID in hexadecimal notation which is the most significant byte of the bridge ID The spanning tree algorithm uses this parameter to determine the root bridge or designated bridge For example the bridge with the lowest bridge ID becomes the root bridge with Bridge Priority values Hello Time For the STP Group indicates the Hello Interval the amount of time between transmissions of BPDUs specified by management for this bridge This parameter takes effect only when this bridge becomes the root bridge Note that although you can set the Hello Interval for a bridge using bridge management software once the spanning tree computation process is complete all bridges participating in the spanning tree network use the root bridge s Hello Interval parameter value If any bridge becomes the root bridge its Hello Inter
6. Table 86 describes the items on the DSCP Mapping Modification page Table 86 DSCP Mapping Modification page items Item Range Format DSCP 0 63 Type the attribute to use internally to determine the appropriate Layer 2 cost of service CoS mappings 802 1p Priority 0 7 Choose the IEEE802 CoS value to use when mapping the DSCP value specified by the qos802DscpMappingDscp attribute to an IEEE 802 CoS Drop Precedence Loss Sensitive Choose the drop value precedence to use for traffic with the associated Not Loss Sensitive 802 1p user priority value with the identified queue Selecting a Loss Sensitive value specifies a low packet drop precedence selecting a Not Loss Sensitive value specifies a high packet drop precedence Note Generally low packet drop precedence receives preferential treatment Service Class Standard Choose the service class Bronze Silver Gold Platinum Premium Network Note This field corresponds to the adjacent user priority levels Note Mappings created on the DSCP mapping modification page are used at egress for marking traffic Trusted and unrestricted IP traffic lf you select the re marking action of using the egress map the mappings determine the 802 1p priority and drop precedence values associated with packets based on the DSCP of the received packet Untrusted and untresticted traffic If you select the re marking action of using default the mappings determine the
7. Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 86 Configuring the switch Table 24 describes the items on the Target Address page Table 24 Target Address page items Item and MIB association Range Description xI Deletes the row Target Name 1 32 Type a character string to create a target name snmpTargetAddrName Target Domain 1 32 The transport type of the address contained in the snmpTargetAddrTDomain snmpTargetAddrTAddress object Target Address XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Type a transport address in the format of an IP address snmpTargetAddrTAddress colon and UDP port number For example 10 30 31 99 162 see Figure 27 on page 85 Target Timeout Integer Type the number in seconds to designate as the maximum snmpTargetAddrTimeout time to wait for a response to an inform notification before re sending the Inform notification Target Retry Count 0 255 Type the default number of retires to be attempted when a snmpTargetAddrRetryCount response is not received for a generated message An application may provide its own retry count in which case the value of this object is ignored Target Tag List 1 20 Type the space separated list of tag values to be used to snmpTargetAddrTagList select target addresses for a particular operation Target Parameter Entry 1 32 Type a numeric string to identify an entry in the snmpTargetAddr snmpTargetParamsTable The
8. 226 QoS Policies to Configure window with IP Application entry 226 Poley label PAGS Sas dee ve belied hee das PKateag sae ERAS 227 Policy definition page 2 ces cwka does totwatenie ee haw sd heehee bane eer IP classification rules page 1 Of 2 1 2 2 2 000 cee eee 228 IP classification rules page 2 of 2 0 2 0 c eee ee eee eee 228 Layer 2 classification rules page 1 of 2 200000e eee aee 229 Layer 2 classification rules page 2 of 2 ce eee eee eee 230 Meter for user defined flow page 2 cece eee e eee eee 231 Meter setting for user defined flow page ee eee eee 231 Service Class selection for user defined flow page 232 Shaper for user defined flow page 0020 0c eee eee eae 233 Setting shaping parameters for user defined flow page 234 Additional user defined flows page 0 2 e eee eee eee 235 Packet prioritization page with prioritized User Defined Flow s 236 QoS Policies to Configure window with user defined flow entry 236 QoS Quick Config Interface Group page View Interface Group 237 QoS Quick Config Interface Group page Create Interface Group 238 QoS Quick Config Interface Group page View Interface Group 239 QoS Quick Config Policy page 1 of 3 02002 2 eee eee 240 QoS Quick Config Policy page 2 of 3 020 cee eee 240 209570 C Figures 19
9. Authentication Password 1 32 usmUserAuthPassword Type a string of character to create a password to use in conjunction with the authorization protocol Entry Storage 1 Volatile Choose your storage preference Selecting Volatile requests information to usmUserStorageType 2 Non Volatile be dropped lost when you turn the power off Selecting Non Volatile requests information to be saved in NVRAM when you turn the power off 2 Inthe User Specification Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list Click Submit The new configuration is displayed in the User Specification Table Figure 22 209570 C Configuring the switch 75 Deleting an SNMPv3 system user configuration To delete an existing SNMPv3 user configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt User Specification The User Specification page opens Figure 22 2 Inthe User Specification Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the SNMPv3 user configuration e Click Cancel to return to the User Specification page without making changes Configuring an SNMPv3 system user group membership You can view a table of existing SNMPv3 group membership configurations and map or delete an SNMPv3 user to group configuration Mapping an SNMPv3 system
10. Layer2 Filter Group Pas ae oe Source Source VLAN Tag 802 1p Destination Destination Group vt Required EtherType Priority DSCP Protocol L4 Port Min L4 Port Max ay atte C Ignore Ignore IP Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore el arD Table 93 describes the items on the Layer2 Group page Table 93 Layer2 Group page items Item Range Description eee 1 16 Enter a character string to create an identity for the filter group configuration Group Select or deselect the filter from membership in the filter group Order Integer Enter a number to establish the evaluation order of filters in the group VLAN The VLAN ID s specified when the layer 2 filter was created VLAN Tag The VLAN tag requirement option selected when the filter was created Required EtherType The EtherType selected when the filter was created 802 1p Priority The 802 1p priority selected when the filter was created DSCP The value that the DSCP in the packet can have and match this filter Protocol The IP protocol that is matched against the packet s IP protocol field The options are Ignore TCP UDP ICMP IGMP or RSVP Destination L4 Port Min The least value that the packet s layer 4 destination port number can have and match this filter Destination L4 Port Max The maximum value that the packet s layer 4 destination port number can have and match this filter
11. Figure 135 QoS Quick Config Policy page 3 of 3 0020 eee eee 241 Figure 136 QoS Quick Config page for configuring IP filters page 1 of 2 242 Figure 137 QoS Quick Config page for configuring IP filters page 2 of 2 242 Figure 138 QoS Quick Config page for configuring layer 2 filters page 1 of 2 244 Figure 139 QoS Quick Config page for configuring layer 2 filters page 2 of 2 244 Figure 140 QoS Quick Config page with existing filter group choice 246 Figure 141 QoS Quick Config Policy page with displayed filter group 247 Figure 142 QoS Quick Config Policy page with expanded meter area 248 Figure 143 Step 3 Shaper cr cscvcceaveseeensaceeoinresde sana beneerase s 249 Figure 142 SWAPS DON gai ia cden a cho ee heeled ede CAS one EEEE E 249 Figure 145 Policy area of QoS Quick Config Policy page 251 Figure 146 QoS Advanced Policies page with configured policies 1 of 2 252 Figure 147 QoS Advanced Policies page with configured policies 2 of 2 252 Figure 148 QoS Advanced Interface Configuration page 00 255 Figure 149 Interlace ID page nc ces c ade e dbo ke en etna es Raw ake eC 258 Figure 150 Interface Group Assignment page 0 0c eee eee eee 259 Figure 151 802 1p Priority Queue Assignment page 20 20 ee aee 262 Figure 152 802 1p Priority Mapping page 0 0c ee ee eee 263 F
12. Table 46 describes the fields on the System Log page Table 46 System Log page fields Section Item Range Description System Log Display Unit 1 8 Choose the unit on which to display messages or clear View By messages Display 1 Non Volatile Choose to display messages from Non Volatile memory Messages From 2 Volatile Non Volatile NVRAM or Volatile DRAM and Non Volatile memory The default settings is Non Volatile Clear Messages 1 Volatile Choose to clear messages from Volatile memory or From 2 Volatile Non Volatile Volatile and Non Volatile memory 3 None P The default settings is None do not clear messages System Log Index The number of the event Time Stamp The time in hundreths of a second between system initialization and the time the log messages entered the system Message Type The type of message The options are 1 Critical 2 Serious and 3 Informational Message A character string that identifies the origin of the message and the reason why the message was generated 2 Inthe System Log View By section do one or more of the following e Choose the number of the unit from which to display messages e Choose where to display messages from e Choose to clear messages from Volatile or Non Volatile memory 3 Click Submit The results of your request are displayed in the System Log section Figure 52 Using Web based Management f
13. Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt Layer2 Group Modification Filter Group Name fGrp1 Layer2 Filter Group pay Le 1P p Destination Destination Source Sou Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 287 Table 94 describes the items on the Layer2 Group modification page Table 94 Layer2 Group modification page items Item Range Description Filter Group 1 16 Displays the filter group name Name Group Select or deselect the filter from membership in the filter group Order Integer Enter a number to establish the evaluation order of filters in the group Instance Displays a unique identifier Filter ID Displays the filter identifier VLAN The VLAN ID s specified when the layer 2 filter was created VLAN Tag The VLAN tag requirement option selected when the filter was created Required EtherType The EtherType selected when the filter was created 802 1p Priority The 802 1p priority selected when the filter was created DSCP The value that the DSCP in the packet can have and match this filter Protocol The IP protocol that is matched against the packet s IP protocol field The options are Ignore TCP UDP ICMP IGMP or RSVP Destination L4 Port Min The least value that the packet s layer 4 destination port number can have and match this filter Des
14. Indicates whether the message sent on behalf of this user to from the SNMP engine identified UserEnginelD can be authenticated by the MD5 authentication protocol Note The Business Policy Switch 2000 supports only the MD5 authentication protocol Private Protocol usmUserPrivProtocol Displays whether or not messages sent on behalf of this user to or from the SNMP engine identified by usmUserEnginelD can be protected from disclosure and if so the type of privacy protocol which is used Entry Storage The current storage type for this row If Volatile is displayed information is dropped lost when you turn the power off If non volatile is displayed information is saved in NVRAM when you turn the power off Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 74 Configuring the switch Table 19 describes the items on the User Specification Creation section of the User Specification page Table 19 User Specification Creation section items Item and MIB Pee n Range Description association User Name 1 32 Type a string of characters to create an identity for the user Authentication Protocol None Choose whether or not the message sent on behalf of this user to from the usmUserAuthProtocol MD5 SNMP engine identified UserEnginelD can be authenticated with the MD5 protocol Note The Business Policy Switch 2000 supports only the MD5 authentication protocol
15. a Unit2 J OQOOQOQOOQOCOCOOCOOCOOCOO OOO COO C CT a Click the ports you want to add to the selected list or click None b To delete a port from a list uncheck the box by clicking it c Click Submit 3 From the main menu choose Application gt MAC Address Security gt Security Configuration The Security Configuration page opens Figure 33 4 Inthe MAC Security Table section click the icon in the Action column of the Learn By Ports row The Port List View Learn by Ports page opens Figure 36 Figure 36 Port List View Learn by Ports page Application gt MAC Address Security Port List View Application gt MAC Address Security gt Security Configuration Learn by Ports Pot NONE1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2 Unit 1 Bi ne a a a Unit2 m m mj aj uaj u jajaja a m a m m m m m m a m a a oO 24 25 26 27 28 a im mim a Click the ports through which you want the switch to learn MAC addresses or click None b Ifyou want that port to no longer learn MAC addresses click the checked box to uncheck it Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 102 Configuring the switch c Click Submit 5 Inthe MAC Security Table section choos
16. Step 5 Shape Enter the shaping parameters for peggy Shaping Rate Kops Multiple of 64 Kbps 1 Kbps 1000 bits per second Maximum Burst Rate l Kbps 1 Kbps 1000 bits per second Maximum Burst Duration DOCCOOCCOOCOCOOOGK gt Queue Size 1 Packet he ax 13 Enter the shaping rate you want for this Shaper The system rounds up shaping rates you enter including 0 to multiples of 64 Kbps 14 Enter the maximum burst rate you want for this Shaper The system calculates a series of 6 or fewer possible durations for the shaping and maximum burst rates you set 15 Choose the Maximum Burst Duration from the pull down menu 16 Choose the queue size you want for this Shaper A page opens Figure 127 that asks you if you want to prioritize traffic for another user defined flow 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 235 Figure 127 Additional user defined flows page QoS Wizard Would you like to define another flow to prioritize E No O Yes ax arm 17 If you want to prioritize traffic for another user defined flow click Yes and Next The system returns you to the policy label page Figure 116 and you continue through steps 1 to 17 for the next user defined flow If you fill the resources of the QoS Wizard you will not be prompted for another user defined flow 18 If you do not want to prioritize traffic for another user defined flow click No and Next The system returns you
17. VLAN MAC SA Based Setting VLAN VLAN Name Learning Constraint Table 68 describes the items on the VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based setting page Table 68 VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based setting page items 2 SVL default Item Range Description VLAN 1 4094 Type a unique number to identify the VLAN VLAN Name 1 16 Type a unique name to identify the VLAN for example Learning Constraint 1 IVL Choose your learning constraint type Note If IVL is selected the VLAN uses an independent filtering database from all other VLANs If SVL is selected the VLAN shares the same filtering database as all other VLANs with SVL Note If the stack is set to a pure operational mode the default setting is IVL IVL is available only in Pure BPS 2000 mode If the stack is set to a hybrid operational mode the default setting is SVL For more information on setting your stack operational mode see Setting system operational modes on page 128 209570 C Configuring application settings 185 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list Do one of the following e Click Submit e Click Back to return to the VLAN Configuration page without making changes The new MAC SA based VLAN configuration appears in the VLAN Table on the VLAN Configuration page Figure 75 Modifying a MAC SA based VLAN To modify an existing MAC SA based VLAN 1 From the mai
18. choosing Ignore entering the Network Address Subnet Mask and Host Address 4 Complete the Source Address Mask area by either choosing Ignore entering the Network Address Subnet Mask and Host Address In the DSCP field choose either Ignore or a value from the pull down menu In the IP Protocol field choose either Ignore or a protocol from the pull down menu 7 Complete the Destination Layer4 Port area by either choosing Ignore choosing a preconfigured port number from the pull down menu entering a value for the User Defined Port Number 8 Complete the Source Layer4 Port area by either choosing Ignore choosing a preconfigured port number from the pull down menu entering a value for the User Defined Port Number 9 Enter the name you want to assign to the newly created IP filter group 10 Click the arrow on the far left to add the newly created filter into the filter group 11 Repeat steps 2 to 8 to add additional filters into the filter group 12 Go to Configuring QoS Quick Config meters on page 247 To configure a new layer 2 filter group 1 Click Configure L2 Filters The QoS Quick Config Policy page for configuring layer 2 filters opens Figure 138 and Figure 139 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 244 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 138 QoS Quick Config page for configuring layer
19. port autonegotiation speed Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 326 Index configuring 111 gigabit ports 114 Port Based modification page 176 Port Based page 175 port communication speed configuring 127 Port Configuration page 104 188 197 Port Error Summary page 148 Port Information page 190 port list 33 Port List field 99 100 Port List page 100 Port Lists page 99 Port Management page 111 Port Membership field 259 port mirroring 162 Port Mirroring page 162 Port Name field 189 191 port naming 111 113 port number 33 Port page 143 Port Priority field 190 port statistics 30 viewing 143 144 148 viewing in a bar graph format 147 viewing in a pie chart format 147 zeroing ports 146 Port Port Membership field 177 183 port based port mirroring 162 164 ports enabling 113 naming 30 113 trusted untrusted and unrestricted 256 267 power status 55 Power Status field 56 Preconfigured Port field 271 Preferred Phy field 115 Primary RADIUS Server field 46 Priority field 198 313 Private Protocol field 73 Private Protocols Supported field 71 product support 28 Protocol field 174 179 270 271 274 276 285 287 Proxy field 167 169 publications hard copy 27 related 26 Pure BPS 2000 Stack 128 PVID 30 188 PVID field 190 191 Q QoS 261 263 264 265 802 1p priority mapping configuring 263 802 1p priority configuring 261 about 253 actions 2
20. 64 bytes 93 3 102011 DiPackets 65 127 bytes 4 7 5206 W Fackets 128 255 bytes 0 1 191 60000 Packets 256 511 bytes 1 6 1824 H Fackets 512 1023 bytes 0 0 0 TE OPackets 1024 1518 bytes 0 0 0 Table 47 describes the items on the RMON Ethernet Chart page 3 To refresh statistical information go to the bottom of the page and click Update or click Back to return to the Ethernet Statistics page 209570 C Configuring remote network monitoring RMON 139 Viewing RMON Ethernet statistics in a pie chart format To view RMON Ethernet statistics in a pie chart format 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt RMON Ethernet The RMON Ethernet page opens Figure 53 2 Inthe port row of your choice click the pie chart icon The RMON Ethernet Chart page appears in a pie chart format Figure 55 Figure 55 RMON Ethernet Chart in a pie chart format Statistics gt RMON Ethernet Chart Unit 1 Port 10 W Drop Events 0 Doctets 423666 W Packets 1022 broadcast 305 multicast 2123 CRC Align Errors 0 Wundersize 0 oversize 0 Fragments 0 M collisions 0 Habbers 0 Unit 1 Pot10 Unit 1 Port 10 Brackets lt 64 bytes 702 HPackets 65 127 bytes 47 W Packets 128 255 bytes 7 Packets 256 511 bytes 22 WPackets 512 1023 bytes 3 Packets 1024 1518 bytes 241 Table 47 describes the items on the RMON Ethe
21. Policy Class Support Table policyPRCSupportTable 18 0 policyPibIncarnationTable 1 1 policyDeviceldentificationTable 1 0 policyCompLimitsTable 24 0 ntnQosinterfaceTypeTable 4 100 qoslfQueueTable 6 0 qos802DscpMappingTable 64 64 qos802CosToDscpTable 8 8 ntnQosQsetPriAssignmentTable 16 16 qosActionTable 4 128 gosMeterTable 2 200 goslpAceTable 2 1000 qoslpAclDefinitionTable 2 200 qos802AceTable 1 14 qos802AciDefinitionTable 1 14 gosTargetTable 1 200 ntnQosActionExtTable 4 128 ntnQos802FilterExtTable 1 14 Policy Device Identification Table Description Nortel Networks Business Policy Switch 2000 v1 2 0 Maximum Message Size 2048 bytes Table 102 describes the items on the Agent page Table 102 Agent page items Section Item and MIB association Range Description QoS Configuration QoS Policy Server Control Enabled Choose to enable or disable the QoS Disabled Policy server control Note Choosing to enable COPS disables local policy control QoS Policy Agent State Running The current status of the policy ntnQosConfigQpaState Initialized agent Disabled QoS Policy Agent Reset to 1 Yes Choose whether or not to reset the Defaults ntnQosConfigQpaState 2 No policy agent to the default settings QoS Policy Agent Retry Timer 1 no retry 1 86400 Type the time in seconds between ntnQosConfigQpaRetryTimer the receipt of a connection termination rejection indication and the start of a new connect
22. To delete an existing SNMPv3 management information view configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Management Info View The Management Information page opens Figure 25 2 Inthe Management Information Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the management information view configuration e Click Cancel to return to the table without making changes Configuring an SNMPv3 system notification entry You can view a table of existing SNMPv3 system notification configurations and you can configure specific SNMPv3 system notification types with particular message recipients and delete SNMPv3 notification configurations 209570 C Configuring the switch 83 Creating an SNMPv3 system notification configuration To create an SNMPV3 system notification configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Notification The Notification page opens Figure 26 Figure 26 Notification page Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Notification Notification Table Notify Tag Notify TypejEntry Storage xl sSAgTrpRew s5AgTrpRevr Trap Read Only Notification Creation NotifyName NotifyTag Notify Type Trap Z Entry Storage volatile gt Table 23 describes the items on the Notification page Table 23 Notificati
23. 134 Configuring remote network monitoring RMON Table 45 describes the fields on the RMON Event Log page Table 45 RMON Event Log page fields Item Description Time Stamp The time the event occurred Description An implementation dependent description of the event that activated this log entry Triggered By A comment describing the source of the event ID The event that generated this log entry Viewing the system log You can view a display of messages contained in non volatile random access memory NVRAM or dynamic random access memory DRAM and NVRAM To open the System Log page 1 From the main menu choose Fault gt System Log The System Log page opens Figure 52 Figure 52 System Log page Fault gt System Log System Log View By Display Unit LES Display Messages From Volatile Non Volatile Clear Messages From None bd System Log nse Ma nome ype OD OH 1M 535 Informational Cold Start Trap OD OH 1M 575 Informational Link Up Trap OD OH 1M 575 Informational Link Up Trap OD OH 1M 575 Informational Link Up Trap OD OH 1M 575 Informational Link Up Trap OD OH 1M 57S Informational Link Up Trap OD OH 1M 575 Informational Link Up Trap OD OH 1M 57S Informational Link Up Trap OD OH 1M 57S Informational Link Up Trap OD OH 1M 575 Informational Link Up Trap 209570 C Configuring remote network monitoring RMON 135
24. Deleting an SNMPv3 group access rights configuration 79 Configuring an SNMPv3 management information view 000 80 Creating an SNMPv3 management information view configuration 80 Deleting an SNMPv3 management information view configuration 82 Configuring an SNMPv3 system notification entry 000 ee eee 82 Creating an SNMPv8 system notification configuration 83 Deleting an SNMPv3 system notification configuration 84 Configuring an SNMPv3 management target address 00055 85 209570 C Contents 9 Creating an SNMPv3 target address configuration 000 85 Deleting an SNMPv3 target address configuration 0005 87 Configuring an SNMPv3 management target parameter 87 Creating an SNMPv3 target parameter configuration 87 Deleting an SNMPv3 target parameter configuration 89 Conigutitig SNMP trips ciiceiecaseucae sede h cade e nese bebe kori sishi 89 Creating an SNMP trap receiver configuration 0000e ee 89 Deleting an SNMP trap receiver configuration 00 0c eee 90 Configuring EAPOL based security 0 0 00 eee eee 91 Managing remote access by IP address 0 000 eee eee ee eee 94 Configuring MAC address based security 0 0 0 0 cece eee 96 Configuring MAC address based security 0000 c ee
25. Ethernet Errors page items 2 20 2 ceesceeee dew weree ed eed eee mee 154 Transparent Bridging page items 0 0 eee 158 Port Mirroring page Hems scvceisceeencas dorexHseekedexes eee 163 Port based monitoring modes ssassssanaanuaaarna neran 164 Address based monitoring modes 000 e eee eee 164 Rate Lining page Ome wis idvee seu edbwteawsraeeees ewe irinta 166 IGMP Configuration page items 2 00 eee ee 167 IGMP VLAN Configuration page items 0 00 e eee eee 168 IGMP Multicast Group Membership page items 170 VLAN Configuration page items 0000 e eee eee 174 VLAN Configuration Port Based setting page items 175 VLAN Configuration Port Based modification page items res 209570 C Tables 23 Table 64 VLAN Configuration Protocol Based setting page items 179 Table 65 Standard protocol based VLANs and PID types 180 Table 66 Predefined Protocol Identifier PID 0 0000 cease 181 Table 67 VLAN Configuration Protocol Based modification page items 183 Table 68 VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based setting page items 184 Table 69 VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based modification page items 186 Table 70 Port Configuration page items 0 ee 189 Table 71 Port Information page items 200 e eee ees 191 Table 72 Spanning Tree Group Configuration page ite
26. Item and MIB association Range Description xI Deletes the row Action Name 1 16 Type a character string to uniquely identify the action configuration Instance Displays the unique identifier Transmit Drop Frame 1 Transmit Choose whether the frame being evaluated should be dropped qosActionDrop 2 Drop or transmitted by this attribute The default setting is Transmit Update DSCP Ignore or integer Type a value When this field is defined it causes the value qosActionUpdateDSCP contained in the Differentiated Services DS field of an associated IP datagram to be updated with the value of this object The default setting is Ignore Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 290 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Table 95 Action page items continued Item and MIB association Range Description Set Drop Precedence 1 Ignore Choose a packet drop precedence value ntnQosActionExtSetDropPrec 2 Loss Sensitive Note Generally low packet drop precedence receives 9 Nor ass preferential treatment itiv 4 Use Defaults 5 Use Egress The default setting is Use Defaults Map Update 802 1p Priority 1 Ignore Choose the action attribute that causes the value contained in ntnQosActionExtUpdatePri 2 Priority O the 802 1p priority field to be updated based on the value of 3 Priority 1 this object The update priority range values are O lowest 4 P
27. Unit 1 Port 1 Filter Tagged 1 Yes Choose how to process filter tagged frames Frames 2 No When a flag is set Yes the frames are discarded by the forwarding process When the flag is reset the frames are processed normally The default setting is No frames are not discarded Filter Untagged 1 Yes Choose how to process filter untagged frames Frames 2 No When a flag is set the frames are discarded by the forwarding process The default setting is No no frames discarded Filter Unregistered 1 Yes Displays yes no if a flag is set If yes unregistered frames are discarded by Frames 2 No the forwarding process When the flag is reset unregistered frames are processed normally The default settings is No Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 190 Configuring application settings Table 70 Port Configuration page items continued Item Range Description PVID 1 4094 Type the number of the VLAN ID to assign to untagged frames received on this trunk port For example a port with a PVID of 3 assigns all untagged frames received on this port to VLAN 3 The default setting is 1 Note If AutoPVID is enabled and you want another PVID enter the desired PVID here Port Priority 0 7 Choose the level of priority for each port Tagging 1 Untagged Access Choose the tagging for each port 2 Tagged Trunk In the upper left hand corner click
28. categories and more than one flow per category When you fill the resources of one category you will not be prompted again and you see a check mark next to that category if there are some flows to be configured or an X mark next to that category if there are no flows to be configured in the packet prioritization screen Figure 98 You will be unable to configure more flows for that category Should you fill the QoS Wizard resources you will not be prompted again The QoS Wizard automatically presents screens to configure each prioritized traffic flow Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 212 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Additionally the packet prioritization screen has a Status button that displays a QoS Policies to Configure in a pop up window Figure 97 As you finish configuring each type of flow this pop up window displays with the configured flows you configure using the QoS Wizard listed When you completely finish the QoS Wizard the policies are implemented Note The system configures the QoS parameters you configure using the QoS Wizard only when you click Finish Figure 97 QoS Policies to Configure window QoS Policies to Configure Service Class Service Class In Profile Out Profile The QoS Policies to Configure table has the following fields Name Displays the name of the policy Meter Displays whethe
29. continued Section Item Descriptions COPS Current Type The indicator of the source of the COPS server information Table cont Note COPS servers can be configured by network management into copsClientServerConfigTable and appear in this entry with type copsServerStatic 1 Alternatively the type or entry can be a notification from another COPS server by way of the COPS PDP Redirect mechanism and appear as copsServerRedirect 2 Authorization Type The indicator of the current security mode in use between the client and the COPS server Last Conn Attempt The timestamp of the last time the client attempted to connect to this COPS server State The operational state of the connection and COPS protocol with respect to this COPS server Keep Alive Time The value of the Keepalive timeout in centiseconds currently in use by the client as specified by the COPS server in the Client Accept operation Note A value of 0 zero indicates no keepalive activity is expected Accounting Time The value of the COPS protocol Accounting timeout in centiseconds currently in use by the client as specified by the COPS server in the Client Accept operation Note A value of 0 zero indicates that the client should not send any unsolicited accounting reports COPS Statistics Table Address Type The type of address in copsClientServerAddress Address The IPv4 IPv6 or DNS address of a COPS
30. describes the PIDS that are reserved and not available for user defined PIDs Table 66 Predefined Protocol Identifier PID PID Name Encapsulation PID Value hex VLAN Type IP Ether2 Ethernet type 2 0800 0806 Standard IP on Ethernet Type 2 frames Ipx 802 3 Ethernet 802 2 FF FF Novell IPX on Ethernet 802 3 frames Ipx 802 2 Ethernet 802 0 E0 EO Novell IPX on Ethernet 802 2 frames Ipx Snap Ethernet Snap 8137 8138 Novell IPX on Ethernet SNAP frames Ipx Snap2 Ethernet type 2 8137 8138 Novell IPX on Ethernet Type 2 frames AplTk Ether2 Snap Ethernet type 2 or 809B 80F3 AppleTalk on Ethernet Type 2 and Ethernet Ethernet Snap Snap frames Declat Ether2 Ethernet type 2 6004 DEC LAT protocol DecOther Ether2 Ethernet type 2 6000 6003 6005 6009 8038 Other DEC protocols Sna 802 2 Ethernet 802 2 04 04 IBM SNA on IEEE 802 2 frames Sna Ether2 Ethernet type 2 80D5 IBM SNA on Ethernet Type 2 frames NetBios 802 2 Ethernet type 2 FO FO NetBIOS protocol Xns Ether2 Ethernet type 2 0600 0807 Xerox XNS Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 182 Configuring application settings Table 66 Predefined Protocol Identifier PID continued Vines Ether2 Ethernet type 2 OBAD Banyan VINES Ipv6 Ether2 Ethernet type 2 86DD IP version 6 User Defined Ethernet type 2 User defined 16 bit value User defined protoc
31. e A configuration file obtained from a stack unit can only be used to configure other stacks that have the same number of switches firmware version model types and physical IDs as the stack the donor stack unit resides in e Reconfigured stacks are configured according to the unit order number of the donor unit For example the configuration file parameters from a donor unit with physical ID x are used to reconfigure the unit with physical ID x e The configuration file also duplicates any settings that exist for any MDA that is installed in the donor switch If you use the configuration file to configure another switch that has the same MDA model installed the configuration file settings will also apply to and override the existing MDA settings Table 41 describes the parameters that are not saved to the configuration file Table 41 Parameters not saved to the configuration file These parameters are not saved Used in this screen See page In Band Stack IP Address IP Configuration Setup 64 In Band Switch IP Address In Band Subnet Mask Default Gateway Configuration Image Filename Configuration File Download Upload 124 TFTP Server IP Address Console Read Only Switch Password Console Comm Port Configuration t27 Console Read Write Switch Password Console Read Only Stack Password Console Read Write Stack Password 209570 C Configuring the switch 127 Confi
32. or the original standard protocol SNMPv3 is a combination of proposal updates to SNMP most of which deal with security 209570 C Configuring the switch 69 Configuring SNMPv1 You can configure SNMPv1 read write and read only community strings enable or disable trap mode settings and or enable or disable the Autotopology feature The Autotopology feature when enabled performs a process that recognizes any device on the managed network and defines and maps its relation to other network devices in real time To configure the community string trap mode and Autotopology settings and features 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv1 The SNMPv1 page opens Figure 20 Figure 20 SNMPv1 page Configuration gt SNMPv1 Community String Setting Read Only Community String public Read Write Community String private Trap Mode Setting Authentication Trap Enabled ED AutoTopology Setting AutoTopology Enabled gt ep Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 70 Configuring the switch Table 15 describes the items on the SNMPv1 page Table 15 SNMPv1 page items Section Item Range Description Community String Read Only 1 32 Type a character string to identify the community string for the Setting Community SNMPv1 read only community for example public or private String The def
33. 802 1p priority and drop precedence values associated with packets based on the DSCP value you specified in the Update DSCP action field Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 268 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Select from a list Click Submit The modified configuration appears in the DSCP Mapping Table Figure 154 Note For more information on QoS interface classes or trusted untrusted and unrestricted ports tefer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 IP filter and IP filter group configurations You can create an IP filter which enables the switch to classify traffic In turn you can create an access control list from a series of defined filters to create an IP filter group The filter group then determines access to and denial of network services Creating an IP filter configuration To create an IP filter configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt IP Classification The IP Classification page opens Figure 156 Figure 157 and Figure 158 Figure 156 IP Classification page 1 of 3 Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt IP Classification IP Filter Table SS ae onet x Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore TCP HTTP Ignore True x 2 Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore TCP Ignore HTTP True x 3 Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore TCP SMTP Ignore True
34. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25262728 Unit 1 MOOOOOMOOODOOAOOOOOOOOAOOOOe Unit 2 M m m u u a a a a a m a a a m a m a o o oa oa o m 3 Select the ports you want to clear or click None 4 Click Submit Note When you specify a port or ports to be cleared using this field the specific port or ports will be cleared for each of the entries listed in the MAC Address Security Table If you totally clear the allowed Source Port s field leaving a blank field for an entry the associated MAC address for that entry is also cleared Enabling security on ports To enable or disable MAC address based security on the port 1 From the main menu choose Application gt MAC Address Security gt Port Configuration The Port Configuration page opens Figure 39 209570 C Configuring the switch 105 Figure 39 Port Configuration page Application gt MAC Address Security gt Port Configuration MAC Address Security gt Port Configuration unit J 2 Port Trunk Security Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 10 Disabled gt 11 Disabled 12 Disabled gt 13 Disabled Op PD iy LS Rs e oe Ny ee 14 Disabled Table 32 describes the items on the Port Configuratio
35. Bowe ok RO 265 IP fitter and IP filter group CONnNQUIALONG ic4csce0iseeea sae ea deeea deh beawns 268 Creating an IP filter configuration 0 000 c eee eee 268 Deleting an IP filter configuration 0000 cee ee 272 Creating an IP filter group configuration 00 00 cee eee 272 Modifying an IP filter group configuration 0 00 eee eee 275 Deleting an IP Tiller group CONTIQUIALION 24 cnc tdnndescei a babeae en kirk 271 Layer 2 filter and layer 2 filter group configurations n saasaa aaan 278 Creating a layer 2 filter configuration s a s anaana aeae 278 Deleting a layer 2 filter configuration aasa sasaaa eee eee eee 283 Creating a layer 2 filter group configuration 0 0000 eee eee 284 Modifying a layer 2 filter group configuration 0 0 eee eee 286 Deleting a layer 2 filter group configuration 0 0 0 e eee eee 287 COMNGURING WIGS BCIONS 245 5yeso wi din 5 oes eS ohas toed abd 1 HS56 Se Obes ET 288 Creating a filter action configuration 000 cc eee 288 Deleting an action configuration 0 0 cee eee 290 Conkguong QOS MEIGS scera iosas eee ad aes ae POR ae clea 291 Ceo a OWN ste es an ame a eRe a eth area anaemia eed 291 CCU i ee ee ee ee re er 293 ACN Se NI sa eo eh kn need dea eames ake 294 COnnguritt QoS Snaps 2 5250 ccent aes ranie nei kdboreeseageane ged 294 209570 C Contents 13 GieaMmoa Shape 22344 tees
36. Engine Time 0 0 0 34 SNMP Engine Maximum Message Size 2048 SNMP Engine Dialects SNMP v1 SNMPv2c SNMPv3 Authentication Protocols Supported HMAC MDS Private Protocols Supported None SNMPv3 Counters Unavailable Contexts 0 Unknown Contexts 0 Unsupported Security Levels 0 Not In Time Windows 0 Unknown User Names Unknown Engine IDs Wrong Digests Decryption Errors Table 16 describes the fields on the System Information section of the SNMPv3 System Information page Table 16 System Information section fields Item Description SNMP Engine ID The SNMP engine s identification number SNMP Engine Boots The number of times that the SNMP engine has re initialized itself since its initial configuration SNMP Engine Time Tne number of seconds since the SNMP engine last incremented the snmpEngineBoots ject SNMP Engine Maximum The maximum length in octets of an SNMP message which this SNMP engine can send or Message Size receive and process determined as the minimum of the maximum message size values supported among all transports available to and supported by the engine SNMP Engine Dialects The SNMP dialect the engine recognizes The dialects are SNMP1v1 SNMPv2C and SNMPv3 Authentication Protocols The registration point for standards track authentication protocols used in SNMP Management Supported Frameworks The registration points are None HMAC MD5 Note The Business Policy Switch
37. Filename field 117 Bridge Hello Time field 201 Bridge Information page 199 Bridge Priority field 194 200 bridge settings 199 broadcast domains configuring 188 Broadcast field 137 141 145 broadcast traffic 165 Burst Size field 296 297 C Capabilities field 259 Carrier Sense Errors field 154 Cascade Ports field 259 check boxes about 39 Clear by Ports page 104 Clear Message From field 135 Client Type field 308 312 Collisions field 137 146 Comm Port Data Bits field 127 Comm Port Parity field 127 Comm Port Stop Bits field 127 Committed Burst Size field 292 293 Committed Rate field 292 293 Common Open Policy Services COPS sequential algorithm 313 Common Open Policy Services COPS about 307 configuring 311 deleting aclient 314 round robin algorithm 313 Statistics 309 viewing capabilities and statistics 308 Community field 90 community strings configuring 69 configuration file 124 126 Configuration File Download Upload page 124 209570 C Index 321 Configuration Image Filename field 125 Configuration page 311 Console page 39 45 Console Password Setting page 44 Console Port Speed field 127 Console Stack Password Type field 45 Console Switch Password Type field 45 Console Communication Port page 127 conventions text 26 conversation steering 162 COPS Capabilities field 308 Copy Configuration Image to Server field 125 CPU utilization 29 43 CPU Memory Utilization page 43 CRC Align Errors
38. IP address that is matched against the packet s source IP address Source Address Mask The mask for the matching of the source IP address DSCP The value that the DSCP in the packet must have and match this filter Protocol The IP protocol that is matched against the packet s IP protocol field The options are Ignore TCP UDP ICMP IGMP or RSVP Destination L4 Port The value that the packet s layer 4 destination port number can have and match the filter entry Source L4 Port The value that the packet s layer 4 source port number can have and match the filter entry 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 277 Table 90 IP Modification Group page items Item Range Description Permit 1 True If the frame matches the filter when this is set to true the matching 2 False process stops Note To group multiple filters in a single group assign Filter Index and Filter Order the same filter group name 3 Select or deselect the filter as a member of the Filter Group 4 Click Submit Deleting an IP filter group configuration To delete an IP filter group configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt IP Classification The IP Classification page opens Figure 156 2 Inthe IP Filter Group Table section in the IP filter group configuration row of your choice click the Delete icon A
39. Inthe upper left corner of the Switch View page click the number of the device you want to view The Switch View page is updated with a view of the selected switch Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 60 Viewing summary information Changing stack numbering If your system is set to stack operational mode you can view existing stack numbering information and renumber the devices in your stack framework For information on how to set your system s operational mode see Setting system operational modes on page 128 Note The unit number does not affect the base unit designation gt To view or renumber devices within the stack framework 1 From the main menu choose Summary gt Stack Numbering The Stack Numbering Setting page opens Figure 15 Figure 15 Stack Numbering Setting page Summary gt Stack Numbering Stack Numbering Setting Current Unit Number MAC Address New Unit Number 1 00 80 2D 8C 36 E0 1B 2 00 80 2D 8C 25 C0 2 B 3 00 80 2D 8C 37 80 3 amp Table 12 describes the fields on the Stack Numbering Setting page Table 12 Stack Numbering Setting page fields Item Range Description Current Unit Number 1 8 Unit number previously assigned to the policy switch The entries in this column are displayed in order of their current physical cabling with respect to the base unit and can show nonconsecutive unit nu
40. MAC Address Security gt DA MAC Filtering Destination MAC Address Filtering Table MAC Address DA MAC Filtering Entry Creation DA MAC Address Table 33 describes the items on the DA MAC Filtering page Table 33 DA MAC Filtering page items Section Item Range Description Destination MAC Action Allows you to delete a MAC DA you are filtering Address Filtering Table x 209570 C Configuring the switch 107 Table 33 DA MAC Filtering page items Section Item Range Description MAC Address 1 10 Displays list of MAC DAs you want filtered DA MAC Filtering DA MAC XX XX XX XX XX XX Enter the MAC DA you want to filter Entry Creation Address Note Ensure that you do not enter the MAC address of the management station 2 Inthe DA MAC Filtering Entry Creation area enter the MAC DA you want to filter You can list up to 10 MAC DAs to filter 3 Click Submit The system returns you to the DA MAC Filtering page Table 40 with the new DA listed in the table Deleting MAC DAs To delete a MAC DA 1 From the main menu choose Application gt MAC Address Security gt DA MAC Filtering The DA MAC Filtering page opens Figure 40 2 Inthe Destination MAC Address Filtering Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Do one of the following e Click Yes to
41. Memory Utilization page items Section Item Range Description CPU Utilization From System Boot Up 1 100 Displays percentage of time system has been busy since boot up Last 10 Seconds 1 100 Displays percentage of time system has been busy during the last 10 seconds Last 1 Minute 1 100 Displays percentage of time system has been busy during the last 1 minute Last 10 Minutes 1 100 Displays percentage of time system has been busy during the last 10 minutes Last 60 Minutes 1 100 Displays percentage of time system has been busy during the last 60 minutes Last 24 Hours 1 100 Displays percentage of time system has been busy during the last 24 hours Memory Utilization Available 1 100 Displays the percentage of dynamic memory currently available measured as a percentage of memory available immediately after boot up LowMark 1 100 Displays the lowest percentage of dynamic memory available since boot up Configuring system security This section describes the steps you use to build and manage security using the Web based management interface For more information on setting security systems refer to setting EAPOL MAC security and IP manager list in Chapter 4 Setting console Telnet and Web passwords To set console Telnet and Web passwords 1 From the main menu choose Administration gt Security and Console Telnet or Web 209570 C Administering the switc
42. Multicast Group Membership page Application gt IGMP gt IGMP Multicast Group Membership Multicast Group Membership Selection View By VLAN pa C Submit J Multicast Group Membership Table Multicast Group Address Port Table 60 describes the items on the IGMP Multicast Group Membership page Table 60 IGMP Multicast Group Membership page items Section Item Description Multicast Group VLAN Choose the VLAN on which to view Membership Selection configured IP addresses View By Multicast Group Multicast Group Address The IP multicast group addresses that are Membership Table currently active on the associated port Port The port numbers associated with the IP multicast group addresses displayed in the IP Multicast Group Address field 2 Inthe Multicast Group Membership Selection section choose the number of VLAN on which to view configured IP addresses 3 Click Submit The results are displayed in the Multicast Group Membership Table Figure 74 209570 C Configuring application settings 171 Creating and managing virtual LANs VLANs A VLAN is a collection of switch ports that make up a single broadcast domain You can configure a VLAN for a single switch or for multiple switches When you create a VLAN you can control traffic flow and ease the administration of moves adds and changes on the network by eliminating the need to change physical
43. Port Max L4 Port cal Layer2 Filter Creation Ignore VLAN C VLAN s VLANAT maximum 32 VLAN Tag ignore z amp Ignore EtherType C Preconfigured Netmap TCP z C User Defined e g 08137 Ignore 802 1p Priori perony a a 7 eo DSCP ignore z 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 279 Figure 161 Layer2 Classification page 2 of 2 IP Protocol ignore 7 E Ignore TEN B E Inspect Destination IP Layer4 Port Range Destination IP Layer4 Port Range Minimum Value P 65535 Maximum Value J0 0 65535 E Ignore B E Inspect Source IP Layer4 Port Range Source IP Layer4 Port Range Minimum Value fo 0 65525 Maximum Value J0 0 65535 Layer2 Filter Group Table Action Filter Group Name X wizardL2_FLTR Create Filter Group Table 91 describes the items on the Layer2 Filter Table and Layer2 Filter Creation sections of the Layer2 Classification page Table 91 Layer2 Filter Table and Layer2 Filter Creation section items Section Item Range Description Layer 2 Filter Action Deletes the row Table xI Instance Displays unique identifier VLAN Ignore 1 32 Click the VLANs you want to reference with this filer up to 32 VLANs Range is Ignore 1 to 32 VLAN Tag 1 Tagged Displays whether or not to check VLAN tagging 2 Untagged 3 Ignore Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 280 Impleme
44. Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 264 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Table 83 describes the items on the 802 1p Priority Mapping page Table 83 802 1p Priority Mapping page items Item Description 802 1p Priority The 802 1p user priority to map to a DSCP value at ingress DSCP Type the DSCP value to associate with the specified 802 1p user priority value at ingress 2 Type the information in the text boxes 3 Click Submit Creating a DSCP queue assignment Note Nortel Networks recommends using the default DSCP to queue set mappings to ensure end to end QoS connectivity To create a DSCP queue set association 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt DSCP Q Assignment The DSCP Queue Assignment page opens Figure 153 Figure 153 DSCP Queue Assignment page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt DSCP Queue Assignment DSCP Assignment View By Queue Set 1B DSCP Assignment Table 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 265 Table 84 describes the items on the DSCP Queue Assignment page Table 84 DSCP Queue Assignment page items Section Item Format DSCP Assignment Queue Set Choose the queue set to display in the DSCP Assignment Table View By DSCP Assignment DSCP The DSCP value to map to a queue Table Queue The queue set to which the traffic with the given DS
45. TCP connection to the COPS server Note This value is valid only for client type 0 Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections TCP Connection Failures The number of times that the COPS client failed to open a TCP connection to the COPS server Note This value is valid only for client type 0 Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Open Attempts The number of times that the COPS client attempted to perform a COPS Client Open to a COPS server for the selected client type Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Open Failures The number of times that the COPS client failed to perform a COPS Client Open to a COPS server for the selected client type Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Unsupported Client Type The total number of COPS packets that this client has received from COPS servers that referred to client types that are unsupported by the client Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Unsupported Version The total number of COPS packets that this client has received from COPS servers marked for the selected client type that had a COPS protocol version number that is unsupported by the client Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Length Mismatch The total number of COPS packets that the client received
46. The RMON Threshold page opens Figure 50 Figure 50 RMON Threshold page Fault gt RMON Threshold RMON Threshold Table lindex _Target__ Parameter Current LevellRising LevellRising Action interval Sample x 1 Unit 2 Port 2 etherStatsPkts 6482 2800 Log and Trap 30 Absolute RMON Threshold Creation Alarm Index Unit pel Port x Parameter Good Bytes Rising Level Rising Action None Interval M seconds Alarm Sample Absolute 209570 C Configuring remote network monitoring RMON 131 Table 44 describes the items on the RMON Threshold page Table 44 RMON Threshold page items Item Range Description x Deletes the row Index Alarm 1 10 Type the unique number to identify the alarm entry Index Target Integer The unit number and port number Unit 1 8 Choose the switch on which to configure port alarms Port 1 28 Choose the port on which to set an alarm Parameter 1 Good Bytes Choose the sampled statistic 2 Good Packets 3 Multicast 4 Broadcast 5 CRC Errors 6 Runts 7 Fragments 8 Frame Too Long 9 Collisions Current Level Integer The value of the statistic during the last sampling period Note If the sample type is Delta the value is the difference between the samples at the beginning and end of the period If the sample type is Absolute the value is the sampled value at the end of the period Rising Level Integer
47. VLAN 1 O No E Yes anD ax _ 11 If you do not want to shape traffic for the specified VLAN click No The system opens to a page Figure 105 that asks you if you want to prioritize traffic for another VLAN If you fill the resources of the QoS Wizard you will not be prompted for another VLAN 12 If you want to shape traffic for the specified VLAN click Yes A page opens Figure 104 that allows you to set shaping parameters for the specified VLAN Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 218 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 104 Setting shaping parameters for VLAN page QoS Wizard Step 4 Shape Enter the shaping parameters for VLAN 1 Shaping Rate o Kbps Multiple of 64 Kbps 1 Kbps 1000 bits per second Maximum Burst Rate D Kbps 1 Kbps 1000 bits per second Maximum Burst Duration 0000000000000000 E Queue Size 1 Packet E 13 Enter the shaping rate you want for this Shaper The system rounds up shaping rates you enter including 0 to multiples of 64 Kbps 14 Enter the maximum burst rate you want for this Shaper The system calculates a series of 6 or fewer possible durations for the shaping and maximum burst rates you set 15 Choose the Maximum Burst Duration from the pull down menu 16 Choose the queue size you want for this Shaper 17 Click Next A page opens Figure 105 that asks you if you want to prioriti
48. Wizard 00 00 e eee 220 Prioritizing user defined flows with the QoS Wizard 000005 226 RIS GooS Quick CONTO sates he dabei ak ee a Re elo hs ak in 236 Using QoS Quick Config to configure interface groups 237 Using QoS Quick Config to configure policies 00 000 eee eee 239 Configuring QoS Quick Config filters 0 000 c eee eee 241 Deleting Qos Quick Config filters from the filter group 246 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 12 Contents Configuring QoS Quick Config meters 0000 e eee eee 247 Configuring QoS Quick Config shapers 00 0c eee eee 248 Configuring QoS Quick Config policies 0 0c ee 250 Chapter 9 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 2 20e eee ee eeee 253 Configuring an interface group 2 2 2 eee 254 Creating an interface group configuration 00 cece eee eee 254 Displaying Interface ID Table 0 0 cee eee 257 Adding or removing interface group members 0 eee eee ee eee 258 Deleting an interface group configuration 0 0 0 eee ee eee 260 Configuring 802 1p priority queue assignment 000 eee eee 261 Configuring 802 1p priority mapping 2 ee 263 Creating a DSCP queue assignment 0000 eee eens 264 Configuring BSUP Mapp ii2sec divas heeiaetas beh cea oes
49. a pie chart format 0 0000 eee eee 152 Interface Chart in a bar graph format 00000 cea eee 153 Ethemet Errors pag lt c0cc stat deans deme deverdeed eamnd amass 154 209570 C Figures 17 Figure 65 Ethernet Error Chart in a pie chart format 000 156 Figure 66 Ethernet Error Chart in a bar graph format 2 000 157 Figure 67 Transparent Bridging page 0 eee eee 158 Figure 68 Transparent Bridging Chart in a pie chart format 159 Figure 69 Transparent Bridging Chart in a bar graph format 160 Figure 70 Port Mirroring page 2 02600 0c seer dee ener vedeeeeneee seeded eee 162 Figure 71 Rate Limiting page duc code eeke Kani cw he oe eee eed eke 165 Figure 72 IGMP Configuration page aanne 167 Figure 73 IGMP VLAN Configuration page 00 0c eee eee 168 Figure 74 IGMP Multicast Group Membership page 20000 170 Figure 75 VLAN Configuration page 0 60 c eee eee 173 Figure 76 VLAN Configuration Port Based setting page 175 Figure 77 VLAN Configuration Port Based modification page 176 Figure 78 VLAN Configuration Protocol Based setting page 178 Figure 79 VLAN Configuration Protocol Based modification page 182 Figure 80 VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based setting page 184 Figure 81 VLAN Configuration MAC S
50. and manage Optivity Policy Services e Release Notes for Optivity Policy Services Version 2 0 1 part number 306975 F Rev 00 Documents important Optivity Policy Services changes that are not covered in other related publications e Task Map Installing Optivity Policy Services Product Family part number 306976 E Rev 00 Provides a quick map to installing Optivity Policy Services e Known Anomalies for Optivity Policy Services Version 2 0 part number 306974 E Rev 00 Describes known anomalies with Optivity Policy Services You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free directly from the Internet Go to the www nortelnetworks com documentation URL The product family for the BPS 2000 is Data and Internet Find the product for which you need documentation Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product Use Adobe Acrobat Reader to open the manuals and release notes search for the sections you need and print them on most standard printers Go to Adobe Systems at the www adobe com URL to download a free copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 28 Additionally you can obtain printed books from Fatbrain com Contact Fatbrain com to order a printed book at http www 1 fatbrain com documentation nortel How to get help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks
51. as is e re mark the 802 1p priority value or leave as is 2 In the Interface Group Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list Click Submit The new interface group configuration appears in the Interface Group Table Figure 148 Displaying Interface ID Table To display the Interface ID Table From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Interface Configuration The QoS Advanced Interface Configuration page opens Figure 148 Click Display Interface ID Table The Interface ID page opens Figure 149 The table displays all interfaces and the interface group role combination to which it belongs If an interface does not belong to an interface group role combination it does not display in the table Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 258 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced The table displays all created interface groups whether created using the Qos Advanced pages the QoS Wizard or the QoS Quick config Figure 149 Interface ID page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Interface ID Interface ID Table 1 allBPSlfcs 1 2 allBPSlics 1 3 allBPSlics 1 4 allBPSlfcs 1 5 allBPSlfcs 1 6 allBPSifcs 1 K allBPSlics 1 8 allBPSlics 1 allBPSlics 1 10 allBPSlfcs 1 11 allBPSIfcs 1 12 allBPSlics 1 13 allBPSlfcs 1 14 allBPSlics 1 15 allBPSIfcs 1 16 allBPS
52. authenticate Now Allows you to activate EAPOL authentication immediately without waiting for the re authentication period to expire Re authentication 1 Enabled 2 Disabled Allows you to repeat EAPOL authentication according to the time value specified in Re authentication Period field Re authentication Period 1 604800 With Re authentication enabled allows you to specify the time period between successive EAPOL authentications Quiet Period 0 65535 Allows you to specify the time interval between an authentication failure and the start of a new authentication attempt Transmit Period 1 65535 Allows you to specify how long the switch waits for the supplicant to respond to EAP Request Identity packets Supplicant Timeout 1 65535 Allows you to specify how long the switch waits for the supplicant to respond to all EAP packets except EAP Request Identity packets Server Timeout 1 65535 Allows you to specify how long the switch waits for the RADIUS server to respond to all EAP packets Maximum Requests 1 10 Allows you to specify the number of times the switch attempts to resend EAP packets to a supplicant Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 94 Configuring the switch 2 Complete fields as described in the table 3 Click Submit Managing remote access by IP address Beginning with sof
53. based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 260 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Note Beginning with software version 2 0 you can add all ports of one unit simultaneously by clicking All Also if you are using stacked BPS 2000 you can modify add or delete the interfaces of only one unit at a time 4 Do one of the following e Click Submit e Click Back to return to the Interface Configuration page without making changes Deleting an interface group configuration To delete an Interface group configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Interface Configuration The QoS Advanced Interface Configuration page opens Figure 148 2 Inthe Interface Group Table section in the interface group configuration row of your choice click the Modify icon The Interface Group Assignment page opens Figure 150 3 Inthe Port Membership section click the check boxes to deselect all ports associated with the interface group Note Beginning with software version 2 0 you can delete all ports of one unit simultaneously by clicking All 4 Click Submit The Interface Configuration page is displayed Figure 148 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 261 5 Inthe Interface Group Table section in the configuration row of your choice click the Delete icon A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 6 Doo
54. be left justified Host Address XXX XXX XXX Click if you want the filter to match the packet s XXX source host IP address Enter the IP address to match against the packet s source IP address IP Filter Creation DSCP Ignore Integer Choose the value that the DSCP in the packet must DSCP qoslpAceDscp 0 63 have and match this filter IP Filter Creation Protocol Ignore 0 Choose the IP protocol to match against the IP Protocol qoslpAceProtocol TCP 6 packet s IP protocol field UDP 17 ICMP 1 IGMP 2 RSVP 46 IP Filter Creation Ignore Click if you want the filter to ignore the packet s layer Destination Layer4 4 destination port Port Preconfigured Port TFTP Choose the value that the packet s layer 4 FTP destination port number must have and match this TELNET filter SMTP HTTP HTTPS User Defined Port Integer Enter the value that the packe s layer 4 destination port number must have and match this filter IP Filter Creation Ignore Click if you want the filter to ignore the packet s layer Source Layer4 4 source port Port Preconfigured Port TFTP Choose the value that the packet s layer 4 source FTP port number must have and match this filter TELNET SMTP HTTP HTTPS User Defined Port Integer Enter the value that the packet s layer 4 source port number must have and match this filter Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 20
55. bridging statistics You can view the transparent bridging statistics measured for each monitored interface on the device To view transparent bridging statistics 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Transparent Bridging The Transparent Bridging page opens Figure 67 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 158 Viewing system statistics Figure 67 Transparent Bridging page Statistics gt Transparent Bridging Transparent Bridging Statistics Table unit 2 _Chart_ Port in ees es Mees We 0 o o We 2 o 0 o We 3 o o o Li 4 Q 0 o We s o o o lu 5 o o o We 7 316 3 o Li i o o We 2 o o o We o o o o We 1 0 0 o We 2 o o o We o ny 0 We 14 i o o la 16 0 o o Table 53 describes the items on the Transparent Bridging page Table 53 Transparent Bridging page items Item Description Displays statistics in a bar graph format e Displays statistics in a pie chart format Port The port number that corresponds to the selected switch In Frames dot1dTpPortInFrames The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is counted only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function including bridge management errors Out Frames dot1dTpPortOutFrames The number of frames that have be
56. called the Default STG and sends only untagged BPDUs in order to operate with all devices that support only one instance of STP Although ports can be added to or deleted from the Default STG the Default STG itself cannot be deleted from the system All other STGs except the Default STG must be created by the user Note To become active each STG must be enabled by the user after creation For guidelines on configuring refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 209570 C Configuring application settings 193 Beginning with software version 2 0 you can set the spanning tree priority and path cost for each individual port Creating spanning tree groups To configure spanning tree groups 1 From the main menu choose Application gt Spanning Tree gt Group Configuration The Group Configuration page opens Figure 85 Figure 85 Spanning Tree Group Configuration page Application gt Spanning Tree gt Group Configuration STP Group Table Group Pres Hello Max Age Forward Delay Tagged BPDU onj VID used for STPG Priority Time Time aaa fe Time sec ae Port Tagged BPDU State Al xX x 1 0x8000 2 4001 Enabled STP Group Creation STP Group Index Group2 Bridge Priority jeooo OF FFF Hello Time seconds 1 10 Max Age Time fo seconds 40 Forward Delay Time fhs seconds 4 30 Tagged BPDU on Tagged Port ves z VID used for Tagged BPDU aoz 1 ana
57. connections Wrong Objects The total number of COPS packets that the client received from COPS servers marked for the selected client type not containing a permitted set of COPS protocol objects Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Wrong OpCode The total number of COPS packets that the client received from COPS servers marked for the selected client type having a COPS protocol Op Code that should not have been sent to a COPS client for example Open Requests Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Timedout Clients The total number of times that the client has been shut down for the selected client type by COPS servers that detected a COPS protocolKeepalive timeout Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Auth Failures The total number of times that the client received a COPS packet marked for the selected client type that could not be authenticated using the authentication mechanism used by the client Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Auth Missing The total number of times that the client received a COPS packet marked for this client type not containing authentication information Creating a COPS configuration You can select the COPS server s to use to obtain policy information by creating COPS configurations To create a COPS configuration 1 From
58. delete the target parameter configuration e Click Cancel to return to the table without making changes Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 108 Configuring the switch Viewing learned MAC addresses by VLAN You can view MAC addresses and their associated port or trunk that the switch or stack configuration has learned based on the VLAN you select To view learned MAC addresses and their associated port or trunk 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt MAC Address Table The MAC Address Table page opens Figure 41 Figure 41 MAC Address Table page Configuration gt MAC Address Table MAC Address Setting Aging Time 300 seconds Select VLAN 1 v MAC Address Table Number of addresses 26 00 00 81 65 20 02 Unit 2 Port 24 00 00 81 C1 9B 81 Unit 2 Port 24 00 00 81 C1 F6 81 Unit 2 Port 24 00 08 C7 02 C4 CO Unit 2 Port 24 00 08 C7 20 CC AE Unit 2 Port 24 00 08 C7 90 2E E5 Unit 2 Port 24 00 20 AF 9E 9E FD Unit 2 Port 24 00 60 97 22 54 7C Unit 2 Port 24 00 60 FD EE 19 B2 Unit 2 Port 24 00 80 2D 22 4E 01 Unit 2 Port 24 00 80 2D 39 87 F4 Unit 2 Port 24 00 80 2D 39 F0 05 Unit 2 Port 24 00 80 2D 39 F2 00 Unit 2 Port 24 00 80 2D 39 F2 05 Unit 2 Port 24 NN AN SF RA 41 35 Unit 2 Part 2A 209570 C Configuring the switch 109 Table 34 describes the items on the MAC Address Table page Table 34 MAC Address Table
59. for the Business Policy Switch Embedded Web Content General Stack Numbering Configuration SNMPw3 System Information SNMPv3 User Specification SNMPw3 Management Information View SNMPw3 Notification SNMPw3 Target Address SNMPw3 Target Parameter SNMP Trap o o o o o o o o o o o o 2 Click on any content item to read information about the topic if you clicked the Help icon on a management page information about that page is immediately displayed Click Return to Top to return to the Content index Close the Web browser Downloading technical publications You can download current documentation about the Web based management user interface from Nortel Networks Technical Documentation Web site To download current documentation 1 From the main menu choose Support gt Release Notes Nortel Networks Technical Documentation Web site opens in a separate Web browser Figure 176 209570 C Support menu 317 Figure 176 Nortel Networks Technical Documentation Web site eo Navigate Our Site lt Go Home ContactUs Help L Your Location Home Customer Support Documentation Welcome D t ti Guest ocumentation Customer North America Support Home z Login e My Bookshelf What s New gister Customize If you would like to save documents 414 1343 800 23 May 2001 for future reference you can Just 411 1343 4000 23 Ma
60. from COPS servers marked for the selected client type that had a COPS protocol message length that did not match the actual received packet Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Unknown Opcode The total number of COPS packets that the client received from COPS servers marked for the selected client type having a COPS protocol Op Code not recognized by the client Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Unknown Cnum The total number of COPS packets that the client received from COPS servers marked for the selected client type containing a COPS protocol object C Num not recognized by the client Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Bad Ctype The total number of COPS packets that the client received from COPS servers marked for the selected client type containing a COPS protocol object C Type not defined for the C Nums known by the client Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections 209570 C Implementing Common Open Policy Services COPS 311 Table 103 Status page items continued Section Item Descriptions COPS Statistics Bad Sends Table cont The total number of COPS packets that the client attempted to send to COPS servers marked for the selected client type that resulted in a transmit error Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new
61. have and match this filter Source IP L4 Port Min Ignore Integer Displays the least value that the packet s layer 4 source 0 65535 port number can have and match this filter Source IP L4 Port Max Ignore Integer Displays the maximum value that the packet s layer 4 0 65535 source port number can have and match this filter Layer2 Filter VLAN Ignore 1 32 Choose up to 32 VLAN names or ID numbers Creation VLAN Tag 1 Tagged Choose whether or not to check VLAN tagging 2 Untagged 3 Ignore Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 282 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Table 91 Layer2 Filter Table and Layer2 Filter Creation section items continued Section Item Range Description EtherType Ignore Netmap TCP Netmap XNS XTP LOOP Vines Vines IP Banyan Vines Echo Vines Banyon Echo ARP RARP IP IPv6 3Com NBP 3Com NBP Ack 3Com NBP ConnReq 3Com NBP ConnRsp 3Com NBP ConnComplt 3Com NBP CloseReq 3Com NBP CloseRsp 3Com NBP Datagram 3Com NBP Broadcast 3Com NBP NBP NameClaim 3Com NBP DelName LAP Atalk ARP Atalk IBM Net Mon IBMRT XNS Compatibility XNS IPX Netware SNMP User Defined Choose the EtherType to match Note If you choose User Defined enter the value 802 1p Priority Ignore 0 7 Click the 802 1p priority level DSCP Ignore Integer 0 63 Choose the value that the
62. identifier Data Specification 1 No Meter Data Displays whether the meter has metered data or not All 2 Metered Data meters created with software version 2 0 or higher have only metered data Committed Rate 13 1 700 000 Kbps Displays the Committed Rate in kbps Committed Burst Size 2 047 to 131 071 bytes Displays the Committed Burst Size in bytes In Profile Action Out Profile Action Configured Displays the In Profile Action for this meter user defined action Configured With a meter using metered data this field displays the user defined action action specified for traffic that is out of profile With a meter using no metered data this field displays N A All meters created with software version 2 0 or higher have only metered data Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 294 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Deleting a meter To delete a meter 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Meters The Meter page opens Figure 165 2 Inthe Meter Table section click the Delete icon to delete the meter A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the meter configuration e Click Cancel to return to the Meter page without making changes Note You cannot delete a meter that is referenced by a policy You must delete t
63. is used to coordinate VLANs across multiple switches With software version 1 1 and higher the automatic PVID feature automatically sets the PVID when you configure a port based VLAN The PVID value will be the same value as VLAN The user can also manually change the PVID value The default setting for AutoPVID is Off you must enable this feature Protocol based VLANs Beginning with software version 1 2 you can configure as many as 255 protocol based VLANs with up to 14 different protocols A protocol based VLAN is a VLAN in which the switch ports are configured as members of a broadcast domain based on the protocol information within a packet A protocol based VLAN can localize broadcast traffic and assure that only the protocol based VLAN ports are flooded with the specified protocol type packets For protocol based VLANS the VLAN classification of the frame is dependent on the protocol of the incoming untagged frame The frame is forwarded only if that VLAN is registered at the egress port MAC SA based VLANs A MAC source address SA based VLAN is a VLAN whose frame classification is dependent on the MAC SA of the incoming untagged frame The frame is forwarded only if that VLAN is registered at the egress port 209570 C Configuring application settings 173 Configuring VLANs You can create VLANs by assigning switch ports MAC SA and protocols as VLAN members and you can designate an existing VLAN to act as the
64. name In the TFTP Server IP Address enter the IP address of your TFIP load host Choose BPS 2000 Image in the Start TFTP Load of New Image field Click Submit The system resets which may take a few minutes The system opens to the System Information page Figure 4 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Software Download In the BPS 2000 Diagnostics Filename field enter the name of the BPS 2000 diags file In the TFTP Server IP Address enter the IP address of your TFIP load host In the Start TFTP Load of New Image field choose BPS 2000 Diagnostics Click Submit The system resets which may take a few minutes The system opens to the System Information page Figure 4 However if you are currently using software version 1 0 1 0 1 or 1 1 you must upgrade to software version 1 1 1 before upgrading to version 2 0 209570 C Configuring the switch 121 Upgrading software in a Hybrid stack The physical order of the units and the unit numbering in the Hybrid stack does not affect the upgrading process at all In addition the cabling order regarding upstream downstream neighbors does not affect the process Before you attempt to download new software or upgrade software to a Hybrid mixed stack you must ensure that the Interoperability Software Version Numbers ISVN are identical That is the ISVN number for the BayStack 450 switch and BayStack 410 switch must have the same ISVN as the BPS 2000 If the IS
65. of available bandwidth consumable to service the queue in one cycle Absolute Bandwidth The absolute bandwidth consumable to service the queue in one cycle Bandwidth Allocation Displays whether absolute or relative bandwidth is specified Service Order The order in which a queue is serviced based on the defined discipline Size The maximum size of the queue in bytes Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 256 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Table 78 describes the items on the Interface Group Table section of the QoS Advanced Interface Group page Table 78 Interface Group Table section items Item Description E Opens a modification page x Deletes the row Role Combination The tag used to identify interfaces with the characteristics specified by the attributes of this class instance string 1 64 These identifiers are used within a number of classes to logically identify a physical set of interfaces to which policy rules and actions are applied Capabilities A list of the interface capabilities used by the PDP or network manager to select which policies and configurations may be pushed to the Policy Enforcement Point PEP The options are 0 Other 1 InputlpClassification 2 output Ip Classification 3 input 802 Classification 4 output 802 Classification 5 single Queuing Discipline and 6 h
66. opens Figure 10 Note When you are working on a single nonstacked switch the system returns the message Are you sure your want to reset the switch When you press OK the switch resets Figure 10 Reset page Administration gt Reset Reset Selection Reset Entire Stack K Submit 2 From the list choose to reset the switch only or the entire stack 3 Click Submit Note If you have not configured system password security a reset returns you to the home page as shown in Figure 1 on page 35 If you have configured system password security a reset returns you to a log on page as shown in Figure 8 on page 47 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 50 Administering the switch Resetting the BPS 2000 to system defaults You can reset a standalone switch a specific unit in a stack configuration or an entire stack replacing all configured switch parameters with the factory default values Caution If you choose reset to default settings all configured settings are replaced with factory default settings when you click Submit Stack Operational Mode is not reset to factory default For more information on factory default settings see Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 During the reset process the switch initiates a self test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests The LEDs display vari
67. page to view the following parameters Capabilities Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 238 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Interface Class Refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 for more information on interface classes Port Membership 3 To create an Interface Group click Create Interface Group The QoS Quick Config Interface Group page opens Figure 131 with the Create Interface Groups option displaying Figure 131 QoS Quick Config Interface Group page Create Interface Group QoS Quick Config gt Interface Group Interface Group View Interface Groups E Create Interface Group Role mo Combination Iterace Untrusted z Class Port Membership Cascade Pc Port All1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2728U1U2U3U4U5U Unit 1 O OOOOOOOCOOOOOOCOOOOOOCOOOCOCECECI Enter the name you want for the new Role Combination Interface Group Choose the Interface Class you want from Trusted Untrusted or Unrestricted Refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 for more information on interface classes Click the ports you want to belong to this Role Combination Interface Group Click Submit The QoS Quick Config Interface Group page opens Figure 130 with the View Interface Groups option displaying the new Role combination you just create
68. product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers Technical Solutions Center Telephone Europe Middle East and Africa 33 4 92 966 968 North America 800 4NORTEL or 800 466 7835 Asia Pacific 61 2 9927 8800 China 800 810 5000 Additional information about the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers is available from the www nortelnetworks com help contact global URL An Express Routing Code ERC is available for many Nortel Networks products and services When you use an ERC your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service To locate an ERC for your product or service go to the http www 130 nortelnetworks com cgi bin eserv common essContactUs jsp URL 209570 C 29 Chapter 1 Using the Web based management interface This chapter describes the requirements for using the Web based management interface and how to use it as a tool to configure your BPS 2000 This chapter covers e New features next e Stacking compatibility on page 30 e Software version 2 0 compatibility with BayStack 450 switches on page 32 e Requirements on page 33 e Port numbering syntax on page 33 e Logging
69. remote network monitoring RMON 141 Table 48 describes the items on the RMON History page Table 48 RMON History page items Statistics Table Section Item Description RMON History Unit Choose the unit number to be monitored Statistics View By Port Choose the port number to be monitored ae Displays statistics as a line graph b RMON History Start The value of the sysUPTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured Drop Events The number of events in which packets were dropped by the interface due to a lack of resources Octets The number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence FCS octets Packets The number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address This does not include multicast packets Broadcast The number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address This does not include multicast packets Multicast The number of good packets received that were directed to the multicast address This does not include packets sent to the broadcast address CRC Align Errors The number of packets received that had a length excluding and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame FCS with an integral number of octets FCS errors with a non integral number of octets alignment error Undersi
70. screen to set autonegotiation for all gigabit ports To configure high speed flow control 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt High Speed Flow Control The High Speed Flow Control page opens Figure 44 209570 C Configuring the switch 115 Figure 44 High Speed Flow Control page Configuration gt High Speed Flow Control High Speed Flow Control Setting Unit Autonegotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled X Preferred Phy Right Active Phy None Table 36 describes the items on the High Speed Flow Control page Table 36 High Speed Flow Control page items 2 Symmetric 3 Asymmetric Item Range Description Autonegotiation 1 Enabled Choose to enable or disable the autonegotiation feature 2 Disabled Siete ee n NOTE This field is disabled for all fiber optic ports Additionally you cannot disable this field for the ports on the BPS2000 1GT and BPS2000 2GT MDAs When enabled the port advertises support for flow control autonegotiation Flow Control 1 Enabled Choose your flow control preference to control traffic and avoid congestion on the gigabit MDA port Note Ensure that the settings are the same for both sides of the link Preferred Phy 1 Left 2 Right Choose the preferred physical port The port not selected automatically reverts to a backup physical port NOTE This field may not appear depending on the MDA you are using Act
71. se vah ee eee ehh bee ee EEE SPER ESS hs Hoes 294 MAGI AD CIS cciliceu a ewes OMAR Dud De eee Re ee ok eRe 296 Deleting AShGPGF 2 26 cccccrvetaeeee cee eba era thee ede eed mE 297 Configuring 0S Policies ciccss scence ces iceasae tarii atin bees teikia 297 installing deined TS icscee sceeer eta ska i SReRReR ere enee ewe Eee uwes 298 Viewing hardware policy statistics 0 0 cee ee 301 Deleting a hardware policy configuration 0 000 e eee eee 303 Configuring QoS Policy Agent QPA characteristics 00 00000 304 Chapter 10 Implementing Common Open Policy SPES GPa srana acces seeGonnces S EA 307 Viewing COPS statistics and capabilities nananana 308 Creating a COPS configuration 224 0eesecessceeeur eben ees NE A 311 Deleting a COPS client configuration 000 ee 314 Chapter 11 SUPPO MENU 41 51 eensdcdne cessation eesacens ers wiadesanseaen 315 Using the online help option 0 00 cee eee 315 Downloading technical publications a na saaana anaana deed ada ohare 316 Decade PHO 14 rere nnsa eea R RRA 317 a E T TE EAA LA E 319 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 14 Contents 209570 C 15 Figures Figure 1 Web based management interface home page 2 0 35 Figure2 WebPage lAyOUl cc 0senin dees ideseven ere eh eae as deeb nr eeens 36 Foueg Console page 2 oc ceiew Shien sees see bee eee Se
72. shielded against the generation of radio interference in accordance with the application of Council Directive 89 336 EEC Article 4a Conformity is declared by the application of EN 55 022 Class A CISPR 22 Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take appropriate measures Achtung Dieses ist ein Ger t der Funkst6rgrenzwertklasse A In Wohnbereichen k nnen bei Betrieb dieses Ger tes Rundfunkst rungen auftreten in welchen Fallen der Benutzer fiir entsprechende Gegenma nahmen verantwortlich ist Attention Ceci est un produit de Classe A Dans un environnement domestique ce produit risque de cr er des interf rences radio lectriques il appartiendra alors l utilisateur de prendre les mesures sp cifiques appropri es AEC Declaration of Conformity This product conforms or these products conform to the provisions of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 4 Japan Nippon requirements only Voluntary Control Council for Interference VCCI statement CORB HHUBRESERMSAERMBMBRAS VCCI OH BROS VIZ APRRBRECT COREE RE CHEATS CBR WBE AROTCEMHOVOES TOBA ASAMBICHRE RT SBEIBRENSTCEMHVET Taiwan requirements Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection BSMI Statement Sa RAS ie PMR AG ESE E A Fhe Bie mst ATE SHAT HAES TRAN PE
73. specified in the Traffic Type field used by the port in the last 30 minutes This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every 15 seconds Last Hour The percentage of packets of the type specified in the Traffic Type field used by the port in the last 60 minutes This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every 15 seconds 2 Inthe MultiLink Trunk Utilization Selection section type the Trunk number and traffic type to be monitored 3 Click Submit The results of your request are displayed in the MultiLink Trunk Utilization Table Figure 92 209570 C 207 Chapter 8 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config You can configure Quality of Service QoS features in your network by using the Web based QoS Wizard using the QoS Quick Config pages or using the Advanced QoS configuration pages available in the Web based management user interface This chapter shows how to use the QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config pages to configure QoS parameters for the BPS 2000 Refer to Chapter 9 for information on configuring QoS using the Advanced QoS Web pages This chapter covers the following topics e Using QoS Wizard next e Using QoS Quick Config on page 236 Note To configure the features introduced with software version 1 2 and higher in a mixed stack you must access a BPS 2000 unit Using Web based
74. the first time you access the Web based management user interface As the system administrator you must create access parameters and passwords to protect the integrity of your network configuration s For more information on setting access parameters and system passwords refer to Chapter 4 Web page layout The home Web page Figure 2 and all successive Web pages have a common layout Each is divided into two sections the menu and the management page All Web pages are optimized for a 800 x 600 pixel screen size Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 36 Using the Web based management interface Figure 2 Web page layout Web browser toolbar NORTEL NETWORKS gt Summary gt Configuration gt Fault gt Statistics gt Application V Administration Menu 4 System Info option e Security Logout Reset Administration gt System Information Business Policy Switch 2000 sysDescription BayStack 460 HW AB3 FW V0 2E SW v1 0 0 33 sysUpTime 35 Minutes 29 Seconds sysName sysLocation sysContact gt Support by Menu fl Help button Content area 9794EA The menu as shown in Figure 2 contains a list of seven main titles and their corresponding options To navigate the Web based management interface menu click a menu title and then click one of its options When yo
75. the following e Click Yes to delete the group membership configuration e Click Cancel to return to the Group Membership page without making changes Note This Group Membership Table section of the Group Membership page contains hyperlinks to the SNMPv3 User Specification and Group Access Rights pages For more information on these pages see Configuring user access to SNMPv3 on page 72 and Configuring SNMPv3 group access rights on page 78 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 78 Configuring the switch Configuring SNMPv3 group access rights You can view a table of existing SNMPv3 group access rights configurations and you can create or delete a group s SNMPv3 system level access rights Creating an SNMPv3 group access rights configuration To create a group s SNMPv3 system level access right configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Group Access Rights The Group Access Rights page opens Figure 24 Figure 24 Group Access Rights page Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Group Access Rights Group Access Table xl nneli NNCLI noAuthNoPriv nncli nneli null Read Only x communitySnmpRead SNMPv1 noAuthNoPriv snmpy1Objs null null Read Only xI communitySnmpRead SNMPy2c noAuthNoPriv snmpv1Objs null null Read Only xI communitySnmpWrite SNMPy1 noAuthNoPriv snmpv1Objs snmpv1 Obj
76. user to a group To map an SNMPV3 system user to a group 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Group Membership The Group Membership page opens Figure 23 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 76 Configuring the switch Figure 23 Group Membership page Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Group Membership x x pas x X x x x xl Xi Xi Xi Group Membership Table Security Model Entry Storage sSAgTrpRevwCommO SNMP v1 communitySnmpNotify Read Only sSAgTrpRewComm1 SNMP v1 communitySnmpNotify Read Only sSAgTrpRewComm2 SNMP v1 communitySnmpNotify Read Only sSAgTrpRewComm3 SNMP v1 communitySnmpNotify Read Only read_only_community SNMP v1 communitySnmpRead Read Only read_write_community SNMPv1 communitySnmpWrite Read Only sSAgTrpRewCommO SNMPv2c communitySnmpNotify Read Only sSAgirpRevrComm1 SNMPv2c communitySnmpNotify Read Only s5AgTrpRevrComm2 SNMPy2c communitySnmpNotify Read Only s5AgTrpRcvrComm3 SNMPy2c communitySnmpNotify Read Only read_only_community SNMPy2c communitySnmpRead Read Only read_write_community SNMPv2c communitySnmpWrite Read Only Group Membership Creation Security Model Group Name Entry Storage Security Name i e User Name SNMP p Volatile x Table 20 describes the items on the Group Me
77. value of 2 and a falling value of 1 to alerta user to whether the card is up or down Delta Most alarm variables related to Ethernet traffic are set to delta value Delta alarms are defined based on the difference in the value of the alarm variable between the start of the polling period and the end of the polling period Delta alarms are sampled twice per polling period For each sample the last two values are added together and compared to the threshold values This process increases precision and allows for the detection of threshold crossings that span the sampling boundary Therefore if you keep track of the current values of a given delta valued alarm and add them together the result is twice the actual value This result is not an error in the software 2 Inthe RMON Threshold Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit The new configuration is displayed in the RMON Threshold Table Figure 50 Note RMON threshold configurations are not modifiable They must be deleted and the information recreated Deleting an RMON threshold configuration To delete an existing RMON threshold configuration 1 From the main menu choose Fault gt RMON Threshold The RMON Threshold page opens Figure 50 2 Inthe RMON Threshold Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 209570 C Configurin
78. x 4 Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore TCP Ignore SMTP True 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 269 Figure 157 IP Classification page 2 of 3 IP Filter Creation Ignore Network Address joooo Joona Destination Address Network Address Subnet Mask C Host Address pooo Host IP Address Ignore C Network Address boso Joooo Source Address Network Address Subnet Mask C Host Address booo Host IP Address DSCP Ignore b IP Protocol Ignore Ignore Destination Layer4 Port C PreconfiguredPort JTFTP x C User Defined Port 0 Ignore Source Layer4 Port PreconfiguredPot JTFTP a laar Nofinad Dow IN Figure 158 IP Classification page 3 of 3 IP Filter Group Table Filter Group Name E X itp eure BX SMTP_FLTR Create Filter Group Note When you choose the Ignore value the filter matches all criteria for that parameter Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 270 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Table 87 describes the items on the IP Filter Table and IP Filter Creation sections of the IP Classification page Table 87 IP Filter Table and Filter Creation sections page items qoslpAceDscp Ignore Integer 0 63 Item and ae Section MIB association Range Description IP Filter Table Action x Deletes the row Note You cannot delet
79. 0 129 Configuring RMON fault threshold parameters 0002 e ene eee 130 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 10 Contents Creating an RMON fault threshold 2 0 00 cece eee 130 Deleting an RMON threshold configuration 00000 0 eee eae 132 Viewing the RMON fault event log 000s 133 Viewing Me sysiem log cae ecc dares cei g ebb dee hee ieks teres Gea REE oe BEAR 134 Viewing RMON Ethernet statistics e crericrresisrrisrecawi rewind tri oit 136 Viewing RMON Ethernet statistics in a bar graph format 138 Viewing RMON Ethernet statistics in a pie chart format 139 Viewing RMON MSO cictcacerecedea ches ete Etan t EARE NEEE E 140 Viewing RMON statistics in a line graph format 2 0000 0 eee eee 142 Chapter 6 Viewing system statistics 15050005r011rrrrasrrsrnsesss 143 Viewing POM SAUS lOS esiri Erri orn EKETE ERDE SEINKA PERENNER 143 ZONO POS srraisrrttetiire reira i dearer danar Ee Ea 146 Viewing port statistics in a pie chart format 0 02 eee eee eee 147 Viewing port statistics in a bar graph format 0 00 e eee eee 147 Views al POLOS s 634425 baa 9 denii ERs eye Hla dee dare oi aeens ee h lt Meas 148 Viewing interface statistics oc eo Coe he LSE cad Wee de He kae se Rie eae 150 Viewing interface statistics in a pie chart format 200 085 152 Viewing interf
80. 0 Description The description of the device or its subcomponent MDA The media dependent adapter MDA connected to the switch 209570 C Viewing summary information 55 Table 9 Stack Information page fields continued Section Fields Description Software Version The current running software version Operational State The current operational state of the stack The operational states are Other Not Available Removed Disabled Normal Reset in Progress Testing Warning Non Fatal Errors Fatal Error and Not Configured 2 Inthe upper left corner of the Stack Information page click the number of the device you want to view The Stack Information page is updated with information about the selected switch Viewing summary switch information You can view summary information about the switch for example the unit number and its corresponding physical description and serial number To view summary switch information 1 From the main menu choose Summary gt Switch Information The Switch Information page opens Figure 13 Figure 13 Switch Information page r Summary gt Switch Information 4 Switch Information Module Description MDA Description Software Version Serial Operational State Mac Address IP Address Power Status Manufacturing Date Code 20000626 Business Policy Switch 24 10 100BaseTX plus 1 MDA slot and 1 Cascade Slot 2 port 10
81. 0 53 60 128 171 Start field 141 Start TFTP Load of New Image field 117 State field 174 198 300 Static Router Ports field 169 Statistics 30 129 138 140 142 143 146 148 153 157 Status field 149 Status page 308 STGs 192 STP Learning field 204 Subnet Mask field 270 summary options changing stack numbering 60 identifying unit numbers 62 viewing stack information 53 switch information 55 switch information in real time 57 Supplicant Timeout field 93 Support menu online help 315 209570 C Index 331 technical publications 316 user interface upgrading 317 support Nortel Networks 28 switch configuration files requirements for retrieving 126 requirements for storing 126 TFIP server 124 switch images downloading 116 switch information viewing 55 viewing in real time 57 Switch Information page 55 Switch View page 57 sysContact field 43 sysDescription field 43 sysLocation field 43 sysName field 43 System Contact field 68 system default settings resetting to 50 System Description field 54 68 System Information page 42 48 70 system information viewing 42 System Location field 68 system location naming 67 System Log page 134 system log viewing 134 System Name field 68 system name configuring 67 System Object ID field 68 system operational modes configuring 128 System page 67 system settings modifying 67 system contact 68 system location 68 system name 68 system statistics options vi
82. 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore TCP Ignore True 20 Ignore 21 Ignore Ignore True 21 Ignore True True Ignore True Ignore Ignore True Ignore Ignore True Ignore Ignore True Ignore Ignore True Ignore Ignore True Ignore Ignore True Ignore Ignore True Ignore Ignore True Table 89 describes the items on the IP Classification Group page Table 89 IP Classification Group page items Item Range Description Filter Group Name 1 16 Enter a character string to create an identity for the filter group configuration Group Select or deselect the filter from membership in the filter group Order Integer Type a number to establish the evaluation order of filters in the group Destination Address The IP address that is matched against the packet s destination IP address Destination Address Mask The mask for the matching of the destination IP address Note A zero bit in the mask means that the corresponding bit in the address always matches Source Address The IP address that is matched against the packet s source IP address Source Address Mask The mask for the matching of the source IP address DSCP The value that the DSCP in the packet must have and match this filter Protocol The IP protocol that is matched agains
83. 0 000 ee eee eee 29 Pew EANES porate nso oe ca en a ee ee eae eee oe ees 29 Stacking COMPAUONINY occeeugeiedees weeds Ade rO aware woh Se wbnen debe es 30 Software version 2 0 compatibility with BayStack 450 switches 32 Soet o AET S S Ea E rem bee TEE TTEN EE 33 Pon numbering Syntax cciaccene sein dees eeen de eee a CEPR Ree Re ee 33 Logging in to the Web based management interface 000000 eee 34 Wied Pag Hsu c6cc sted caste oid ie KNER c tee ees Eee Nee ees 35 M n 6 cat rch need errr ea eaea les a a AR eA 36 Manag memM Pabeiere sisrate ean a a a Beh E EEA 39 Chapter 2 Administering the Switeh cries caseneseseedisenseve ens awe eae we 41 Viewing general information 222 ccccenceee dees eee asa w eee eS eR Ee awe Oe 41 Viewing system information 000 0c cee eee 42 Viewing CPU and memory utilization 0 00000 eee 43 Configuring system SeCUINY cccckc accede idee ea Bhi eh bee RRR DORR EAE eRe EA ES 44 Setting console Telnet and Web passwords 02000 cee eee eee 44 Configuring RADIUS security cccesceeaudessasdeadees buns eeeeeaaeecs 46 Logging on to the management interface 0 c eee eee eee 47 Reselling the BPS 2000 oes iki te hee eee vide a ARE ond ane E die aes 49 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 8 Contents Resetting the BPS 2000 to system defaults 0 0 00 ccc ee eens 50 Logging out of the ma
84. 0 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 2 1 604800 0 65535 1 85535 1 65535 1 65535 0 10 2600 seconds J60 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 20 seconds 2 1 604800 0 65535 1 65535 1 65535 1 65535 1 10 Jasco seconds 60 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 2 209570 C Configuring the switch 93 Table 27 describes the fields on the EAPOL Security Configuration page Table 27 EAPOL Security Configuration page fields Section Item Range Description EAPOL EAPOL Administrative 1 Enabled Enables or disables EAPOL based security Administrative State 2 Disabled State Setting EAPOL Security Unit Displays the unit you are viewing Setting Port 1 to 28 Displays the port number Initialize 1 Yes Activates EAPOL state on this port 2 No Administrative Status 1 Force Allows you to set the EAPOL authorization status unauthorized e Force Unauthorized Always unauthorized 3 aiei e Auto Status depends on EAP authentication Authorized ESUS l e Force Authorized Always authorized Operational Status 1 Authorized Displays the current authorization status 2 Unauthorized Administrative Traffic 1 In amp Out Allows you to set EAPOL authentication either for Control 2 In Only incoming and outgoing traffic or for incoming traffic only Operational Traffic Control Displays the current administrative traffic control setting Re
85. 00 Software Version 2 0 272 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 2 Inthe IP Filter Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit The new IP filter configuration appears in the IP Filter Table Figure 156 This table displays all IP filters you created using QoS wizard Qos Quick Config or QoS Advanced pages Note An IP filter configuration is not modifiable The filter must be deleted and then re created Deleting an IP filter configuration To delete an IP filter configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt IP Classification The IP Classification page opens Figure 164 2 Inthe IP Filter Table in the IP filter configuration row of your choice click the Delete icon A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Do one of the following e Click Yes to delete the IP filter configuration e Click Cancel to return to the IP Classification page without making changes Note You cannot delete a filter if it is referenced in a filter group gt Creating an IP filter group configuration To create an IP filter group configuration 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 273 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt IP Classification The IP Classification page opens Figure 156 Table 88 describes the items on the IP Filter Grou
86. 00 Software Version 2 0 128 Configuring the switch Setting system operational modes You can set the next stack mode operation of either a stack of BPS 2000 only or a mixed stack of BPS 2000 and BayStack 450 and 410 switches To set the next stack mode operation 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Stack Operational Mode The Stack Operational Mode Setting page opens Figure 49 Figure 49 Stack Operational Mode page Configuration gt Stack Operational Mode Stack Operational Mode Setting Current Stack Operational Mode Pure BPS 2000 Stack Next Stack Operational Mode Pure BPS 2000 Stack K submit NOTE Next Stack Operation Mode is not effective until the stack is reset Table 43 describes the items on the Stack Operational Mode Setting page Table 43 Stack Operational Mode page items Item Range Description Current Stack Operational Current stack operational mode The options are Pure Mode BPS 2000 Stack or Hybrid Stack Next Stack operational Mode 1 Pure BPS 2000 Stack Choose whether your stack is BPS 2000 only ora 2 Hybrid Stack mixed stack of BayStack 450 and BPS 2000 Hybrid Stack 2 Select from the list 3 Click Submit 209570 C 129 Chapter 5 Configuring remote network monitoring RMON The RMON management information base MIB is an interface between the RMON agent on a BayStack 450 switch or Business Policy Switch 2000 and RMON m
87. 00Base x SFF GBIC BPS2000 2GE 25 Uns 26 Uns v2 0 0 12 ssgdfl0058 Normal 00 E0 7B CC 6E E0 134 177 212 24 Primary Power RPSU not present Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 56 Viewing summary information Table 10 describes the fields on the Switch Information page Table 10 Switch Information page fields Item Description Unit Select the number of the device on which to view summary information The page is updated with information about the selected switch For more information on stack numbering see page 60 Module Description The factory set description of the policy switch MDA Description The factory set description of the sub component MDA Software Version The version of the running software Manufacturing Date Code The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format Serial Number The serial number of the policy switch Operational State The current operational state of the device The operational states are Other Not Available Removed Disabled Normal Reset in Progress Testing Warning Non Fatal Errors Fatal Error and Not Configured Mac Address The MAC address of the device IP Address The IP address of the device Power Status The current power status of the device e Primary Power RPSU not present e Primary Power RPSU present e Redundant Power Pr
88. 1 Inthe Port Statistics Table click the bar graph icon Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 148 Viewing system statistics The Port Chart page opens in a bar graph format Figure 59 Figure 59 Port Chart page in a bar graph format Statistics gt Port Chart Unit 2 Port 2 Received Unit 2 Port 2 Transmitted 6000 W Packets 1615 5000 WPackets 5062 Multicasts 3 Multicasts 3040 Mibroadcasts 0 W broadcasts 107 Lost Packets 0 4000 Lost Packets 0 MFcs errors 0 t Wcollisions 0 Undersized Packets 0 3000 Single Collisions 0 oversized Packets 0 W Multiple Collisions d GiFiltered Packets 3 20004 Blexcessive Collisions WFlooded Packets 0 Wibeferred Packets 1 Frame Errors 0 Late Collisions 0 1000 ol nit 2 Port 2 Received Unit 2 Port 2 Transmitted 40007 WFackets 64 bytes 1417 W Packets 64 bytes 3605 Packets 65 127 bytes 0 Packets 65 127 bytes 270 MPackets 128 255 bytes 15 W Packets 128 255 bytes 23 Packets 256 511 bytes 180 Packets 256 511 bytes 57 BiPackets 512 1023 bytes 3 BiPackets 512 1023 bytes 54 Table 49 describes the items on the Port Chart page 2 Click Back to return to the Port page Viewing all port errors Beginning with software version 1 1 you can view all ports
89. 2 filters page 1 of 2 QoS Quick Config gt Policy Step 1 Rule Configure IP Filters Configure L2 Filters Using Existing Filter Gror forr fran VLAN Tag EtherType Ignore gnore C Preconfigured a CYLANG Mana ignore fNetmap TCP zl maximum 32 C User Defined e g 08137 Filter Group Name fGrp1 Figure 139 QoS Quick Config page for configuring layer 2 filters page 2 of 2 802 1p Priority DSCP IP Protocol Destination IP Source IP 1p Fror rotoco Layer4 Port Rangel Layer4 Port Rangel E Ignore E Ignore E Ignore O Inspect Destination IP E Inspect Source IP E Priority Layer4 Port Range Layer4 Port Range fi nore lgnore Bion wf pS B e z Min Value o Min Value fo Djs Cis rje C7 Max Value o Max Value 0 0 65535 0 65535 2 Enter the number you want for the order of the layer 2 filter you are configuring 3 Inthe VLAN area choose the VLANs you want from the pull down menu 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 245 Note Beginning with software version 2 0 you can reference up to 32 VLANs with a layer 2 filter 4 Inthe VLAN Tag area choose either Ignore Tagged or Untagged from the pull down menu 5 Complete the EtherType area by either choosing Ignore choosing a preconfigured Ethernet type from the pull down menu entering a hex value for the User Defined Ethernet type 6 Complete the 802 1p Priority area
90. 2000 supports only the MD5 authentication protocol Private Protocols The registration point for standards track privacy protocols used in SNMP Management Supported Frameworks The registration points are None or CBC DES Note The Business Policy Switch 2000 does not support privacy protocols Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 72 Configuring the switch Table 17 describes the fields on the SNMPv3 Counters section of the SNMPv3 System Information page Table 17 SNMPv3 Counters section fields Item Description Unavailable Contexts The total number of packets dropped by the SNMP engine because the context contained in the message was unavailable Unknown Contexts The total number of packets dropped by the SNMP engine because the context contained in the message was unknown Unsupported Security Levels The total number of packets dropped by the SNMP engine because they requested a security level that was unknown to the SNMP engine or otherwise unavailable Not in Time Windows The total number of packets dropped by the SNMP engine because they appeared outside of the authoritative SNMP engine s window Unknown User Names The total number of packets dropped by the SNMP engine because they referenced an unknown user Unknown Engine IDs The total number of packets dropped by the SNMP engine because they referenced an snmpEn
91. 3 157 Ethernet error statistics viewing 153 viewing in a bar graph format 156 viewing in a pie chart format 155 Ethernet Errors Chart page 155 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 322 Index Ethernet Errors page 153 EtherType field 280 285 287 Excessive Collisions field 146 149 155 Extended Discipline field 255 F fault threshold parameters configuring 130 FCS Errors field 145 149 154 features 29 Filter Group field 300 302 Filter Group Name field 274 276 285 287 Filter Group Type 302 Filter Group Type field 300 Filter Tagged Frames field 189 Filter Unregistered Frames 189 Filter Untagged Frames field 189 Filtererd Packets field 145 Find MAC Address page 109 Flooded Packets field 145 Flow Control field 115 Forward Delay field 200 201 Forward Delay Time field 194 Fragments field 137 Frame Errors field 145 149 Frame Too Long field 154 From System Boot Up field 44 G gateway addresses configuring 64 GBIC 30 General Discipline field 255 Generate SNMP Trap on Intrusion field 99 gigabit Ethernet 30 114 Group Access Rights page 78 Group Creation page 193 Group Membership page 75 Group Name field 76 79 Group page 202 H hardware description 54 56 Hello Interval 194 Hello Time field 194 200 High Speed Flow Control page 114 high speed flow control configuring 114 Host Address field 271 Hybrid Stack 32 128 icons about 39 Identify U
92. 30 94 IP manager based network security 30 IP page 64 IP Protocol field 281 ISVN numbers 119 121 J Jabbers field 137 K Keep Alive Time field 309 L Last 1 Minute field 44 Last 10 Minutes field 44 Last 10 Seconds field 44 Last 24 Hours field 44 Last 60 Minutes field 44 Last BootP field 66 Last Conn Attempt field 309 Last Error field 309 Late Collisions field 146 149 155 Layer2 Classification page 278 Layer2 Filter Creation 278 Layer2 Filter Group Table 278 Layer2 Group modification page 286 Layer2 Group page 284 Layer2Filter Table 278 Learn by Ports page 101 Learning Constraint field 174 175 177 179 183 184 186 LEDs 49 50 57 62 118 Length Mismatch field 310 Limit field 166 Link field 113 149 Link Trap field 113 Local Store Version field 117 logging on 47 logging out 51 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 324 Index Lost Packets field 145 LowMark field 44 M MAC address 56 MAC Address field 54 61 103 107 109 Mac Address field 56 MAC Address page 186 MAC address security 97 allowed source 102 clearing 104 deleting ports 105 learn by ports 101 learning 99 MAC DA_ 30 97 106 ports 104 security list 99 security table 102 MAC Address Security field 98 MAC Address Security SNMP Locked field 98 MAC Address Table page 108 MAC address based port mirroring 162 164 MAC addresses locating a specific address 109 viewing learned
93. 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Ports Liste page loms lt nais kage indie oes eas PRS See RE CH RHE 100 Security Table page items 2 002 103 Port Configuration page items 0 00 eee 105 DA MAC Filtering page items 0 000 ee 106 MAC Address Table page items 00 00 c eee eee 109 Port Management page items 0 0 ee 113 High Speed Flow Control page items 0 0000 0 eae 115 Software Download page items 20 0c cee ee 117 LED Indications during the software download process 118 Configuration File page items 0 0000 e eee ee 125 Requirements for storing or retrieving configuration parameters on a URW Sere cu clwins tut cee eit ek eae eyed ees See 126 Parameters not saved to the configuration file 126 Console Communication Port Setting page items 127 Stack Operational Mode page items 002 cee eee 128 RMON Threshold page items 00 2 eee 131 RMON Event Log page fields 0 0000 cee eee eee ee 134 System Log page fields cos he covedes Ws skeen seheGsbeeeans eae ee 135 RMON Ethernet page items 0 00 eee 136 RMON History page items 0000 cee eee 141 POM page leme sirrrasrirtrr sirni bens end eiakus weeds aeee 144 Port Error Summary Table fields 000000 e ee eaeeaee 149 iterace page lems cinch cagesiue Sea eiedan ceed edie cuse en 151
94. 6 Ifyou are referencing an existing aggregate shaper group with the policy choose the Shaper Group group from the pull down menu In the Track Statistics field choose Yes or No from the pull down menu Click Submit The system returns you to the QoS Advanced Policies page with your newly configured policy displayed in the Policy Table area Figure 146 and Figure 147 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 252 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 146 QoS Advanced Policies page with configured policies 1 of 2 Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Policies Policy Table aid Role Interface Policy In Pro X Enabled H wizardIP 1 IP Filter Group wizardIP_FLTR allBPSlifcs Ingress B Standard_ X Enabled Z izardt2 2 Layer Filter Group wizardL2_FLTR alIBPSifcs Ingress 2 Standard Policy Creation Policy Name Filter Group Type IP Filter Group x Filter Group wizardIP_FLTR z Role Combination allBPSIfcs z Policy Order 2 Meter No Metering H In Profile Action 2 Drop_Trafic H Out of Profile Action C Shaper No Shaping Shaper Group PEKKO Saas P md Figure 147 QoS Advanced Policies page with configured policies 2 of 2 In Profile Out of Profile Shaper Track Action Action 1 Group Statistics Standard Service _ Yes Standard Service _ 0 Yes 209570 C 253 Cha
95. 88 aggregate shaping 301 bandwidth allocation 255 burst size 291 295 capabilities 256 committed rate 291 295 COPS 304 307 308 data specification 291 defined filters installing 291 297 discipline 255 drop precedence 265 DSCP mapping configuring 265 DSCP queue set association creating 264 duration 291 295 entry storage 256 Ethertype 278 filter actions about 288 deleting 290 hardware filters deleting 303 installing 298 209570 C Index 327 viewing statistics 301 ignore vlaue 269 in profile action 298 interface class trusted untrusted unrestricted 256 267 interface groups 254 configuring 254 deleting 260 modifying 257 IP filter groups about 268 configuring 272 deleting 277 modifying 275 IP filters about 268 configuring 268 deleting 272 layer 2 filter groups about 278 configuring 284 deleting 287 modifying 286 layer 2 filters about 278 creating 278 deleting 283 loss sensitivity 267 288 matching 268 278 metered data 298 meters 30 291 298 300 deleting 294 297 multiple VLANs 30 278 no meter data 298 order 273 out of profile action 298 packet reordering 298 304 policies 254 configuring 291 297 disable 300 enable 300 statistics 301 policy server control 304 ports 254 adding or removing 259 type trusted untrusted unrestricted 256 type trusted untrusted untrestricted 267 queue sets 261 264 306 DSCP associations creating 264 rate shaping 295 role c
96. A Based modification page 185 Figure 82 VLAN Configuration MAC Address page 0 e0 000e 186 Figure 83 Port Configuration page 0 202 000 s eee e eve sewee eee eee 189 Figure 84 Port Information Page 266 s e000 eet ee eeeuceeeseeindenentaas 191 Figure 85 Spanning Tree Group Configuration page 20 000 193 Figure 86 Spanning Tree VLAN Membership page 00 0005 195 Figure 87 Spanning Tree Add VLAN page 0 00 eee eee eee eee 196 Figure 88 Spanning Tree Remove VLAN page 0 20 e eee ee eaee 196 Figure 89 Spanning Tree Port Configuration page 2000 eee eee 197 Figure 90 Spanning Tree Bridge Information page 00000 eee 199 Figure 91 Group page scec sees d du ediey Sete sbecker bude be ERE wea Eene Yo 203 Figure 92 Ullization Pages lt xc04 ees dae WS dhs 4 oes eae de EP Oe Ri os B88 205 Figure 93 QoS Wizard opening page 20 e eee eee 209 Figure 94 Packet prioritization selection page cee eee eee 209 Figure 95 Standard prioritization page 0 00 ee 210 Figure 96 Session confirmation page 0 0c eee eee 210 Figure 97 QoS Policies to Configure window 000 cee eee eee 212 Figure 98 Packet prioritization explanation page 002 ee eee 213 Figure 99 VLAN prioritization selection page 0 eee eee 214 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Sof
97. ANs with the QoS Wizard You can specify that different VLANs in your network configuration be marked with different priority levels 1 In the packet prioritization window Figure 98 click VLAN and click Next A VLAN prioritization selection page opens Figure 99 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 214 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 99 VLAN prioritization selection page QoS Wizard Step 1 VLAN Select a VLAN 2 Choose the VLAN and click Next A page opens Figure 100 that asks if you want to set a Meter for the specified VLAN Figure 100 Meter for VLAN page QoS Wizard Step 2 Meter Would you like to meter the traffic for VLAN 17 E No O Yes 3 If you do not want to set a Meter click No The system opens to the Service Class selection page Figure 102 which appears with only one Service Class to set You do not have In Profile and Out of Profile without metering data 4 Ifyou want to set a Meter click Yes A page opens Figure 101 that allows you to set a Meter for the specified VLAN 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 215 Figure 101 Meter setting for VLAN page QoS Wizard Step 2 Meter Enter the metering parameters for VLAN 1 Committed Rate kbps 1000 bits per second Expected Burst Rate kbps 1000 bits per second Duration XOOOKK x Enter the c
98. CP value is associated 2 Inthe DSCP Assignment View By section choose the queue set to display in the DSCP Assignment Table The table is updated with information for the selected queue In the DSCP Assignment Table section type the information in the text boxes Click Submit Configuring DSCP mapping Note Nortel Networks recommends using the default DSCP mappings to ensure end to end QoS connectivity To configure DSCP to 802 1p user priority drop precedence mapping 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt DSCP Mapping The DSCP Mapping page opens Figure 154 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 266 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Figure 154 DSCP Mapping Table page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt DSCP Mapping DSCP peuh Tabie epia iia i SNES R a 0 RE Loss Sensitive Standard E 0x1 0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard B 0x2 1 Not Loss Sensitive Standard El 0x3 D0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard R Ox oO Not Loss Sensitive Standard B 0x5 0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard B o6 0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard E ow o Not Loss Sensitive Standard B 08 2 Not Loss Sensitive Bronze B ox o0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard EI OxA 2 Loss Sensitive Bronze B 0xB 0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard e oxc 2 Not Loss Sensitive Bronze B oxD 0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard E OxE 2 Not Loss Sensitive Bro
99. Configuring QoS Quick Config shapers on page 248 To use an existing meter for the flow 1 Click Use Existing Meter 2 Goto Configuring QoS Quick Config shapers next Configuring QoS Quick Config shapers Note You must be using either the BPS2000 1GT BPS2000 2GT or BPS2000 2GE MDA with the Business Policy Switch in order to implement the QoS shaping features Using Step 3 Shapers you choose not to shape the data for specified flow to configure a new shaper for the flow or to use an existing shaper for the flow or to reference an aggregate shaping group 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 249 To choose not to shape the data for the flow 1 Click No Shaper 2 Goto Configuring QoS Quick Config policies on page 250 To configure a new shaper 1 Click Configure Shaper under Step 3 Shaper Figure 143 Figure 143 Step 3 Shaper Step 3 Shaper No Shaper Configure Shaper Use Existing Shaper Aggregate Shaping The Shaper box opens Figure 144 Figure 144 Shaper box Step 3 Shaper EQNo Shaper Configure Shaper Use Existing Shaper Shaper Name shapert Rate Kbps Multiple of 64 Kbps 1 Kbps 1000 bits per second Maximum Burst Rate Kbps Burst Size k 7 Maximum Burst Duration PERONEO z Queue Size fi Packet z Enter the name for the shaper you are configuring in the Shaper Name field In the Rate field enter the committ
100. D you can change the PVID number on this screen You can configure specified switch ports to filter discard all received tagged frames untagged frames or unregistered frames You can also prioritize the order in which the switch forwards untagged packets on a per port basis To configure broadcast domains 1 From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt Port Configuration The Port Configuration page opens Figure 83 209570 C Configuring application settings 189 Figure 83 Port Configuration page Application gt VLAN gt Port Configuration CG CON EAS OT ETN ey MCN Resa VLAN Port Setting Unit 4 2 Filter Port Port Name Tagged U uniti Poti 1 Port aee a oe Intagged Wav gisiered PVID Tagging Frames Frames No F fo J Untagged Access Untagged Access AR n No I fo z Untagged Access z No EI No No fr fo Z Untagged Access No No No fr fo untagged Access No EI No No fr fo untagged Access I No EI No No fr fo E Untagged Access No EI No No fr fo Untagged Access No No No fr 0 untagged Access No No No fr fo untagged Access Table 70 describes the items on the Port Configuration page Table 70 Port Configuration page items Item Range Description Port 1 28 The port number Port Name 1 16 Type character string to create a unique port name for example
101. DSCP in the packet must have and match this filter 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 283 Table 91 Layer2 Filter Table and Layer2 Filter Creation section items continued Section Item Range Description IP Protocol Ignore Select the IP protocol to match against the packet s IP TCP protocol field UDP ICMP IGMP RSVP Destination IP L4 Port Ignore Min Max Choose Ignore or type the minimum value and the Range maximum value that the packet s layer 4 destination port number can have and match this filter Source IP L4 Port Ignore Min Max Choose Ignore or type the minimum value and the Range maximum value that the packet s layer 4 source port number can have and match this filter 2 Type the information in the text boxes or select from a list Click Submit The new Layer filter configuration appears in the Layer2 Filter Table Figure 160 Note You cannot delete a filter if it is referenced in a filter group gt Deleting a layer 2 filter configuration To delete a layer 2 filter configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt Layer2 Classification The Layer2 Classification page opens Figure 160 This table displays all layer 2 filters you created using QoS wizard Qos Quick Config or QoS Advanced pages Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 284 Imple
102. Ds may turn on or blink on all BPS 2000 units as if the stack has failed However the stack is operational and the upgrade should complete without problems Upgrading software You follow a different procedure depending if you are using a Pure BPS 2000 stack or a Hybrid stack The stacking software compatibility requirements are as follows e Pure BPS 2000 stack All units must be running the same software version e Pure BayStack 450 stack All units must be running the same software version e Hybrid stack All BPS 2000 units must be running the same software version All BayStack 410 units must be running the same software version All BayStack 450 units must be running the same software version All software versions must have the identical ISVN This section discusses the following topics Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 120 Configuring the switch Upgrading software in a Pure BPS 2000 stack or a standalone BPS 2000 next Upgrading software in a Hybrid stack on page 121 Upgrading software in a Pure BPS 2000 stack or a standalone BPS 2000 To download or upgrade software in a Pure BPS 2000 stack or a standalone BPS 2000 unit 1 a A WOW N From the main menu choose Configuration gt Software Download The Software Download page opens Figure 45 In the BPS 2000 Image Filename field enter the image file
103. For more information see Configuring an SNMPv3 management information view on page 80 Configuring an SNMPv3 management information view You can view a table of existing SNMPv3 management information view configurations and you can create or delete SNMPv3 management information view configurations Note A view may consist of multiple entries in the table each with the same view name but a different view subtree Creating an SNMPv3 management information view configuration To create an SNMPv3 management information view configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Management Info View The Management Information page opens Figure 25 209570 C Configuring the switch 81 Figure 25 Management Information View page Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Management Information View Management Information Table Action View Name View Subtree View Mask View TypejEntry Storage snmpviObjs 1 3 all ones Included Read Only webSnmpObjs 1 3 Read Only all ones Included Management Information Creation View Name View Subtree e g 1 9 6 1 View Type View Mask o O e g FF CO null zero length Include Entry Storage Volatile hi Table 22 describes the items on the Management Information View page Table 22 Management Information View page items Item and MIB association Range Description x Deletes the row View Name 1 32
104. For more information on selecting one of the six port based modes that activates the port X and port Y screen fields where you can choose up to two ports to monitor see Table 55 on page 164 For more information on selecting one of the five address based modes that activates the Address A and Address B screen fields where you can specify MAC addresses to monitor see Table 56 on page 164 The default setting is Disabled Port based monitoring Monitor Port Port X Port Y Choose the switch port to designate as the monitor port Choose the first switch port to be monitored by the designated monitor port This port is monitored according to the value X in the Monitoring Mode field Choose the second switch port to be monitored by the designated monitor port This port is monitored according to the value Y in the Monitoring Mode field Address based monitoring Address A Address B XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Type the MAC address to monitor by the designated monitor port This address is monitored according to the value Address A in the Monitoring Mode field Type the MAC address to monitor by the designated monitor port This address is monitored according to the value Address B in the Monitoring Mode field Type information in the text boxes or select from a list Click Submit Selecting one of the port based monitoring modes activates the port X and or the
105. Ifcs 1 17 allBPSlics 1 18 allBPSlics 1 19 allBPSlfcs 1 20 allBPSlfcs 1 21 allBPSlfcs 1 22 allBPSlics 1 23 allBPSIfcs 1 24 allBPSIfcs 1 Table 81 describes the items on the Interface ID page Table 80 Interface ID page items Item Description Interface Displays the unit and port number Role Combination Displays the role combination associated with the interface Queue Sets Displays the queue set associated with this interface Adding or removing interface group members To select or deselect ports as members of an existing interface group 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Interface Configuration The QoS Advanced Interface Configuration page opens Figure 148 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 259 2 Inthe Interface Group Table section in the row of your choice click the Modify icon The Interface Group Assignment page opens Figure 150 Figure 150 Interface Group Assignment page m Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Interface Group Assignment QoS Interface Group Port Assignment Role Combination Y2o gt rowsing aena Input 802 Classification Capabilities Input IP Classification povier tac Untrusted Class Port Membership Port Al Cs Ds Si ss Sis a E Ws a A AG o O ies 1B AE E 225 238 245 2s a Unit 1 ol ip submit MSS Table 81 describes the it
106. L Security Configuration page 1 of 2 Application gt EAPOL Security Configuration EAPOL Administrative State Setting EAPOL Administrative State Disabled gt EAPOL Security Setting unit J 2 Administrative erational Administrative Paty Re authenticate Re authenti Status Status Traffic Control Now Control 1 No z No F Force Authorized z Authorized in amp Out 7 In Only Disabled No 2 No Force Authorized Authorized fin amp Out In Ony No Disabled gt No Force Authorized Authorized fin amp Out In Ony No gt Disabled No I No Thin owl 3 4 No F Force Authorized z Authorized In amp Out In Only Disabled F 5 No F Force Authorized z Authorized In amp Out In Only Disabled F R Na v Farra Authorizad Authorizad In 2 Quit w In Anlw Nicahlod amp Figure 31 EAPOL Security Configuration page 2 of 2 authentication Re authenticate Quiet promn t Supplicant Server um Period Period Peri Timeout Timeout paa Jasco seconds 60 seconds seconds ko seconds fo seconds 1 604800 65535 1 65535 1 65535 1 65535 0 10 Jasco seconds 60 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 2 1 604800 0 65535 1 65535 1 65635 1 65535 1 10 soo seconds 60 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 20 seconds 1 604800 0 65535 1 65535 1 65535 1 65535 a 10 3600 seconds 60 seconds 3
107. Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 330 Index Hybrid Stack 119 mixed stack 119 upgrading 116 121 software download LED indication descriptions 118 process 116 Software Download page 116 120 122 123 software upgrade 29 317 Software Version field 54 56 software version requirements Microsoft Internet Explorer 33 Netscape Navigator 33 software versions 29 30 32 43 53 116 120 121 122 123 Source Address field 270 274 276 Source Address Mask field 270 274 276 Source field 109 Source IP L4 Port Max field 281 Source IP L4 Port Min field 281 Source IP L4 Port Range field 283 Source L4 Port field 270 275 276 Source L4 Port Max field 286 287 Source L4 Port Min field 285 287 spanning tree 192 bridge information 199 learning mode 204 learning modes 198 port path cost 198 port priority 198 Spanning Tree Add VLAN page 195 spanning tree configuration 197 spanning tree groups 30 192 adding VLANs 195 bridge information 199 configuring 193 default 192 number of 30 32 ports 197 removing VLANs 195 tagged BPDU 192 tagging 192 194 201 VLANs 195 spanning tree ports configuring 29 197 enabling 197 FastLearning 197 Speed Duplex field 114 149 SQE Test Errors field 155 Stack Information page 53 stack information viewing 53 Stack Numbering page 60 stack numbering configuring 60 stack operational mode 50 Stack Operational Mode page 128 stack operational modes 128 stacking 30 32 5
108. Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 208 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Using QoS Wizard The QoS Wizard provides a set of Web pages that allows you to specify common QoS settings for the BPS 2000 Warning Nortel Networks recommends that you use the QoS Wizard A for your initial configuration only Each time the QoS Wizard is initiated all existing configurations are reset to the default values After you complete the initial QoS Wizard configuration method you can then customize traffic treatment using the QoS Advanced configuration process This section discusses the following topics e Configuring Standard traffic with the QoS Wizard on page 208 e Prioritizing traffic with the QoS Wizard on page 210 e Prioritizing VLANs with the QoS Wizard on page 213 e Prioritizing IP applications with the QoS Wizard on page 220 e Prioritizing user defined flows with the QoS Wizard on page 226 Note All the settings you configure with QoS Wizard are actually set when you click the final Finish and see the Session Confirmation page Configuring Standard traffic with the QoS Wizard To use the QoS Wizard to configure Standard traffic 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Wizard The QoS Wizard opens Figure 93 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 209 Figure 93 QoS Wizard openi
109. NMPV3 notification configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Notification The Notification page opens Figure 26 2 Inthe Notification Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Do one of the following e Click Yes to delete the notification configuration e Click Cancel to return to the table without making changes 209570 C Configuring the switch 85 Configuring an SNMPv3 management target address You can view a table of existing SNMPv3 management target configurations create SNMPv3 management target address configurations that associate notifications with particular recipients and delete SNMPv3 target address configurations Creating an SNMPv3 target address configuration To create an SNMPv3 target address configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Target Address The Target Address page opens Figure 27 Figure 27 Target Address page Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Target Address Target Address Table 5 Target Target Target 7 Retry Tag Target Entry Action ee gaaet aet frimeout Count List Parameters Storage Target Address Creation Target Name Target Address e g 1 2 3 4 160 Target Timeout jso seconds 0 2147483847 Target Retry Count Bo 0 255 Target Tag List Target Param Entry OOOO Entry Storage Volatile 7
110. Numbers ISVN are identical That is the ISVN number for the BayStack 450 switch and BayStack 410 switch must have the same ISVN as the BPS 2000 If the ISVNs are not the same the stack does not operate In sum the stacking software compatibility requirements are as follows e Pure BPS 2000 stack All units must be running the same software version e Pure BayStack 450 stack All units must be running the same software version e Hybrid stack All BPS 2000 units must be running the same software version All BayStack 410 units must be running the same software version All BayStack 450 units must be running the same software version All software versions must have the identical ISVN Refer to Appendix B of Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 for complete information on interoperability and compatibility between the BPS 2000 and BayStack switches Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 32 Using the Web based management interface Software version 2 0 compatibility with BayStack 450 switches The BPS 2000 software version 2 0 is compatible with BayStack 450 software version 4 1 When you are using a local console to access the BPS 2000 software version 2 0 features with a Hybrid or mixed stack BPS 2000 and BayStack 450 and 410 switches in the same stack you must plug your local console into a BPS 2000 unit To find out which ver
111. Part No 209570 C November 2001 4401 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 NORTEL NETWORKS Copyright 2001 Nortel Networks All rights reserved November 2001 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that license The software license agreement is included in this document Trademarks Autotopology BaySecure BayStack Business Policy Switch Nortel Networks the Nortel Networks logo Optivity and Optivity Policy Services are trademarks of Nortel Networks Internet Explorer Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Acrobat and Adobe are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Restricted rights legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government
112. Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 204 Configuring application settings Table 75 describes the items on the Group page Table 75 Group page items Section Item Range Description MultiLink Trunk Group Setting Trunk 1 6 This column contains fields in each row that can be configured to create the corresponding trunk The Unit value in the Unit Port field is configurable only when the switch unit is part of a stack configuration It indicates that the trunk members in this row are associated with the specified unit number configured in the Unit field Each switch port can only be a member of a single trunk The appropriate trunk number for each trunk member configured within this field is shown adjacent to the corresponding switch port on the following management pages Port Configuration see Figure 43 on page 112 and Spanning Tree Configuration see Figure 83 on page 189 There are no default settings Trunk Port Members Unit 1 8 Port 1 28 Type the switch and port numbers to associate with the corresponding trunk Note You can configure two to four switch ports together as members of a trunk to a maximum of six trunks Switch ports can only be assigned a member of a single trunk There are no default settings STP Learning 1 Normal 2 Fast 3 Disabled Choose the parameter that allows the specified trunk to participate in the spanning tree This setting overrides t
113. R BMA Canada requirements only Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus Business Policy Switch 2000 does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique du minist re des Communications Cet appareil num rique Business Policy Switch 2000 respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques visant les appareils num riques de classe A prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique du minist re des Communications du Canada Nortel Networks Inc software license agreement This Software License Agreement License Agreement is between you the end user Customer and Nortel Networks Corporation and its subsidiaries and affiliates Nortel Networks PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND OR USE THE SOFTWARE USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the Software unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price Software is owned or licensed by Nortel Networks its parent or one of its subsidiaries or affiliates and is copyrighted and licensed not sold Software consis
114. S Wizard and QoS Quick Config 237 The QoS Quick Config option provides a set of Web pages for configuring QoS parameters Using the QoS Quick Config does not reset the QoS parameters to default values as the QoS Wizard does The QoS Quick Config condenses the QoS Advanced pages to just two pages and uses only default actions and mappings Using QoS Quick Config to configure interface groups Note If you do not need to define a new interface group role combination you can go directly to Using QoS Quick Config to configure policies on page 239 To use the QoS Quick Config option 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Quick Config gt Interface Group The QoS Quick Config Interface Group page opens Figure 130 with the View Interface Groups option displaying Figure 130 QoS Quick Config Interface Group page View Interface Group QoS Quick Config gt Interface Group Interface Group E View Interface Groups Create Interface Group aar eis H Input 802 Classification Capabilities Input IP Classification PEGE Untrusted Class Port Membership Cascade Pi Port All1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2728U1U2U3U4U5L Unit 1 O M M CA CA A AACA CA CA CA CA A A AI ACA CA A A AACA E Submit d 2 To view the parameters of a specified Interface group choose the Role Combination Interface Group you want to view and use the QoS Quick Config Interface Group
115. Source L4 Port Min The least value that the packet s layer 4 source port number can have and match this filter Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 286 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Table 93 Layer2 Group page items Item Range Description Source L4 Port Max The maximum value that the packet s layer 4 source port number can have and match this filter Note To group multiple filters in a single group assign Filter Index and Filter Order the same filter group name 3 Type information in the text boxes or click the check box 4 Click Submit The new layer 2 filter group configuration appears in the Layer 2 Filter Group Table Figure 160 This table displays all Layer 2 filters you created with QoS Wizard QoS Quick Config and QoS Advanced Modifying a layer 2 filter group configuration To modify a layer 2 filter group configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt Layer2 Classification The Layer2 Classification page opens Figure 160 In the Layer2 Filter Group Table section in the layer 2 filter group configuration of your choice click the Modify icon The Layer2 Group modification page opens Figure 163 This table displays all Layer 2 Filter Groups you created with QoS Wizard QoS Quick Config and QoS Advanced Figure 163 Layer2 Group modification page
116. System status Green On Self test passed successfully and switch is operational Blinking A nonfatal error occurred during the self test Off The switch failed the self test RPSU RPSU status Green On The switch is connected to the RPSU and can receive power if needed Off The switch is not connected to the RPSU or RPSU is not supplying power CAS Up Off The switch is in standalone mode Slack mode Green On The switch is connected to the upstream unit s Cascade A In connector Amber On The Cascade A Out connector CAS Up for this switch is looped internally wrapped to the secondary ring CAS Dwn Off The switch is in standalone mode Stack mode Green On The switch is connected to the downstream units Cascade A Out connector Amber On The Cascade A In connector CAS Dwn for this switch is looped internally wrapped to the secondary ring 209570 C Viewing summary information 59 Table 11 BPS 2000 switch LED descriptions continued Label Type Color State Meaning Base Base mode Green On The switch is configured as the stack base unit Off The switch is not configured as the stack base unit or is in standalone mode Amber On This unit is operating as the stack configuration s temporary base unit This condition occurs automatically if the base unit directly downstream from this unit fails If this happens the following events take place The two units di
117. The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors In Unknown The number of packets received through the interface that were discarded because of an unknown or Protos unsupported protocol 2 Inthe upper left hand corner click on the unit number of the device to monitor The page is updated with the information for the selected device Figure 61 3 To update the statistical information click Update Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 152 Viewing system statistics Viewing interface statistics in a pie chart format You can view interface statistics in a pie chart format To view interface statistics in a pie chart format 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Interface The Interface page opens Figure 61 2 Inthe port row of your choice click the pie chart icon The Interface Chart page opens in a pie chart format Figure 62 Figure 62 Interface Chart in a pie chart format Statistics gt Interface Chart Unit 1 Port1 Win octets 34158479 Out Octets 1556273 Win Unicast 74846 Out Unicast 621 Win Non Unicast 176957 Out Non Unicast 19290 in Discards 0 Hout Discards 0 Win Errors 0 Out Errors 0 Hin Unknown Protos 0 cs ax Table 51 describes the items on the Interface Chart page 3 To update the statistical information click Update or cli
118. Time 1 512 Type the query time in seconds in the appropriate format This feature allows you to control the number of IGMP messages allowed on the subnet by varying the Query Interval the interval between general queries sent by the multicast router Note This field affects only the VLAN specified in the page s VLAN field The default settings is 125 seconds Static Router Ports Version 1 and Version 2 Click the check boxes of the router ports to associate with the VLAN alternatively click the check box to deselect a selected router port Note This field affects a VLANs Type information in the text boxes or select from a list In the Static Router Ports section s click the check boxes of the router ports to associate with the VLAN 5 Do one of the following e Click Submit e Click Back to return to the IGMP page without making changes The new configuration is displayed in the IGMP Table Figure 72 Viewing Multicast group membership configurations You can view a table configured IP multicast group addresses for a selected VLAN Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 170 Configuring application settings To view multicast group membership configurations for a selected VLAN 1 From the main menu choose Application gt IGMP gt IGMP Multicast Group The IGMP Multicast Group Membership page opens Figure 74 Figure 74 IGMP
119. Type IP Filter Group zf Filter Group fwizardIP_FLTR Role Combination fallBPSics Policy Order 2 Meter No Metering In Profile Action Drop_Trafic f Out of Profile Action 2 0000000000000 Shaper No Shaping Shaper Group EEE FF 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 299 Figure 168 QoS Advanced Policies page 2 of 3 In Profile Out of Profile Shaper Shaper Track Action Action P Group Statistics k 0 Standard_Serice _ Yes Standard_Service _ y 0 Yes Figure 169 QoS Advanced Policies page 3 of 3 Shaper Group Recommend x Track Statistics ves z Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 300 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Table 100 describes the items on the QoS Advanced Policy page Table 100 Policy page items Section kem and MIB Range Description association Policy Table Action Opens a view only statistics table The table P displays current filter statistics in bytes and packets x Deletes the row State 1 Enabled Enables or disables the policy 2 Disabled Policy Name 1 16 A list of the names of existing target configurations Instance Displays the unique identifier Filter Group Type The type of filter group that is referenced by this instance of the Target class The options are IP Filter Group or Layer2 Filter Group Filter Group The
120. Type a character string to create a name for a family of view vacmViewTreeFamilyViewName subtrees View Subtree X X X X X Type an object identifier OID to specify the MIB subtree vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree which when combined with the corresponding instance of vacmViewTreeFamilyMask defines a family of view subtrees Note If no OID is entered and the field is blank a default mask value consisting of 1s is recognized View Mask vacmViewTreeFamilyMask Octet String 0 16 Type the bit mask which in combination with the corresponding instance of vacmViewFamilySubtree defines a family of view subtrees View Type 1 Included Choose to include or exclude a family of view subtrees vacmViewTreeFamilyType 2 Excluded Entry Storage 1 Volatile Choose your storage preference Selecting Volatile requests vacmSecurityToGroupStorage Type 2 Non Volatile information to be dropped lost when you turn the power off Selecting Non Volatile requests information to be saved in NVRAM when you turn the power off Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 82 Configuring the switch 2 Inthe Management Information Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit The new entry appears in the Management Information Table Figure 25 Deleting an SNMPv3 management information view configuration
121. Type the event entry to be used when a rising threshold is crossed Note When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold a single event will be generated After a rising event is generated another such event is not generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches the Falling Threshold Rising Action 1 None Choose the type of notification for the event Selecting Log generates an entry in 2 Log the RMON Event Log table for each event Selecting SNMP Trap sends an SNMP 3 SNMP Trap trap to one or more management stations 4 Log and Trap Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 132 Configuring remote network monitoring RMON Table 44 RMON Threshold page items continued Item Range Description Interval Type the time period in seconds to sample data and compare the data to the rising and falling thresholds Sample Alarm 1 Absolute Sample 2 Delta Choose the sampling method Absolute Absolute alarms are defined on the current value of the alarm variable An example of an alarm defined with absolute value is card operating status Because this value is not cumulative but instead represents states such as card up value 1 and card down value 2 you set it for absolute value Therefore an alarm could be created with a rising
122. VNs are not the same the stack does not operate The ISVNs and the accompanying software release are e ISVN 1 BayStack 410 or Bay Stack 450 version 3 1 BPS 2000 versions 1 0 and 1 0 1 e ISVN 2 BayStack 410 or BayStack 450 versions 4 0 and 4 1 BPS 2000 versions 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 and 2 0 This section describe the steps for the following software upgrades e Upgrading software when ISVN is 2 next e Upgrading software when ISVN is 1 on page 122 Upgrading software when ISVN is 2 If you are currently using BPS 2000 software version 1 0 1 0 1 or 1 1 you must upgrade to software version 1 1 1 before upgrading to BPS 2000 version 2 0 To upgrade a Hybrid stack to BPS 2000 software version 2 0 when the ISVN numbers of the units are 2 1 Choose Configuration gt Software Download from the main menu The Software Download screen appears Figure 46 2 Inthe BPS 2000 Image Filename field enter the name of the BPS 2000 image file Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 122 Configuring the switch 11 In the TFTP Server IP Address enter the IP address of your TFIP load host In the Start TFTP Load of New Image field choose BPS 2000 Image in the Start TFIP Load of New Image field Click Submit The system resets which may take a few minutes The system opens to the System Information page Figure 4 From the main menu choose Configurati
123. Wizard and QoS Quick Config 231 Figure 122 Meter for user defined flow page QoS Wizard Step 3 Meter Would you like to meter the flow for test O No oies arD ax 3 Ifyou do not want to set a Meter click No The system opens to the Service Class selection page Figure 124 which appears with only one Service Class to set You do not have In Profile and Out of Profile without metering data 4 Ifyou want to set a Meter click Yes A page opens Figure 123 that allows you to set a Meter for the specified flow Figure 123 Meter setting for user defined flow page QoS Wizard Step 3 Meter Enter the metering parameters for test Committed Rate l kbps 1000 bits per second Expected Burst Rate l kbps 1000 bits per second Duration XOOOKKK x lt ax 5 Enter the committed rate you want for this Meter Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 232 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 6 Enter the expected burst rate you want for this Meter The system calculates a series of 7 or fewer possible durations for the committed and expected burst rates you set Choose the Duration you want Click Next A page opens Figure 124 that allows you to select a Service Class separately for both the In Profile and Out of Profile Action for the specified flow Figure 124 Service Class selection for user defined flow page QoS Wizard S
124. XX Type a new subnet mask in the appropriate format In Use The column header for the read only fields in this screen The data displayed in this column represents data that is currently in use Last BootP The column header for the read only fields in this screen The read only data displayed in this column represents data obtained from the last BootP reply received Gateway Setting Default Gateway XXX XXX XXX XXX Type an IP address for the default gateway in the appropriate format 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit 209570 C Configuring the switch 67 Modifying system settings You can create or modify the system name system location and network manager contact information Note The configurable parameters on the System page are displayed in a read only format on the Web based management user interface System Information home page see Figure 1 on page 35 To configure system settings 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt System The System page opens Figure 19 Figure 19 System page Configuration gt System System Characteristics Setting System Description Business Policy Switch 2000 HVWV PILOT FW V0 24 SW v1 0 0 70 System ObjectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 45 3 40 1 System Up Time 0 16 7 19 System Name System Location System Contact Using Web based Management for the Business Policy S
125. able in a mixed stack Viewing general information You can view an image of the BPS 2000 switch or an image of your entire stack configuration as information on use of the BPS 2000 CPU and memory capacity Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 42 Administering the switch Viewing system information You can view an image of the BPS 2000 switch or an image of your entire stack configuration information about the host device or stack and if provided the contact person or manager for the switch The System Information page is also the Web based management interface home page To view system information From the main menu choose Administration gt System Information The System Information page opens Figure 4 Note You create or modify existing system information parameters on the System page For more information on configuring system information refer to Chapter 2 Figure 4 System Information home page Administration gt System Information Business Policy Switch 2000 sysDescription Business Policy Switch 2000 HW PILOT FW V0 24 SW v1 0 0 70 sysUpTime 15 Hours 55 Minutes 14 Seconds sysName sysLocation sysContact Copyright 2000 Nortel Networks Inc Allzights reserved 209570 C Administering the switch 43 Table 4 describes the items on the System Information page Table 4 System Information page items
126. able section items 0 000 c cece eee eee 284 Table 93 Layer2 Group page items 0 285 Table 94 Layer2 Group modification page items 0 00 0005 287 Table ss PON PAUGIIEING lt ccevoudd oud genperedawesed Hebes eet ba be0 289 Table 96 Meter Creation fields 00 0 c cee ee 292 Table 97 Meter Table fields 2 200 ccccee eek thee ewe bebe ee ded rintra 293 Table 98 Shaper Creation fields 3 c0csccansteesdcaveeewsiicaxseedss 295 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 24 Tables Table 99 Table 100 Table 101 Table 102 Table 103 Table 104 Shaper Table fields 4 lt nes0 foes YS ad SS Oa R ENS RE ERY eSa RES 296 Policy page WANS cst Gad he hea ae aN hake ke aa ee ees 300 Policy Statistics page items 0 0 eee 302 AQSM PAGE WENGE decasieetey cas See DRS HES PENSE EERE E RES 305 Sine page IEMS cutces Phezchreahsneeingderd a a ER DEES 308 COPS Configuration Table section items 0000 cee 312 209570 C 25 Preface Welcome to Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 This document provides instructions on configuring and managing the Business Policy Switch 2000 through the World Wide Web The Web based management interface is one of many tools specifically designed to assist the network manager in creating complex standalone or network configurations In addition
127. ace statistics ina bar graph format 200 eee 152 Viewing Ethernet error SIAUSICe ica enn dh eee iakeaboneew sue ke wenn eNeais 153 Viewing Ethernet error statistics in a pie chart format 155 Viewing Ethernet error statistics in a bar graph format 156 Viewing transparent bridging statistics 0 0 suana annaa ee 157 Viewing transparent bridging statistics in a pie chart format 159 Viewing transparent bridging statistics in a bar graph format 160 Chapter 7 Configuring application settings nassnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 161 CONGUE POR MINONO 26245442 20e o eretanee sues eti kream came cages 162 Configuring rate INU sso Boh Se oe el RE a Oe ae ene oboe 165 CORIO MGhIPs cx lt c amen aed eo oreokense deena eee ba ean mace a ease 167 Viewing Multicast group membership configurations 00 eee 169 Creating and managing virtual LANs VLANs 00000 eee ee eee 171 Pot based VLAN 2 02226420 c200e09ede nreti beent ceed bade ad deleaeanss 172 209570 C Contents 11 Protocol based VLANS lt c2head eek debi ew bho a Ror SO ES RHR Rie RAE 172 MAC SA based VLANS lt cei meee dee dd be bebe Sew kha eee eae ee 172 Coniguring VLANS 6 occ cant beet chen heeeee Seema eee e Soe eee eam Soe Ree 173 Creating a port based VLAN 00 0 tees 175 Modifying a portbased VLAN scccpineeeieekeleeenwhe ba Re eatk eames 176 Creating a pro
128. addresses 108 MAC DA filtering 96 106 main menu headings and options 37 icons 38 40 Maintain Policing Statistics field 306 Management Information View page 80 Management VLAN field 174 Manufacturing Date Code field 54 56 Max Age Time field 194 Maximum Age Time field 200 Maximum Installed Instances filed 306 Maximum Message Size field 306 Maximum Requests field 93 MDA Description field 56 MDA field 54 MDAs 29 30 114 memory utilization 29 43 Message field 135 Message Type field 135 Meter Creation 291 Meter field 300 Meter page 291 Meter Table 291 Meters page 293 296 Microsoft Internet Explorer software version requirements 33 mixed stack 30 32 Module Description field 56 Monitor Port field 163 Monitoring 163 Monitoring Mode field 163 monitoring modes 164 Msg Processing Model field 88 multicast 167 Multicast field 137 141 145 Multicast Group Address field 170 multicast traffic 165 MultiLink Trunking 198 about 202 configuring 202 monitoring traffic 205 Multiple Collision Frames field 155 Multiple Collisions field 146 149 multiple spanning tree groups 30 192 N naming ports 113 Netscape Navigator software version requirements 33 209570 C Index 325 network access configuring IP filters 268 Network Address field 270 network administrator contact information 67 68 network monitoring 129 network security protecting system integrity 35 new features 29 New Un
129. ain menu choose Configuration gt Software Download 8 Inthe 450 Image Filename field enter the name of the other 450 image file 9 Inthe TFIP Server IP Address enter the IP address of your TFTP load host 10 In the Start TFTP Load of New Image field choose 450 Image 11 Click Submit The system resets which may take a few minutes The system opens to the System Information page Figure 4 12 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Software Download 13 In the BPS 2000 Diagnostics Filename field enter the name of the BPS 2000 diags file 14 In the TFIP Server IP Address enter the IP address of your TFTP load host 15 In the Start TFIP Load of New Image field choose BPS 2000 Diagnostics 16 Click Submit The system resets which may take a few minutes The system opens to the System Information page Figure 4 17 From the main menu choose Configuration gt System The System page opens Figure 19 18 Validate that the ISVN on both the BPS 2000 and the BayStack are 2 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 124 Configuring the switch Refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 for further information on downloading software and upgrading software in standalone BPS 2000 units in pure BPS 2000 stacks and in mixed Hybrid stacks Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server You can store switch and stack configuration
130. anagement applications such as the Web based management user interface It defines objects that are suitable for the management of any type of network Some groups are specifically targeted for Ethernet networks The RMON agent continuously collects statistics and proactively monitors the switch This RMON options available to you are e Configuring RMON fault threshold parameters next e Viewing the RMON fault event log on page 133 e Viewing the system log on page 134 e Viewing RMON Ethernet statistics on page 136 e Viewing RMON history on page 140 Note To access the software version 2 0 features in a mixed stack you must access a BPS 2000 unit Additionally only 64 VLANS are available in a mixed stack multiple STG support is not available in a mixed stack Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 130 Configuring remote network monitoring RMON Configuring RMON fault threshold parameters Alarms are useful when you need to know when the value of some variable goes out of range RMON alarms can be defined on any MIB variable that resolves to an integer value String variables such as system description cannot be used as alarm variables Creating an RMON fault threshold You can create the RMON threshold parameters for fault notification alarms To create an RMON threshold 1 From the main menu choose Fault gt RMON Threshold
131. assword types Note The default is None Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 46 Administering the switch Table 6 Console page items Section Item Setting Description Read Only Stack Password Read Write Stack Password 1 15 alphanumeric string 1 15 alphanumeric string Type the read only password setting for the read only access user Type the read write password setting for the read write access user 2 Type the information or make a selection from the list 3 Click Submit Configuring RADIUS security To configure RADIUS security parameters 1 From the main menu choose Administration gt Security gt RADIUS The RADIUS page opens Figure 7 RADIUS page Administration gt Security gt RADIUS RADIUS Authentication Setting Primary RADIUS Server 0000 Secondary RADIUS Server D 0 0 0 UDP RADIUS Port 1645 RADIUS Shared Secret Table 7 describes the items on the RADIUS page Table 7 RADIUS page items Item Setting Description Primary RADIUS Server XXX XXX XXX XXX Type a Primary RADIUS server IP address in the appropriate format Secondary RADIUS Server XXX XXX XXX XXX Type a Secondary RADIUS server IP address in the appropriate format 209570 C Administering the switch 47 Table 7 RADIUS page items Item Setting Description UDP RADIUS Port In
132. ault value is public Read Write 1 32 Type a character string to identify the community string for the Community SNMPv1 read write community for example public or private String The default value is private Trap Mode Setting Authentication 1 Enable Choose to enable or disable the authentication trap Trap 2 Disable AutoTopology Auto Topology 1 Enable Choose to enable or disable the autotopology feature Setting 2 Disable 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit in any section to save your changes Configuring SNMPv3 This section describes the steps to build and manage SNMPv3 in the Web based management user interface Viewing SNMPv3 system information You can view information about the SNMPv3 engine that exists and the private protocols that are supported in your network configuration You can also view information about packets received by the system having particular errors such as unavailable contexts unknown contexts decrypting errors or unknown user names To view SNMPv3 system information 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt System Information The System Information page opens Figure 21 209570 C Configuring the switch 71 Figure 21 System Information page Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt System Information System Information SNMP Engine ID 00 00 02 32 01 43 50 45 44 30 30 32 33 30 37 33 SNMP Engine Boots 21 SNMP
133. autonegotiation and speed duplex 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Port Management The Port Management page opens Figure 43 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 112 Configuring the switch Figure 43 Port Management page Configuration gt Port Management Port Management Setting Port Alias Trunk Status Link Link Trap Speed Duplex 1 J Enabled Down On z Enabled z ooo Enab Down Jon Enabled lS H Enab Up jOn Enabled 100Mbs Full PF Enab Down On Enabled A H Enabled Down Jon z Enabled y r Enabled Down Jon Enabled 4 Es Enabled Down On Enabled A Do Enab DownfOn m Enabled f Enab Down Jon Enabled H 10 a Enab Down Jon z Enabled i H D Enabled DownfOn Enabled f 12 PO Enabled Down Jon Enabled 13 ys Enabled m Down fon z Enabled i y Enab Down On Enabled A H 15 EN Enab Down Jon Enabled l H i o co D nn gt w N af af a D a 4 209570 C Configuring the switch 113 Table 35 Port Management page items Table 35 describes the items on the Port Management page Item Range Description Port The switch port number of the corresponding row To select the switch row click the check box to the right The values that you set in each switch row affect all switch ports a
134. based VLAN 1 From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 75 In the VLAN Creation section choose Port Click Create VLAN The VLAN Configuration Port Based setting page opens Figure 76 Figure 76 VLAN Configuration Port Based setting page Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration Port Based VLAN Port Based Setting VLAN Learning Constraint IVL VLAN Name fe Table 62 describes the items on the VLAN Configuration Port Based setting page Table 62 VLAN Configuration Port Based setting page items Item Range Description VLAN 1 4094 The number assigned to the VLAN when the VLAN was created VLAN Name 1 16 Type a character string to create a unique name to identify the VLAN for example VLAN1 Learning Constraint 1 IVL Choose your learning constraint type 2 SVL Note If IVL is selected the VLAN uses an independent filtering database from all other VLANs If SVL is selected the VLAN shares the same filtering database as all other VLANs with SVL Note If the stack is set to a pure operational mode the default setting is IVL IVL is available only with Pure BPS 2000 stack operational mode If the stack is set to a hybrid operational mode the default setting is SVL For more information on setting your stack operational mode see Setting system operational modes on page 128
135. by either choosing Ignore clicking Priority and choosing one of the 0 7 boxes for the priority value In the DSCP field choose either Ignore or a value from the pull down menu In the IP Protocol field choose either Ignore or a protocol from the pull down menu 9 Complete the Destination IP Layer4 Port Range area by either choosing Ignore clicking Inspect Destination Layer4 Range and entering a value for both the maximum value and the minimum value 10 Complete the Source IP Layer4 Port Range area by either choosing Ignore clicking Inspect Source Layer4 Range and entering a value for both the maximum value and the minimum value 11 Enter the name you want to assign to the newly created layer 2 filter group 12 Click the arrow on the far left to add the newly created filter into the filter group 13 Repeat steps 2 to 10 to add additional filters into the filter group 14 Go to Configuring QoS Quick Config meters on page 247 To use an existing filter group Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 246 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 1 Click Using Existing Filter Group A page opens that displays the Using Existing Filter Group option checked Figure 140 Figure 140 QoS Quick Config page with existing filter group choice QoS Quick Config gt Policy Step 1 Rule Configure IP Filters Configure L2 Filte
136. cabling Note For guidelines on configuring VLANs refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 You can configure three types of VLAN in the Web based management interface e Port based e Protocol based e MAC SA based Beginning with software version 1 2 you can use 256 port protocol and MAC SA based VLANs for the stack with a Pure BPS 2000 Stack The maximum number of MAC SA based VLANs available is 48 If you are working with a mixed or Hybrid stack you can use 64 VLANs for the entire stack When you change from a Pure BPS 2000 Stack mode to a Hybrid Stack mode e If you have up to 64 VLANs on the Pure BPS 2000 Stack they will be retained when you change to a Hybrid Stack e If you have more than 64 VLANs on the Pure BPS 2000 Stack you will lose them all The Hybrid Stack will return to the default VLAN configuration Note To access 256 VLANs you must be working in Pure BPS 2000 Stack mode To view and change the stack operational mode refer to Chapter 3 Setting system operational modes Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 172 Configuring application settings Port based VLANs A port based VLAN is a VLAN in which the ports are explicitly configured to be in the VLAN When you create a port based VLAN on a switch you assign a VLAN identification number VLAN ID and specify which ports belong to the VLAN The VLAN ID
137. capabilities and statistics 1 From the main menu choose Application gt COPS gt Status The Status page opens Figure 173 Figure 173 Status page Application gt COPS gt Status COPS Capabilities Table COPS Capabilities COPS Current Table Address Type Client Type TCP Port Type Auth TypejLast Conn Attempt Keep Alive Time COPS Statistics Table Address Client Out Last Ue hea 7 Open Open Unsupported Unsupported Address Connection Connection t i A Type Type Packets Error F Attempts Failures Client Type Version Attempts Failures Table 103 describes the items on the Status page Table 103 Status page items Section COPS Capabilities Table COPS Current Table Item Descriptions COPS Capabilities A list of COPS protocols supported by the Business Policy Switch 2000 The current supported version is COPSv1 protocol Address Type The type of address in copsClientServerAddress Address The IPv4 IPv6 or DNS address of a COPS server Client Type The protocol client type for this entry Note Multiple client types can be served by a single COPS server Note The value 0 zero indicates that this entry contains information about the underlying connection TCP Port The TCP port number on the COPS server to which the client is connected 209570 C Implementing Common Open Policy Services COPS 309 Table 103 Status page items
138. cession beginning with port 24 which indicates the progress of the download process When LEDs 18 to 24 are all on the switch has received the new software image successfully The switch erases the flash memory 100 Mb s port status LEDs ports 1 to 12 only The LEDs begin to turn on in succession beginning with port 1 which indicates that various sectors of the switch s flash memory are being erased When LEDs 1 to 12 are all on the switch s flash memory has been erased 209570 C Configuring the switch 119 Table 38 LED Indications during the software download process continued Phase Description LED Indications 3 The switch programs the new 100 Mb s port status LEDs ports 1 to 8 only The LEDs begin to software image into the flash turn on in succession beginning with port 1 which indicates that the memory new software image is being programmed into the switch s flash memory When LEDs 1 to 8 are all on the new software image has been programmed successfully into the switch s flash memory 4 The switch resets automatically After the reset completes the new software image initiates the switch self test which comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress Note You may see an incorrect LED display when downloading the image on a mixed or Hybrid stack All the BU Base Unit LE
139. cified IP Application click Yes A page opens Figure 113 that allows you to set shaping parameters for the specified IP Application 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 225 Figure 113 Setting shaping parameters for IP Application page QoS Wizard Step 4 Shape Enter the shaping parameters for HTTP Shaping Rate Kbps Multiple of 64 Kbps 1 Kbps 1000 bits per second Maximum Burst Rate Kbps 1 Kbps 1000 bits per second Maximum Burst Duration 0000000000000000 gt Queue Size fi Packet x ax 13 Enter the shaping rate you want for this Shaper The system rounds up shaping rates you enter including 0 to multiples of 64 Kbps 14 Enter the maximum burst rate you want for this Shaper The system calculates a series of 6 or fewer possible durations for the shaping and maximum burst rates you set 15 Choose the Maximum Burst Duration from the pull down menu 16 Choose the queue size you want for this Shaper 17 Click Next a Ifyou chose more than one IP Application to prioritize a page opens that asks if you want to set a Meter for the next specified IP Application Figure 109 Repeat steps 3 through 17 for each IP Application you chose b Ifyou chose just one IP Application you have completed the QoS Wizard prioritization process for that flow The system returns you to the packet prioritization page Figure 114 with a check mark next to IP Application Press the Stat
140. ck Back to return to the Interface page Viewing interface statistics in a bar graph format You can view interface statistics in a bar graph format To view interface statistics in a bar graph format 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Interface 209570 C Viewing system statistics 153 The Interface page opens Figure 61 2 Inthe port row of your choice click the bar graph icon The Interface Chart page opens in a bar graph format Figure 62 Figure 63 Interface Chart in a bar graph format Statistics gt Interface Chart Unit 1 Port1 40000000 Win octets 34158479 Out Octets 1553146 30000000 Win Unicast 74846 Out Unicast 521 Win Non Unicast 176957 20000000 Out Non Unicast 19244 in Discards 0 lout Discards 0 Win Errors 0 10000000 Bout Errors 0 Hin Unknown Protos 0 gt ax Table 51 describes the items on the Interface Chart page 3 To update the statistical information click Update or click Back to return to the Interface page Viewing Ethernet error statistics You can view Ethernet error statistics for each monitored interface linked to the Business Policy Switch 2000 To view Ethernet error statistics 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Ethernet Errors The Ethernet Errors page opens Figure 64 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 154 Viewing sys
141. ck Update or click Back to return to the Transparent Bridging page Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 160 Viewing system statistics Viewing transparent bridging statistics in a bar graph format You can view measured transparent bridging statistics in a bar graph format To view transparent bridging statistics in a bar graph format 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Transparent Bridging The Transparent Bridging page opens Figure 61 2 Inthe port row of your choice click the bar graph icon The Transparent Bridging Chart page opens in a bar graph format Figure 69 Figure 69 Transparent Bridging Chart in a bar graph format Statistics gt Transparent Bridging Chart Unit 1 Port16 Win Frames 1754 Gout Frames 5146 Hin Discards 1654 0 gt ara Table 53 describes the items on the Transparent Bridging Chart page 3 To update the statistical information click Update or click Back to return to the Transparent Bridging page 209570 C 161 Chapter 7 Configuring application settings The options available to configure application settings are Configuring port mirroring next Configuring rate limiting on page 165 Configuring IGMP on page 167 Viewing Multicast group membership configurations on page 169 Creating and managing virtual LANs VLANs on page 171 Config
142. configured including those with QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Table 99 describes the fields in the Shaper Table area Table 99 Shaper Table fields Item Range Description Action x Deletes the shaper Name Displays the name of the shaper Instance Displays the unique identifier Rate 1 4294967296 Displays the maximum rate at which traffic shaped using this shaper will be transmitted over a given duration Displays the rate rounded up to multiples of 64 Kbps 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 297 Table 99 Shaper Table fields continued Item Range Description Burst Size Displays the maximum traffic burst size that can be transmitted without a shaping delay Calculated internally using the configured Maximum Burst Rate and Maximum Burst Duration Queue Size 1 2 4 8 or 16 packets Displays the number of packets that can exceed the traffic burst size and still be queued for transmission Deleting a shaper To delete a shaper 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Shapers The Qos Advanced Shaper page opens Figure 166 2 Inthe Shaper Table section click the Delete icon to delete the shaper A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the shaper configuration e Click Cancel to return to the Shaper page without making changes Note Yo
143. curity at the start of a connection to a COPS server TCP Port The TCP port number on the COPS server Priority The level of priority assigned to the client Note When a COPS client attempts to contact COPS servers for the appropriate client type it contacts higher numbers priority first The order used for server entries with the same priority is undefined COPS servers notified to the client using the COPS protocol PDP Redirect mechanism are always processed with higher priority than any entries in this table COPS Client Creation IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX The IP address of the COPS client TCP Port Integer Type the TCP port number on the COPS server Priority Type a number that represents the level of priority Note When a COPS client attempts to contact COPS servers for the appropriate client type it contacts higher numbers priority first The order used for server entries with the same priority is undefined COPS servers notified to the client using the COPS protocol PDP Redirect mechanism are always processed with higher priority than any entries in this table COPS Retry Setting Retry Algorithm 1 Sequential 2 Round Robin Choose the type of algorithm to use Retry Count Integer Type the number of retry attempts Retry Interval Integer Type in seconds the retry interval 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a l
144. d Console Stack Password Setting Console Stack Password Type None Read Only Stack Password ere Read Write Stack Password A page is composed of one or more of the following elements e Tables and input forms The gray cells in a page are display only and white cells are input fields e Check boxes You enable or disable a selection by clicking a check box When a check mark is displayed in the box that selection is enabled You disable a selection by clicking the checked box e Icons and buttons Icons and buttons perform an action concerning the displayed page or the switch Some pages include a button that opens another page or updates the values shown on the current page Other pages include icons that initiate an action such as reformatting the current displayed data as a bar or pie chart Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 40 Using the Web based management interface Table 3 describes the icons that may appear on a pages to assist you in navigation Table 3 Page buttons and icons Icon Name Description Modify Accesses a modification page for the selected row View Accesses a view only statistics page for the selected row Delete Deletes a row Pie Chart Displays statistics information in a pie chart format Bar Graph Displays statistics information in a bar graph format lt Line Graph Displays statistics informatio
145. d 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 239 Figure 132 QoS Quick Config Interface Group page View Interface Group QoS Quick Config gt Interface Group Interface Group E View Interface Groups Create Interface Group Role test1 z Combination Input 802 Classification Capabilities out IP Classification Interface P Class Unrestricted Port Membership Cascade Pc Port All1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2728U1U2U3U4U5U Unit 1 MMOOOMOOOOOOMyM OOO OOOO Oooo oT EID 8 Goto Using QoS Quick Config to configure policies next Using QoS Quick Config to configure policies You use QoS Quick Config Web pages to configure the policies To configure QoS policies using QoS Quick Config From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Quick Config gt Policy The QoS Quick Config Policy page opens Figure 133 Figure 134 and Figure 135 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 240 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 133 QoS Quick Config Policy page 1 of 3 QoS Quick Config gt Policy Step 1 Rule Configure IP Filters Configure L2 Filters C Using Existing Filter Group foraer VLAN VLAN Tag Etherlype 802 1p Pri Ignore Ignore Ignore C Preconfigured C Priorit a yin VANA ignore Netmap TCP H Ki maximum 32 C User Def
146. discarded Note The root bridge s Maximum Age Time parameter value becomes the actual Maximum Age Time parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network See also Bridge Maximum Age Time Forward 4 30 The Forward Delay parameter value that the root bridge is currently using Delay seconds This value specifies the amount of time that the bridge ports remain in the Listening and Learning states before entering the Forwarding state Note The root bridge s Forward Delay parameter value becomes the actual Forward Delay parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network See also Bridge Forward Delay 209570 C Configuring application settings 201 Table 74 Spanning Tree Bridge Information page items Section Item Range Description Bridge Hello 1 10 The Hello Interval the amount of time between transmissions of BPDUs Time seconds specified by management for this bridge This parameter takes effect only when this bridge becomes the root bridge Note Although you can set the Hello Interval for a bridge using bridge management software once the spanning tree computation process is complete all bridges participating in the spanning tree network use the root bridge s Hello Interval parameter value If any bridge becomes the root bridge its Hello Interval parameter value becomes the Actual Hello Interval parameter value for all bridges participating
147. e Collisions The number of packets that were transmitted successfully on this port after a single collision Multiple Collisions The number of packets that were transmitted successfully on this port after more than one collision Excessive Collisions The number of packets lost on this port due to excessive collisions Deferred Packets The number of frames that were delayed on the first transmission attempt but never incurred a collision Late Collisions The number of packets collisions that occurred after a total length of time that exceeded 512 bit times of packet transmission In the Port Statistics section choose the unit number and its port number Click Submit The Port Statistics Table is updated with information about the selected device and port Figure 57 4 To update the statistical information click Update Zeroing ports To clear the statistical information for the currently displayed port Click Zero Port To clear the statistical information for all ports in a switch or stack configuration Click Zero All Ports 209570 C Viewing system statistics 147 Viewing port statistics in a pie chart format You can view port statistics in a pie chart format To view the displayed statistical information in a pie chart format 1 Inthe Port Statistics Table click the pie chart icon The Port Chart page opens in a pie chart format Figure 58 Figure 58 Port Chart page in a pie chart f
148. e Enabled in the Current Learning Mode column of the Learn By Ports row 6 Click Submit Note You cannot include any of the port values you have chosen for the secure ports field Adding MAC addresses To add MAC address to the MAC address based security system 1 Inthe main menu choose Applications gt MAC Address Security gt Security Table It may take awhile for the required addresses to be learned Then the Security Table page opens Figure 37 Figure 37 Security Table page Application gt MAC Address Security gt Security Table MAC Address Security Table IMAC Address Allowed Source MAC Address Security Table Entry Creation MAC Address Allowed Source Unit Pot Entry ed Submit Note Using this page you instruct the switch to allow the specified MAC address access only through the specified port or port list 209570 C Configuring the switch 103 Table 31 describes the items on the Security Table page Table 31 Security Table page items Security Table Entry Section Item Range Description MAC Address Action Allows you to delete a MAC address Security Table x Address Displays the MAC address Allowed Source 1 Unit Port Displays the entry through which the MAC address is 2 Entry allowed MAC Address MAC Address Enter the MAC address you want to allow to access the switch Creation Allowed Source Select the unit and
149. e VLAN was created The protocol types are IP IPX 802 2 1PX 802 3 IPX Snap IPX Ethernet II Apple Talk DEC Lat SNA 802 2 SNA Ethernet II Net Bios XNS Vines Ipv6 User Defined and RARP For more information see Table 65 on page 180 User Defined Protocol The user defined protocol assigned when the VLAN was created Learning Constraint The type of learning constraint selected when the VLAN was created The choices are IVL and SVL Note If you select IVL the VLAN uses an independent filtering database from all other VLANs If you select SVL the VLAN shares the same filtering database as all other VLANs with SVL Note When the stack mode is set to Pure BPS 2000 the default setting is IVL IVL is available only with a Pure BPS 2000 stack mode When the stack mode is set to Hybrid the default setting is SVL State The current operational state of the VLAN VLAN Creation VLAN Type Choose the type of VLAN to create and click Create VLAN Your options are port based page 175 protocol based page 178 and MAC SA based page 183 VLAN Setting Management VLAN Choose the VLAN to designate as the management VLAN AutoPVID AutoPVID Setting Choose Enabled to activate the Automatic PVID feature and click Submit Note Use this only with port based VLANs 209570 C Configuring application settings 175 Creating a port based VLAN To create a port
150. e a filter if it is referenced in a filter group Instance Displays unique identifier Destination Address XXX XXX XXX Displays the IP address to match against the qoslpAceDstAddr XXX packet s destination IP address Destination Address Mask XXX XXX XXX Displays the mask for the matching of the qoslpAceDstAddrMask XXX destination IP address A zero bit in the mask means that the corresponding bit in the address always matches One 1 bits must be left justified Source Address XXX XXX XXX Displays the IP address to match against the qoslpAceSrcAddr XXX packet s source IP address Source Address Mask XXX XXX XXX Displays the mask for the matching of the source IP qoslpAceSrcAddrMask XXX address One 1 bits must be left justified DSCP Displays the value that the DSCP in the packet must have and match this filter This displays the DSCP value that this filter attempts to match Protocol TCP 6 Displays the IP protocol to match against the qoslpAceProtocol UDP 17 packet s IP protocol field ICMP 1 IGMP 2 RSVP 46 Ignore 0 Destination L4 Port Integer Displays the value that the packet s layer 4 qoslpAceDstL4PortMin 0 65535 destination port number must have and match this qoslpAceDstL4PortMax filter Source L4 Port Integer Displays the value that the packet s layer 4 source qoslpAceSrcL4PortMin 0 65535 port number must have and match this filter qoslpAceSrcL4P
151. e eee eens 97 CIMOUNNE PONG lees xe wheseeen casGe Ree Ren ENERE ERRE akee aoe eee 99 Adding MAG GOCresses inn cs ciigededands bees St dmietew dein auewads 102 CERNI PONG ace tik ou cui a E ae ede nee eee elke 103 Enabling SeCUny Oil DONE i554 curs Gee beeen itirir e ae eee sewed 104 DEEN DONE ons Teirra eEOA Ke ORs ohn ny SOR Code ORK HIRES s 105 Filtering MAC destination addresses 0000 c cece ee eee 106 Deleting MAC DAS ccccc ance cto e doe eS coed ei meta Tanri RERA REE EE 107 Viewing learned MAC addresses by VLAN 0 00 e eee eee eee eee 108 Locating specific MAC address sos ccc cheese ane ho eenaeaedaanpGaawd RARAN 109 Configuring port s autonegotiation speed duplex status and alias 111 Configuring high speed flow control 0 0000 eee eee 114 Downloading switch IMAQSS acieses ee bac ee eee eeedor eee wee eer ENEEIER 116 Observing LED indicatioNS ccocccsseedvs Sate veeecasiadabarennes 118 Upgrading B76 10 7 1 Seen ane eae a rene iE Raen rere Cee eee ge ee 119 Upgrading software in a Pure BPS 2000 stack or a standalone BPS 2000 120 Upgrading software in a Hybrid stack 00000 cece eee 121 Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server 124 Configuring port communication speed 00 eee eens 127 Setting system operational modes 0 ee eee ees 128 Chapter 5 Configuring remote network monitoring RMON 0
152. ed Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 64 Configuring the switch Configuring BootP IP and gateway settings You can configure your BootP mode settings create and modify your in band stack and in band switch IP addresses and in band subnet mask parameters and configure the IP address of your default gateway Beginning with software version 2 0 you can configure IP addresses for individual units in a stack Note Settings take effect immediately when you click Submit gt To configure BootP IP and gateway settings 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt IP The IP page opens Figure 17 Figure 17 IP page for a standalone BPS 2000 Configuration gt IP IP Setting o _ Configurable In Use Last BootP BootP Request Mode BootP Disabled z In Band Stack IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Band Switch IP Address 10 125 200 40 10 125 200 40 0 0 0 0 In Band Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 10 125 200 33 10 125 200 33 0 0 0 0 ED 209570 C Configuring the switch 65 Figure 18 IP page for a stack Configuration gt IP IP Setting unit FJ 2 3 a _Configurable In Use Last BootP BootP Request Mode BootP Disabled z In Band Stack IP Address 134 177 212 25 134 177 212 25 0 0 0 0 In Band Switch IP Address f0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Band Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Defau
153. ed in the menu to assist you in navigating the Web based management interface and page forward and page back function as they would in any other Web site However these capabilities do not enhance the functionality of the Web based management interface Nortel Networks recommends that you use only the navigation tools provided in the management interface Caution Web browser capabilities such as page bookmarking refresh Table 2 describes the icons that appear on the menu cons Button or icon Description This icon identifies a menu title Click this icon to display its options This icon identifies a menu title option Click this icon to display the corresponding page This icon identifies a menu title option with a hyperlink to related pages This icon is linked an action for example logout reset or reset to system defaults N RTEL E NETWORKS Clicking on the Nortel Networks logo opens the corporate home page in a new Web browser 209570 C Using the Web based management interface 39 Management page When you click a menu option the corresponding management page opens Figure 3 shows the page displayed for the Administration gt Security gt Console option Figure 3 Console page Administration gt Security gt Console Console Switch Password Setting Console Switch Password Type None hd Read Only Switch Password inad Read Write Switch Passwor
154. ed rate you want in Kbps The system rounds up the shaping rate you enter including 0 to a multiple of 64 Kbps Enter the maximum rate in Kbps in the Maximum Burst Rate field Choose the duration from the pull down menu in the Maximum Burst Duration field The system calculates the durations and presents you with 1 to 6 duration choices Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 250 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 6 Choose the queue size from the pull down menu in the Queue Size field The queue size is the amount to traffic that can exceed the maximum burst size and still be queued for transmission This traffic is delayed for shaping purposes 7 Goto Configuring QoS Quick Config policies on page 250 To use an existing shaper for the flow 1 Click Use Existing Shaper under Step 3 Shaper Figure 143 2 Goto Configuring QoS Quick Config policies on page 250 To use aggregate shaping for the flow 1 Click Aggregate Shaping under Step 3 Shaper Figure 143 2 Goto Configuring QoS Quick Config policies next Configuring QoS Quick Config policies Using the Step 4 Policy area you apply a policy to the specified flow Figure 145 Note The Step 4 Policy area displays differently depending on whether you are referencing meters and or shapers e If you are not metering data only an Action field appears e If you are meterin
155. ee 78 Figure 25 Management Information View page 0 eee eee eee 81 Figure 26 WNotihication page 2 2s40 dss 6 hoes eben deh Be beds dee Eee ewe 83 Figure 27 Target Address page wc cee awk bce ke be ee ee na nnna 85 Figure 28 Target Parameter page 2 000 88 Figure 29 SNMP Trap Receiver page 0 0c eee eee eee 90 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 16 Figures Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 EAPOL Security Configuration page 1 of 2 0005 92 EAPOL Security Configuration page 2 of 2 00000 eee 92 Remote ACCESS PAGE ccc cre eed cave cree bede ed otari sik t ewes 95 Security Configuration page 0 0c eee 98 FOU UGS ROMS s cckesdadasgre ster eeeodsatalseehadens aaa 100 Port List View Port List page 22 2ce icceccesdoerebeadeve ceeds 101 Port List View Learn by Ports page 20 2002 scea nian ee cud teens 101 Secu nty Table page u cccdhcadccecedae eu gedeseneabadeutneexdanes 102 Port List View Clear by Ports page 0 20 cece eee eaee 104 Pott Configuration
156. el Networks may terminate the license if Customer fails to comply with the terms and conditions of this license In either event upon termination Customer must either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction c Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from Customer s use of the Software Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all applicable export and import laws and regulations d Neither party may bring an action regardless of form more than two years after the cause of the action arose Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 6 e The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between Customer and Nortel Networks f This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software If the Software is acquired in the United States then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of the state of New York 209570 C Contents ot ee eee 25 Beira YOU PEGG anki eden eRRieeesa ot dene DO ree ee E E T ET 25 TORECONVEMIONE jae dcaelu edad Ke ah ci behdg ae ed Rae oied ek Lead we ies oa 26 Rotea MEA EN ed ak ri be bh ccd Ries Saath ent a hase aay baci nese 26 How toget hel ccc cc kwe esate dete ee eee E SMe REECE ORO REE ERE EEE EER ae 28 Chapter 1 Using the Web based management interface
157. elp Support Hide ews What s New to the Customer Support Site Products Hide Hide View by a Product Toolset Service Requests Clarify Service Requests SWEB Service Requests File Exchange ITAS File Exchange My NortelNetworks com ServiceWeb DropBox Hide Newsgroups Enterprise Solutions UseNet Group Refer to Chapter 4 for complete instructions on downloading software to a standalone BPS 2000 to a stack of pure BPS 2000 and to a mixed Hybrid stack 209570 C 319 Index Numbers 450 Image Filename field 117 802 1p Assignment Table 262 802 1p Priority field 262 264 266 267 280 285 287 802 1p Priority Mapping page 263 802 1p Priority Queue Assignment page 261 A Absolute Bandwidth field 255 access 94 console 127 number 48 RADIUS security 47 SNMP 94 97 Telnet 94 TELNET WEB SNMP 30 user levels 48 Web 34 Accounting Time field 309 Action Creation 288 Action Name field 289 Action Table 288 Actions page 288 Active Phy field 115 Address Type field 312 administrative options 41 CPU memory utilization viewing 43 logging on 47 logging out 51 resetting the switch stack 49 resetting to system defaults 50 security configuring passwords 44 remote dial in access 46 system information viewing 42 Administrative Status field 93 Administrative Traffic Control field 93 Agent page 304 Aging Time field 109 alarms 130 133 Alias field 113 Ali
158. ems on the Interface Group Assignment page Table 81 Interface Group Assignment page items Item Description Role Combination The tag used to identify interfaces with the characteristics specified by the attributes of this class instance string 1 64 These identifiers are used within a number of classes to logically identify a physical set of interfaces to which policy rules and actions are applied This is the group of interfaces interface group to which policy rules and actions are applied Capabilities A list of the interface capabilities used by the PDP or network manager to select which policies and configurations may be pushed to the Policy Enforcement Point PEP The options are 0 Other 1 Input Ip Classification 2 output Ip Classification 3 input 802 Classification 4 output 802 Classification 5 single Queuing Discipline and 6 hybrid Queuing Discipline Interface Class The type of traffic received on interfaces associated with the specified role combination The options are Trusted Untrusted and Unrestricted Port Membership Select the external ports to associate with the interface group or select ALL to associate all ports on that unit Cascade Ports The cascade internal ports to associate with the interface group 3 Inthe Port Membership section click the check boxes of the ports or ALL to select all ports on the unit to associate with the interface group Using Web
159. en transmitted by this port from its segment A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is counted only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function including bridge management errors In Discards dot1dTpPortInDiscards The number of valid frames received which were discarded by the forwarding process 209570 C Viewing system statistics 159 2 Inthe upper left hand corner click on the unit number of the device to monitor The page is updated with statistics about the selected device and its corresponding port number 3 To refresh the statistical information click Update Viewing transparent bridging statistics in a pie chart format You can view measured transparent bridging statistics in a pie chart format To view transparent bridging statistics in a pie chart format 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Transparent Bridging The Transparent Bridging page opens Figure 61 2 Inthe port row of your choice click the pie chart icon The Transparent Bridging Chart page opens in a pie chart format Figure 68 Figure 68 Transparent Bridging Chart in a pie chart format Statistics gt Transparent Bridging Chart Unit 1 Port 16 Win Frames 1789 Out Frames 5291 Min Discards 1689 lt gt ax Table 53 describes the items on the Transparent Bridging Chart page 3 To update the statistical information cli
160. enu choose Application gt Port Mirroring The Port Mirroring page opens Figure 70 Figure 70 Port Mirroring page Application gt Port Mirroring Port Mirroring Setting Monitoring Mode ROTES Monitor Unit Port Unit 1 7 Port i 7 Unit Port X Unit zj Port bed Unit Port Y Unit B Pot ba Address A 11 22 33 44 55 66 KKK HK Address B 11 22 33 44 55 77 ORXXXX XX XX XX Port Mirroring Active Monitoring Mode Address A gt Address B Monitor Unit Port Unit 1 Port 1 Address A 11 22 33 44 55 66 Address B 11 22 33 44 55 77 Note The Port Mirroring Active section of this only displays those port mirroring configurations you set If you set no port mirroring configurations the area will not show rows 209570 C Configuring application settings 163 Table 54 describes the items on the Port Mirroring page Table 54 Port Mirroring page items Item Range Description Monitoring Mode 1 Disabled 2 gt Port X 3 Port X gt 4 lt gt Port X 5 gt Port X or Port Y gt 6 gt Port X and Port Y gt 7 lt gt Port X and lt gt Port Y 8 Address A gt any Address 9 any Address gt Address A 10 lt gt Address A 11 Address A gt Address B 12 Address A lt gt Address B Choose any one of the six port based monitoring modes or any one of the five address based monitoring modes
161. er 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Meters The Qos Advanced Meter page opens Figure 165 This table displays all meters you created with QoS Wizard QoS Quick Config and QoS Advanced Note Beginning with software version 2 0 there are default meters for each service class Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 292 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Figure 165 QoS Advanced Meter page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Meter Meter Table Data Committed Committed In Profile Out of Profile Kbps Bytes X practice 1 Committed Data 3000 2047 E E xi Drop_Traffic 65526 No Meter Data 0 0 Drop_Traffic xl Standard_Serice 65527 No Meter Data 0 0 Standard_Serice _ X Bronze_Serice 65526 No Meter Data 0 0 Bronze Senice _ x Silver_Serice 65529 No Meter Data 0 0 Silver Service xl Gold_Service 65530 No Meter Data 0 0 Gold_Service x Platinum_Service 65531 No Meter Data 0 0 Platinum_Serice _ X Premium_Service 65532 No Meter Data 0 0 Premium_Service _ x Network_Service 65533 No Meter Data 0 0 Network Service _ x Trusted_IP 65534 No Meter Data 0 0 Trusted_IP E x Trusted_NonIP 65535 No Meter Data 0 0 Trusted_NonlP Meter Creation Name o Committed Rate i J Kbps 1000 bits per second Maximum Burst Rate o Kbps 1000 bits per second Committed Burst Size B Duration EEKE ja 2 Inthe Meter Creati
162. ering data 4 Ifyou want to set a Meter click Yes Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 222 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config A page opens Figure 110 that allows you to set a Meter for the specified IP Application Figure 110 Meter setting for IP Application page QoS Wizard Step 2 Meter Enter the metering parameters for HTTP Committed Rate l kbps 1000 bits per second Expected Burst Rate l kbps 1000 bits per second Duration VOOK x acm Enter the committed rate you want for this Meter Enter the expected burst rate you want for this Meter The system calculates a series of 7 or fewer possible durations for the committed and expected burst rates you set Choose the Duration you want Click Next A page opens Figure 111 that allows you to select a Service Class separately for both the In Profile and Out of Profile Action for the specified IP Application 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 223 Figure 111 Service Class selection for IP Application page QoS Wizard Step 3 Service Select the service class or action for HTTP In Profile E Service Class Standard x Drop Out of Profile E Service Class Drop ax 9 Click either Service Class or Drop If you click Service Class choose the Service Class you want from the pull down menu If you click Drop
163. ernet type 2 6000 6003 6005 Other DEC protocols 6009 8038 Sna 802 2 Ethernet 802 2 04 04 IBM SNA on IEEE 802 2 frames Sna Ethernet II Ethernet type 2 80D5 IBM SNA on Ethernet Type 2 frames NetBios Ethernet type 2 FO FO NetBIOS protocol XNS Ethernet type 2 0600 0807 Xerox XNS Vines Ethernet type 2 OBAD Banyan VINES IPv6 Ethernet type 2 86DD IP version 6 209570 C Configuring application settings 181 Table 65 Standard protocol based VLANs and PID types continued PID Name Encapsulation PID Value hex VLAN Type RARP Ethernet type 2 8035 Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP RARP is a protocol used by some old diskless devices to obtain IP addresses by providing the MAC layer address When you create a VLAN based on RARP you can limit the RARP broadcasts to the ports that lead to the RARP server User Defined Ethernet type 2 Ethernet 802 2 or Ethernet Snap User defined 16 bit value If you select User Defined from the Protocol pulldown list specify the protocol identifier for the VLAN Note Any frames that match the specified PID in any of the following ways are assigned to that user defined VLAN The ethertype for Ethernet type 2 frames The PID in Ethernet SNAP frames The DSAP or SSAP value in Ethernet 802 2 frames For a list of rereserved PIDs that are unavailable for user defined PIDs see Table 65 on page 180 Table 66
164. errors received on this port Excessive Collisions Displays the number of excessive collisions errors received on this port 2 To view the latest port statistics click the Update button at the bottom of the page Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 150 Viewing system statistics Viewing interface statistics You can view selected switch interface statistics To view an interface s statistical information 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Interface The Interface page opens Figure 61 Figure 61 Interface page Statistics gt Interface Interface Statistics Table unit J 2 EIS en aa rn ne o o0 Q i a Q o o oOo oO A a ff o Q a a Q o oOo oO We 3 o o o oO o o o 0 o a We o o o o o o o 0 o o Wes o o o o o o o cs Wes o o 0o o o o o 0 0 oO We o o o o o a a 0 ao oO We s o o o o o o o o o oO We s o o o o o o o 0 o oO We o o o a a a o o 0 a oO ha 11 o o0 Q o o a o 8G amp We 12 o o o Q o a o 0o o 0 Wes o o a a o a a Do eo 209570 C Viewing system statistics 151 Table 51 Table 51 describes the items on the Interface page Interface page items Item Description Displays statistics in a bar graph format e Displays statistics in a pie chart format Port The port number corresponding to the selected switch In Octets The number of octets received on the interface i
165. escription of the parameters Click Next A page opens Figure 122 that asks if you want to set a Meter for the specified flow b Ifyou want a layer 2 filter click Layer2 Filter and click Next A page opens that requests the customer to choose the layer 2 filter criteria for the specified flow Figure 120 and Figure 121 Figure 120 Layer 2 classification rules page 1 of 2 QoS Wizard Step 2 Policy Definition Select the classification rules for peggy amp Ignore VLAN C VLAN S VLAN 1 maximum 32 VLAN Tag Ignore amp ignore EtherType C Preconfigured Netmap TCP z C User Defined e g 0x8137 ae amp Ignore 8021pPriontly a FOr1r2r3r4rsrerz DSCP Ignore X Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 230 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 121 Layer 2 classification rules page 2 of 2 IP Protocol ignore gt E Ignore Dst L4 Port O User Defined Range min fo max 65535 E Ignore Src L4 Port O User Defined Range min fo max 65535 anD ax Choose the layer 2 filter parameters you want the flow to have Refer to Chapter 9 for a description of the parameters Beginning with software version 2 0 you can reference up to 32 VLANs with a single layer 2 filter Click Next A page opens Figure 122 that asks if you want to set a Meter for the specified flow 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS
166. eshold is exceeded additional packets are discarded Note If a port is configured for rate limiting and it is a MultiLink trunk member all trunk member ports implement rate limiting If the port becomes disabled all trunk members become disabled To configure rate limiting 1 From the main menu choose Application gt Rate Limiting The Rate Limiting page opens Figure 71 Figure 71 Rate Limiting page Application gt Rate Limiting Rate Limiting Table Unit 1 2 Packet Type _Limit__ Last 5 Minutes Last Hour L ast 24 Hours Both z None F oo 00 0 0 Both d None 0 0 0 0 0 0 Botn None z 99 9 58 1 41 0 Both None z 00 200 0 0 0 Both None z 0 0 0 0 0 0 Both None z 00 0 0 0 0 Both None gt 00 00 0 0 Both None gt 00 00 0 0 Boh None z 00 00 0 0 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 166 Configuring application settings Table 57 describes the items on the Rate Limiting page Table 57 Rate Limiting page items Item Range Description Port 1 28 The selected unit s port number The normal port range is 1 to 28 Note A standard unit with MDA has a normal range of 25 26 28 Packet Type 1 Multicast Choose the packet type to view on the table 2 Broadcast 3 Both The default setting is Both Limit None 1 10 Choose the percentage if any of bandwidth allowed fo
167. ess This does not include multicast packets Broadcast The number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address This does not include multicast packets Multicast The number of good packets received that were directed to the multicast address This does not include packets sent to the broadcast address CRC Align Errors The number of packets received that had a length excluding and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame FCS with an integral number of octets FCS errors with a non integral number of octets alignment error 65 127 bytes 128 255 bytes 256 511 bytes 512 1023 bytes 1024 1518 bytes Undersize The number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize The number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Collisions The best estimate number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Jabbers The number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets in length excluding framing bits but includin
168. etStatsPktHits counter overflowed Total Octets ctets ntnQosTargetStats TotalO The total number of octets associated with packet hits for this policy Total Overflow Octets verflowOctets ntnQosTargetStats TotalO The total number of times the associated ntnQosTargetStatsTotalOctets counter overflowed In Profile Octets ProfOctets ntnQosTargetStats Totalln The total number of in profile octets associated with packet hits for this policy 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 303 Table 101 Policy Statistics page items continued Item and MIB association Description Overflow In Profile Octets ntnQosTargetStats Totalln ProfOverflowOctets The number of times the associated ntnQosTargetStats TotallnProfOctets counter overflowed Out Profile Octets ntnQosTargetStats TotalO utProfOctets The total number of out of profile octets associated with packet hits for this policy Overflow Out Profile Octets ntnQosTargetStats TotalO utProfOverflowOctets The number of times the associated ntnQosTargetStats TotalOutProfOctets counter overflowed Shaping Q Drops ntnQosTargetStatsShapin gQDrops The total number of octets dropped from the shaping queues for this policy Overflow Shaping Q Drops ntnQosTargetStatsOverflo wShapingQDrops The number of times the associated ntnQosTargetStatsShapingQDrops counter overflowed 3 To re
169. etting Current Running Version v2 0 0 12 Local Store Version v2 0 0 12 BPS 2000 Image Filename Jbps2000_20_12 ima BPS 2000 Diagnostics Filename TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 100 15 XXX XXKAKK XKX Start TFTP Load of New Image EID 209570 C Configuring the switch Figure 46 Software Download page for a Hybrid stack Configuration gt Software Download Software Download Setting Current Running Version Local Store Version BPS 2000 Image Filename BPS 2000 Diagnostics Filename v1 1 1 10 y1 1 1 10 r 450 Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 KKK XXX XK XXX Download Option No ha h Table 37 describes the items on the Software Download page Table 37 Software Download page items Item Range Description Current Running Version The version of the current running software Local Store Version The local version of the software in the flash memory BPS 2000 Image Filename 1 30 Type the software image load filename BPS 2000 Diagnostics 1 30 Type the diagnostics filename Filename 450 Image Filename 1 30 Type the 450 image filename TFTP Server IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX Type the IP address of your TFTP load host Start TFTP Load of New 1 No Choose the software image to load Image in Pure BPS2000 2 BPS 2000 Image mode 3 BPS 200 Diagnostics Download Option in 4 450 410 Image Hybrid mode 5 BPS 2000 and 450 410 Images
170. ewing Ethernet error statistics 153 interface statistics 150 port statistics 143 QoS 301 transparent bridging statistics 157 System Up Time field 68 sysUpTime field 43 T tables and input forms about 39 Tagged BPDU on Tagged Port field 194 201 tagged frames 188 Tagged Trunk 190 tagged trunk 177 tagging 177 188 198 Tagging field 190 198 Target Address field 86 Target Address page 85 Target Domain field 86 Target Name field 86 Target Parameter Entry field 86 Target Parameter page 87 Target Retry Count field 86 Target Tag List field 86 Target Timeout field 86 TCP Connection Attmepts field 310 TCP Connection Failures field 310 TCP Port field 308 313 technical publications 27 316 technical support 28 Telnet Password Setting page 44 Telnet Access field 95 Telnet Use List field 95 text conventions 26 TFTP configuration file 124 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 332 Index server 124 software download 124 TFTP Server IP Address field 117 125 Time Stamp field 134 135 Timeout Clients field 311 Total Octets field 145 302 Total Overflow Octets field 302 Track Statistics field 300 301 Traffic Type field 205 traffic classifying 268 Transmit Period field 93 Transmit Drop Frame field 289 Transparent Bridging Chart page 159 Transparent Bridging page 157 transparent bridging statistics viewing 157 158 viewing in a bar graph format 160 viewing i
171. f frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error A frame only is counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense conditions was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface Frame Too Long The number of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size 209570 C Viewing system statistics 155 Table 52 Ethernet Errors page items continued Item Description SQE Test Errors The number of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface The SQE TEST ERROR is defined in section 7 2 2 2 4 of ANSI IEEE 802 3 1985 and its generation is described in section 7 2 4 6 of the same document Deferred Transmissions The number of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Multiple Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames on a partic
172. field 137 141 Current Learning Mode field 99 Current Level field 131 Current Running Version field 117 customer support 28 D DA Filtering on Intrusion Detected field 99 DA MAC Address field 107 DA MAC Filtering page 106 Data Specification field 293 Decryption Error field 72 Default Gateway field 66 default mapping 261 263 264 265 default settings 50 Deferred Packets field 146 Deferred Transmissions field 155 Description field 54 Designated Root field 200 Destination Address field 270 274 276 destination address filtering 96 Destination Address Mask field 270 274 276 Destination IP L4 Port Max field 281 Destination IP L4 Port Min field 281 Destination IP L4 Port Range field 283 Destination L4 Port field 270 274 276 Destination L4 Port Max field 285 287 Destination L4 Port Min field 285 287 Display Message From field 135 Display Unit field 135 Download Option field 117 Drop 141 Drop Events field 136 141 Drop Precedence field 266 267 DSCP 276 802 1p priority mapping 265 mapping 263 queue set associations 264 DSCP field 264 265 266 267 270 271 274 276 280 285 287 DSCP Mapping Modification page 265 DSCP Mapping page 265 DSCP Queue Assignment page 264 E EAPOL Administrative State field 93 EAPOL Security Configuration page 91 EAPOL based network security 30 EAPOL based security 30 91 Entry field 100 103 Entry Storage field 73 76 79 81 83 86 88 256 errors 148 150 15
173. filter group that is associated with this target Role Combination The interfaces to which this target specification applies specified in terms of a role combination tag Interface Direction The direction of packet flow at the interface to which this target specification applies Policy Order The number used to determine the order of precedence for this target specification Meter The meter associated with this entry if there is one In Profile Action Displays the name of the In Profile action for this policy Out of Profile Action Displays the name of the Out of Profile action for this policy This field applies only to metered data Shaper Displays the name of the shaper for this policy if there is one Shaper Group 2 63 Displays the shaper group ID for this policy Track Statistics Displays whether you are tracking statistics for this policy Policy Creation Policy Name 1 64 Type a character string to create a unique name to identify this policy Filter Group Type qosTargetAclType 1 IP Filter Group 2 Layer2 Filter Group Choose the type of filter group to associate with this policy 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 301 Table 100 Policy page items Statistics Section tem and MIB Range Description association Filter Group Choose the filter group to associate with this policy Role Combination Choose the type of interface
174. for the Tagged specified STG to BPDU 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 202 Configuring application settings Configuring MultiLink Trunk MLT members You can configure groups of links between the BPS 2000 and another switch or a server to provide higher bandwidth with active redundant links Trunked ports can span multiple units of the stack for fail safe connectivity to mission critical servers and the network center You can configure two to four switch ports together as members of a trunk to a maximum of six trunks To configure MultiLink Trunk members 1 From the main menu choose Application gt MultiLink Trunk gt Group The Group page opens Figure 91 209570 C Configuring application settings 203 Figure 91 Group page Application gt MultiLink Trunk gt Group MultiLink Trunk Group Setting Trunk Trunk Members STP Learning Trunk Mode Trunk Name po H m m Normal Basic Trunk 1 a Nomai MI EEEE Trun MOOO Proms a bee r MOOO eea a bee ae M ema eee Teme MultiLink Trunk Group Setting Trunk Status Enabled 1 2 Disab E 3 isad z E 5 owatea E 6 owabea WARNING Enabling first distributed trunk group will automatically reset the system Using Web based Management for the Business
175. fresh the hardware policy statistics click Update Deleting a hardware policy configuration To delete a hardware policy configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Policies The QoS Advanced Policies page opens Figure 167 2 Inthe Policy Table section in the hardware policy configuration row of your choice click the Delete icon A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following Click Yes to delete the hardware policy configuration Click Cancel to return to the Policy page without making changes Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 304 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Configuring QoS Policy Agent QPA characteristics You can configure QPA operational parameters To open the Agent page 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Agent The Agent page opens Figure 171 and Figure 172 Figure 171 Agent page 1 of 2 Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Agent 4 QoS Configuration QoS Policy Server Control Disabled QoS Policy Agent State Running QoS Policy Agent Reset To Defaults No x Qos Policy Agent Retry Timer ig 1 no retry 1 86400 Allow Packet Reordering Yes z Maintain Policing Statistics Yes z K Submit 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 305 Figure 172 Agent page 2 of 2
176. g FCS octets and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Packets The number of octets received including bad packets in length excluding framing bits but lt 64 bytes including FCS octets In the upper left hand corner click on the unit number of the device to monitor Click Submit The RMON Ethernet Statistics Table is updated with information about the selected device Figure 53 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 138 Configuring remote network monitoring RMON Viewing RMON Ethernet statistics in a bar graph format To view RMON Ethernet statistics in a bar graph format 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt RMON Ethernet The RMON Ethernet page opens Figure 53 2 Inthe port row of your choice click the bar graph icon The RMON Ethernet Chart page appears in a bar graph format Figure 54 Figure 54 RMON Ethernet Chart in a bar graph format Statistics gt RMON Ethernet Chart Unit 1 Port 7 Drop Events 0 0 0 OOctets 72 0 8202824 W Packets 2 2 260634 C Broadcast 0 2 25617 600000 M Multicast 0 1 14125 OCRE Align Errors 0 0 0 BUndersize 0 0 0 4000001 E Oversize 0 0 0 i Fragments 1 3 151402 Collisions 24 0 2736050 200000 Wi Jabbers 0 0 0 Unit 1 Port 7 120000 100000 80000 Packets lt
177. g data and have already assigned actions to the meter entry no Action field appears e Ifyou are metering data and have not assigned actions to the meter entry the In Profile and Out of Profile Action fields appear e If you are not referencing a shaper or creating a shaper the Shaper field s do not appear e If you are referencing an existing shaper the Shaper Name field appears e If you are referencing aggregate shaping the Shaping Group field appear 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 251 Figure 145 Policy area of QoS Quick Config Policy page Step 4 Policy Policy Name Policy Order 0 Role Combination allBPSIfcs 7 Filter Group Type IP Filter Group 7 Filter Group None Defined Meter metl hd In Profile Action OOOO z Out of Profile Action I z Track Statistics Yes ei eT 1 Inthe Policy Name field enter a character string to assign a name for the policy you are configuring 2 Inthe Policy Order field enter the value you want for the evaluation order of the policy you are configuring In the Role Combination field choose the Role Combination you want If you are referencing a meter with the policy Choose the In Profile Action you want from the pull down menu Choose the Out of Profile Action you want from the pull down menu 5 If you are referencing a existing shaper with the policy choose the Shaper Name from the pull down menu
178. g feature Proxy If enabled this feature allows the switch to consolidate IGMP Host Membership Reports received on its downstream ports and to generate a consolidated proxy report for forwarding to its upstream neighbor Note This field affects a VLANs Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 168 Configuring application settings Table 58 IGMP Configuration page items Item Description Robust Value The predetermined value set by the administrator to offset expected packet loss on a subnet If packet losses on a subnet are unacceptably high the Robust Value field can be increased to a higher value Note This field affects only the VLAN specified in the page s VLAN field Query Time The query interval the interval between general queries sent by the multicast router 2 Inthe VLAN row of your choice click the Modify icon The IGMP VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 73 Figure 73 IGMP VLAN Configuration page Application gt IGMP VLAN Configuration IGMP VLAN Setting VLAN 1 Snooping Enabled Proxy Enabled Robust Value 2 0 84 Query Time 25 seconds 1 512 Static Router Ports Version 1 Port 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 24 25 26 27 28 Unit 1 MmoOoooonn r OCC Unit 2 MmoOoooon im Unit 3 MoOoooonn m Static Router Ports i 10 st 12 a A 15 19 25 26 27 23 M moo o mi Poo oy mi wi m a a M w mi m
179. g remote network monitoring RMON 133 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the RMON threshold configuration e Click Cancel to return to the RMON Threshold page without making changes Viewing the RMON fault event log RMON events and alarms work together to notify you when values in your network go out of a specified range When values pass the specified ranges the alarm is triggered and fires The event specifies how the activity is recorded An event specifies whether a trap a log or a trap and a log are generated to view alarm activity When RMON is globally enabled two default events are generated e Rising Event e Falling Event Default events specify that when an alarm goes out of range the firing of the alarm is tracked in both a trap and a log For example when an alarm fires at the rising threshold the rising event specifies that this information be sent to both a trap and a log The RMON Event Log page works in conjunction with the RMON Threshold page to enable you to view a history of RMON fault events To view a history of RMON fault events From the main menu choose Fault gt RMON Event Log The RMON Event Log page opens Figure 51 Figure 51 RMON Event Log page Fault gt RMON Event Log RMON Event Log Triggered By ID 0 0 18 28 rising alarm Rising etherStatsPkts 34 1 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0
180. ge 288 e Configuring QoS meters on page 291 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 254 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced e Configuring QoS shapers on page 294 e Configuring QoS policies on page 297 e Configuring QoS Policy Agent QPA characteristics on page 304 Note To configure the features introduced with software version 1 2 and higher in a mixed stack you must access a BPS 2000 unit Configuring an interface group You view existing interface group configurations or create or modify an interface group if you want a port or ports to assign the same QoS policy to all interfaces in the group Note One default role combination covers all ports of the device gt Creating an interface group configuration Note For more information on QoS interface groups or role combinations refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 To create an interface group configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Interface Configuration The Interface Configuration page opens Figure 148 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 255 Figure 148 QoS Advanced Interface Configuration page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Interface Configuration 1 Interface Queue Table Absolute Queue Extended Bandwidth Service S
181. ginelD that was not known to the SNMP engine Wrong Digests The total number of packets dropped by the SNMP engine because they did not contain the expected digest value Decryption Errors The total number of packets dropped by the SNMP engine because they could not be decrypted Configuring user access to SNMPv3 You can view a table of all current SNMPvVv3 user security information such as authentication privacy protocols in use and create or delete SNMPv3 system user configurations Creating an SNMPv3 system user configuration To create an SNMPV3 system user configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt User Specification The User Specification page opens Figure 22 209570 C Configuring the switch 73 Figure 22 User Specification page Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt User Specification User Specification Table Action User Name Auth Protocol Entry Storage User Specification Creation User Name Authentication Protocol None gt Authentication Password Entry Storage Volatile x h Table 18 describes the items on the User Specification Table section of the User Specification page Table 18 User Specification Table section items Item and MIB bats on Description association x Deletes the row User Name The name of an existing SNMPv3 user usmUserSecurityName Authentication Protocol usmUserAuthProtocol
182. gnment Errors field 154 Allow Packet Reordering field 306 Allowed Source field 103 Allowed Source IP field 96 Allowed Source Mask field 96 application setting options broadcast domains 188 Common Open Policy Services COPS 308 IGMP 167 MultiLink Trunking 202 port mirroring 162 QoS 263 802 1p priority queue assignment 261 actions 288 DSCP mapping 265 DSCP queue assignment 264 interface groups 254 IP filters 268 layer 2 filters 278 meters 291 network access 268 policies hardware filters 297 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 320 Index Policy Agent QPA 304 QoS Quick Config 236 QoS Wizard 208 role combination 254 shapers 295 rate limiting 165 VLANs 173 Auth 311 Auth Failures field 311 Auth Missing ffield 311 Auth Type field 313 Authentication Password field 74 Authentication Protocol field 73 Authentication Protocols Supported field 71 Authentication Trap field 70 authentication traps enabling 69 Authorization Type field 309 autonegotiation 111 gigabit ports 114 Autonegotiation field 113 115 autoPVID 30 172 188 190 AutoPVID field 174 Autotopology 69 AutoTopology field 70 Available field 44 Bad Ctype field 310 Bad Sends field 311 Bandwidth Allocation field 255 Bandwidth field 255 bandwidth utilization 205 255 BootP configuring 64 request modes 65 BootP Request Mode field 65 BPS 2000 Diagnostics Filename field 117 BPS 2000 Image
183. groups An action specifies the type of behavior you want a policy to apply to a flow of packets When the filters match the incoming packets the created actions are performed on those packets Creating a filter action configuration To create a filter action configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Actions The Action page opens Figure 164 Note Beginning with software version 2 0 there are default actions for each service class 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 289 Figure 164 Action page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Action Action Table Premium_Action 1 Transmit Ox2E Platinum_Action 2 Transmit 0x22 Gold_Action 3 Transmit OxtA Silver_Action 4 Transmit Ox12 Bronze_Action 5 Transmit OxA Standard_Action 6 Transmit 0x0 Transmit Update Set Drop Update 802 1p i Frome OSC Loss Sensitive Mark as Priority 6 Loss Sensitive Mark as Priority 5 Loss Sensitive Mark as Priority 4 Loss Sensitive Mark as Priority 3 Loss Sensitive Mark as Priority 2 Not Loss Sensitive Mark as Priority 0 Action Creation Action Name Transmit Drop Frame Transmit Update DSCP Ignore E Set Drop Precedence Jignore L Update 802 1p Priority Ignore Default Use 802 1p Priority from DSCP Mapping Table Table 95 describes the items on the Action page Table 95 Action page items
184. guring port communication speed You can view the current console communication port settings and configure the console port baud rate to match the baud rate of the console terminal To view current console communication port settings and configure console port speed 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Console Comm Port The Console Communication Port page opens Figure 48 Figure 48 Console Communication Port page Configuration gt Console Communication Port Comm Port Parity No Parity Comm Port Stop Bits 1 Stop Bit Console Port Speed 3600 7 Communication Port Setting Comm Port Data Bits 8 Data Bits Table 42 describes the items on the Console Communication Port page Table 42 Console Communication Port Setting page items Item Range Description Comm Port Data Bits The current console communication port data bit setting Comm Port Parity The current console communication port parity setting Comm Port Stop Bits The current console communication port stop bit setting Console Port Speed 2400 Choose the console port speed baud rate 4800 9600 Note The default setting is 9600 19200 38400 Caution If you choose a baud rate that does not match your console terminal baud rate you will lose communication with the configuration interface when you click Submit 2 Select from the list 3 Click Submit Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 20
185. h 45 The selected password page opens Figure 6 Administration gt Security gt Console Note The title of the page corresponds to the menu selection you choose In Figure 6 the network administrator selected Figure 6 Console password setting page Administration gt Security gt Console Console Switch Password Setting Read Only Switch Password Read Write Switch Password Console Switch Password Type None 4 Peo Console Stack Password Setting Read Only Stack Password Read Write Stack Password Console Stack Password Type None E Note Console Telnet and Web settings share the same switch and stack password type and password Table 6 describes the items on the Console page Table 6 Console page items Section Item Setting Description Console Switch Password Setting Console Switch Password Setting Type Read Only Switch Password Read Write Switch Password 1 None 2 Local Password 3 RADIUS Authentication 1 15 alphanumeric string 1 15 alphanumeric string Displays the switch password types Note The default is None Type the read only password setting for the read only access user Type the read write password setting for the read write access user Console Stack Password Setting Console Stack Password Setting Type 1 None 2 Local Password 3 RADIUS Authentication Displays the stack p
186. he message processing model to be used when generating SNMP messages using this entry Security Name 1 32 Type the principal on whose behalf SNMP messages are snmp TargetParamsSecuirtyName generated using this entry Security Level 1 noAuthNoPriv Choose the level of security to be used when generating snmpTargetParamsSecuirtyLevel 2 authNoPriv SNMP messages using this entry Entry Storage 1 Volatile Choose your storage preference Selecting Volatile requests snmp TargetParamsStorageType 2 Non Volatile information to be dropped lost when you turn the power off Selecting Non Volatile requests information to be saved in NVRAM when you turn the power off or select from a list 3 Click Submit In the Target Parameter Creation section type information in the text boxes The new entry appears in the Target Parameter Table Figure 28 209570 C Configuring the switch 89 Deleting an SNMPv3 target parameter configuration To delete an SNMPV3 target parameter configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Target Address The Target Address page opens Figure 27 2 Inthe Target Parameter Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the target parameter configuration e Click Cancel to return to the table without making changes Conf
187. he modified VLAN configuration is displayed in the VLAN Table Figure 75 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 178 Configuring application settings Creating a protocol based VLAN To create a protocol based VLAN 1 From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 75 In the VLAN Creation section choose Protocol Click Create VLAN The VLAN Configuration Protocol Based setting page opens Figure 78 Figure 78 VLAN Configuration Protocol Based setting page Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration Protocol Based VLAN Protocol Based Setting VLAN VLAN Name Protocol IP bd User Defined Protocol e g 08137 Learning Constraint VL ED ax Table 64 describes the items on the VLAN Configuration Protocol Based setting page Note Beginning with software version 1 2 there are 14 available protocols 209570 C Configuring application settings 179 Table 64 VLAN Configuration Protocol Based setting page items IPX Snap IPX Ethernet Il Apple Talk DEC Lat SNA 802 2 SNA Ethernet Il Net Bios XNS Vines Ipv6 User Defined and RARP Item Range Description VLAN 1 4094 Type a unique number to identify the VLAN VLAN Name 1 16 Type a unique name to identify the VLAN Protocol IP IPX 802 2 1PX 802 3 Choose the supported protocol fo
188. he policy first Configuring QoS shapers Note You must be using either the BPS2000 1GT BPS2000 2GT or BPS2000 2GE MDA with the Business Policy Switch in order to implement the QoS shaping features Using the QoS Advanced pages you can create view or delete shapers If you do not want to shape the data in your flow go to Configuring QoS policies on page 297 Creating a shaper To create a shaper 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 295 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Shapers The Qos Advanced Shapers page opens Figure 166 All Shapers including those created using the QoS Wizard and Qos Quick Config pages display on this page Figure 166 QoS Advanced Shapers page 2 Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Shapers Shaper Table Action Burst Size Queue Size Bytes Packets X shaper 3 9984000 2047 8 Packets X shaperd 4 16721920 2047 1 Packet Shaper Creation Queue Size 1 Packet Name Shaping Rate Kbps Multiple of 64 Kbps 1 Kbps 1000 bits per second Maximum Burst Rate Kbps 1 Kbps 1000 bits per second Burst Size f i Maximum Burst Duration PENKO z In the Shaper Creation area create the shape Table 96 describes the fields in the Shaper Creation area which you use to set new shapers Table 98 Shaper Creation fields Item Range Description Name 1 to 16 alphanumer
189. her by simply adding the VLAN to the specified STG You no longer must remove the VLAN from the previous STG first 2 Toadda VLAN a Click the modification icon in the Add VLAN column Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 196 Configuring application settings The Spanning Tree VLAN Membership Add VLAN page opens Figure 87 Figure 87 Spanning Tree Add VLAN page Application gt Spanning Tree VLAN Membership Application gt Spanning Tree Add VLAN Current VLAN Membership 1 Add VLAN Membership Note Please use SPACE to separate VLAN numbers b Enter the number of the VLAN s you want to add to the STG c Click Submit 3 To remove a VLAN a Click the modification icon in the Remove VLAN column The Spanning Tree VLAN Membership Remove VLAN page opens Figure 88 Figure 88 Spanning Tree Remove VLAN page Application gt Spanning Tree VLAN Membership Application gt Spanning Tree Remove VLAN Current VLAN Membership 2 3 Remove VLAN Membership Note Please use SPACE to separate VLAN numbers b Enter the number of the VLAN s you want to remove to the STG c Click Submit 209570 C Configuring application settings 197 Note You cannot delete VLAN 1 from STG 1 gt Configuring ports for spanning tree To configure switch ports for Spanning Tree participation 1 From the main menu choose App
190. hose of the individual trunk members Selecting Fast shortens the state transition timer by two seconds The default setting is Normal Trunk Mode Basic The default operating mode of the switch When in Basic mode source MAC addresses are dynamically assigned to specific trunk members for flooding and forwarding This allows the switch to stabilize and distribute the data streams of source addresses across the trunk members Trunk Name Type a character string to create a unique name to identify the trunk for example Trunki The name if chosen carefully can provide meaningful information to you For example S1 T1 to FS2 indicates that Trunk1 in Switch connects to File Server 2 MultiLink Trunk Group Setting Trunk Status 1 Enabled 2 Disabled Choose to enable or disable any of the existing MultiLink Trunks Note When a trunk is not active Trunk Status field set to Disabled configuration changes do not take effect until you set the Trunk Status field to enabled 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit in any section to save your changes 209570 C Configuring application settings 205 Monitoring MLT traffic You can monitor the bandwidth usage for the MultiLink Trunk member ports within each trunk in your configuration by selecting the traffic type to monitor To monitor MultiLink Trunk traffic 1 From the main menu choose App
191. ic characters with no spaces Enter the name for the shaper you are creating Shaping Rate 1 4294967296 Enter the Shaping Rate in Kbps here This is the maximum rate at which traffic shaped using this shaper will be transmitted over a given duration Note The system rounds up the shaping rate you enter to a multiple of 64 Kbps Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 296 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Table 98 Shaper Creation fields continued Item Range Description Burst Size 6 durations Maximum Burst Rate Enter the Maximum Burst Rate in Kbps This determines the maximum traffic burst size that can be transmitted without a shaping delay Duration From the pull down menu choose 1 of the 6 durations for the period that the Maximum Burst Rate is allowed Queue Size 1 2 4 8 or 16 packets Choose the queue depth from the pull down menu This is the number of packets that can exceed the traffic burst size and still be queued for transmission 3 Click Submit Note Shaper configurations are not modifiable They must be deleted and the information re entered Viewing shapers To view a shaper 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Shapers The QoS Advanced Shapers page opens Figure 165 2 View created shapers in the Shaper Table This table displays all the shapers you
192. identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generated messages to be sent to this transport address Entry Storage 1 Volatile Choose your storage preference Selecting Volatile requests 2 Non Volatile information to be dropped lost when you turn the power off Selecting Non Volatile requests information to be saved in NVRAM when you turn the power off select Click from a list Submit In the Target Address Creation section type information in the text boxes or The new entry appears in the Target Address Table Figure 27 Note This Target Address Table section of the Target Address page contains hyperlinks to the Target Parameter page For more information see Configuring an SNMPv3 management target parameter on page 87 209570 C Configuring the switch 87 Deleting an SNMPv3 target address configuration To delete an SNMPV3 target address configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Target Address The Target Address page opens Figure 27 2 Inthe Target Address Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the target address configuration e Click Cancel to return to the table without making changes Configuring an SNMPv3 management target parameter SNMPv3 management target parameters are used during n
193. ield 46 Read Only Switch Password field 45 Read Write Community String field 70 Read Write Stack Password field 46 Read Write Switch Password field 45 Re authenticate Now field 93 Re authentication field 93 Re authentication Period field 93 redundancy 202 Remote Access page 94 remote dial in access configuring 46 Reset page 49 Reset to Defaults page 50 resetting the switch stack 49 resetting the switch stack to system defaults 50 Retrieve Configuration Image from Server field 125 Retry Algorithm field 313 Retry Count field 313 Retry Interval field 313 Rising Action 131 Rising Level field 131 RMON Ethernet statistics viewing 136 viewing in a bar graph format 138 viewing in a pie chart format 139 history statistics viewing 140 viewing in a line graph format 142 RMON Ethernet Chart page 138 RMON Ethernet page 136 RMON Event Log page 133 RMON History Chart page 142 RMON History page 140 RMON options fault event log viewing 133 fault threshold parameters configuring 130 deleting 132 history statistics viewing 140 RMON Threshold Creation field 132 RMON Threshold page 130 RMON about 129 Robust Value field 168 169 Role Combination field 256 258 259 300 301 302 209570 C Index 329 role combinations 254 Root Path Cost field 200 Root Port field 200 S Sample Alarm Sample field 132 Secondary RADIUS Server field 46 security 30 91 EAPOL based 30 IP manager list 30 MAC address based 97 passwo
194. igure 153 DSCP Queue Assignment page 00 cece eee 264 Figure 154 DSCP Mapping Table page 00 e eee eee eee 266 Figure 155 DSCP Mapping Modification page 00 eee eee eee 267 Figure 156 IP Classification page 1 of 3 0 0 0 c eee 268 Figure 157 IP Classification page 2 of 3 000 c eee ee 269 Figure 158 IP Classification page 3 of 3 0 00 cee eee 269 Figure 159 IP Classification Group page sanaaa aaea 274 Figure 160 Layer2 Classification page 1 of 2 0 eee 278 Figure 161 Layer2 Classification page 2 of 2 2 0 ee eee 279 Figure 162 Layer Group Page ai ise ia cebeh seis Tiru VERa etek ac ewdavasss 285 Figure 163 Layer2 Group modification page cee eee 286 Figure 164 Action page ccceccccavteskee ed Hees Reiwsewee sewed Geta SSRN 289 Figure 165 QoS Advanced Meter page 0 0c eee eee 292 Figure 166 QoS Advanced Shapers page ccc eee eee eee 295 Figure 167 QoS Advanced Policies page 1 of 3 0 020 e eee eee 298 Figure 168 QoS Advanced Policies page 2 of 3 0 0 ee 299 Figure 169 QoS Advanced Policies page 3 of 3 0 c eee eee 299 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 20 Figures Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Policy Statisties pag ulaciakces irtirar ak
195. iguring SNMP traps You can configure the IP address and community string for a new SNMP trap receiver view a table of existing SNMP trap receiver configurations or delete an existing SNMP trap receiver configuration s Note The SNMP Trap Receiver Table is an alternative to using the SNMPv3 Target Table and SNMPv3 Parameter Table However only SNMPyv1 traps are configurable using this table Creating an SNMP trap receiver configuration To create an SNMP trap receiver configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMP Trap The SNMP Trap Receiver page opens Figure 29 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 90 Configuring the switch Figure 29 SNMP Trap Receiver page Configuration gt SNMP Trap Receiver Trap Receiver Table x 1 10 30 31 99 chioul PE EE ES Trap Receiver Creation Trap Receiver Index 1 v IP Address Community POXA m K Submit Table 26 describes the items on the Trap Receiver Table and Trap Receiver Creation sections of the SNMP Trap Receiver page Table 26 SNMP Trap Receiver page items Items Range Description x Deletes the row Trap Receiver Index 1 4 Choose the number of the trap receiver to create or modify IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX_ Type the network address for the SNMP manager that is to receive the specified trap Community 0 32 Type the community
196. imary power failed e Unavailable 2 Inthe upper left corner of the Switch Information page click the number of the device you want to view The Switch Information page is updated with information about the selected switch 209570 C Viewing summary information 57 Viewing switch information in real time You can display the port and LED status information of a selected policy switch in real time To display a physical view of the policy switch 1 From the main menu choose Summary gt Switch View The Switch View page opens in a separate Web browser Figure 14 Figure 14 Switch View page Summary gt Switch View Netscape Summary gt Switch View Unit o 23 N RTEL Comm Business Policy Switch 2000 O Newer Ce 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 7 19 21 28 a 135790 BISPRAZ OO ICICI CCI ee laega Koeman BPS AFX MDA 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 spel cbs it Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 58 Viewing summary information Note You may be presented with a security warning to click on before the switch view appears Table 11 describes the fields on the Switch View page Table 11 BPS 2000 switch LED descriptions Label Type Color State Meaning Pwr Power status Green On DC power is available to the switch s internal circuitry Off No AC power to switch or power supply failed Status
197. in the entire stack that have an error If a particular port has no errors it will not be displayed To view a summary of the port errors for the BPS 2000 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Port Error Summary The Port Error Summary page opens Figure 60 209570 C Viewing system statistics 149 Figure 60 Port Error Summary page Statistics gt Port Error Summary Port Error Summary Table 1 7 Enabled Down Unknown 2 24 Enabled Up 1OMB Half 0 Unit Port Link Speed Duplex FCS Late Multiple Excessive P P Errors Collisions Collisions 137 182277 0 a 477 0 Table 50 describes the read only information displayed in the Port Error Summary Table Table 50 Port Error Summary Table fields Item Description Unit Displays the unit number in the stack Port Displays the port number of the unit Status Displays the status of the port Enabled Disabled Link Displays the link status of the port Up Down Speed Duplex Displays the speed at which the port is operating as well as whether it is in half or full duplex mode Frame Errors Displays the number of frame errors received on this port FCS Errors Displays the number of frame check sequence FCS errors received on this port Late Collisions Displays the number of late collisions errors received on this port Multiple Collisions Displays the number of multiple collisions
198. in the spanning tree network See also Hello Time The default setting is 2 seconds Forward 4 30 The Forward Delay parameter value that the root bridge is currently using Delay seconds This value specifies the amount of time that the bridge ports remain in the Listening and Learning states before entering the Forwarding state Note The root bridge s Forward Delay parameter value becomes the actual Forward Delay parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network See also Bridge Forward Delay Bridge Hello 1 10 The Hello Interval the amount of time between transmissions of BPDUs Time seconds specified by management for this bridge This parameter takes effect only when this bridge becomes the root bridge Note Although you can set the Hello Interval for a bridge using bridge management software once the spanning tree computation process is complete all bridges participating in the spanning tree network use the root bridge s Hello Interval parameter value If any bridge becomes the root bridge its Hello Interval parameter value becomes the Actual Hello Interval parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network See also Hello Time The default setting is 2 seconds Tagged 1 Yes Displays whether you are sendin g either tagged or untagged BPDUs BPDU on 2 No from a tagged port Tagged Port VID used for 1 4094 Displays the VLAN ID you are sending the tagged BPDUs
199. in to the Web based management interface on page 34 e Web page layout on page 35 New features The following new features that you can access through Web based management have been introduced to the BPS 2000 software since version 1 0 e Introduced with software version 2 0 Support for BPS 2000 1GT BPS 2000 2GT and BPS 2000 2GE MDAs refer to Installing Media Dependent Adapters MDA s and Installing Gigabit Interface Converters and Small Form Factor Pluggable Interface Converters Ability to view CPU and memory utilization refer to Chapter 2 Ability to set per port spanning tree path cost and priority refer to Chapter 7 Shaping for QoS networks refer to Chapters 8 and 9 Improved QoS Wizard refer to Chapter 8 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 30 Using the Web based management interface QoS Quick Config refer to Chapter 8 Port naming refer to Chapter 4 MAC address based filtering refer to Chapter 4 Individual IP addresses for each unit in the stack refer to Chapter 4 Configurable VID for tagged BPDU with multiple spanning tree groups refer to Chapter 7 Specifying multiple VLANs in a QoS single filter refer to Chapters 8 and 9 e Introduced with software version 1 2 VLANS increased to 256 Support for multiple spanning tree groups refer to Chapter 7 IP manager list refer to Chapter 4 e Introduced with software ver
200. indow with VLAN entry QoS Policies to Configure Service Class Service Class In Profile Qut Profile VLAN 1 Yes Drop Drop Yes 20 When you are through with the table click Back then click Submit You will see a session confirmation page Prioritizing IP applications with the QoS Wizard You can specify that different IP applications in your network configuration are marked with different priority levels 1 In the packet prioritization window Figure 98 click IP Application and click Next An IP Application prioritization selection page opens Figure 108 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 221 Figure 108 IP Application prioritization page QoS Wizard Step 1 IP Application Select the IP Applications Web Browsing http Secure VVeb Browsing https E Mail smtp File Transfers ftp Keyboard I O telnet OOmWOW W ax acm 2 Click the application s you want to prioritize and click Next A page opens Figure 109 that asks if you want to set a Meter for the specified IP Application Figure 109 Meter for IP Application page QoS Wizard Step 2 Meter Would you like to meter the traffic for HTTP E No O Yes 3 Ifyou do not want to set a Meter click No The system opens to the Service Class selection page Figure 111 which appears with only one Service Class to set You do not have In Profile and Out of Profile without met
201. ined j e g 08137 4 Filter Group Name fiGrpt Step 2 Meter No Meter C Configure Meter C Use Existing Meter Figure 134 QoS Quick Config Policy page 2 of 3 B02 1p Priority DSCP IP Protocol Destination IP Source IP B02 1p Priori rotoco i Layer4 Port Rangel Layer4 Port Rangel E Ignore E Ignore E Ignore O Inspect Destination IP Inspect Source IP E Priority ignore E ignore E ee Port Range ee Port Range jo 1 C2 143 Min Value P Min Value P E aE Max Value P Max Value P 0 65535 0 65535 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 241 Figure 135 QoS Quick Config Policy page 3 of 3 Step 3 Shaper NoShaper Configure Shaper Use Existing Shaper Aggregate Shaping Step 4 Policy Policy Name tgt2 Policy Order P1 Role Combination allBPSifes 7 Action Drop_Traffic z Track Statistics Yes F K Submit ooo The QoS Quick Config Policy page contains the following four steps e Step 1 Rule e Step 2 Meter e Step 3 Shaper e Step 4 Policy This section discusses the following areas e Configuring QoS Quick Config filters next e Deleting Qos Quick Config filters from the filter group on page 246 e Configuring QoS Quick Config meters on page 247 e Configuring QoS Quick Config shapers on page 248 e Configuring QoS Quick Config policies on page 250 Configuring QoS Quick C
202. int choices are IVL and SVL Note If IVL is selected the VLAN uses an independent filtering database from all other VLANs IVL is available only in Pure BPS 2000 stack operational mode If SVL is selected the VLAN shares the same filtering database as all other VLANs with SVL Port Port Membership Click the check boxes beneath a port to associate the port with the VLAN or if the port is already selected click the check box to deselect the port as a member of the VLAN Type information in the text boxes or click the check box of a port to associate it with the VLAN or if the port is already a member click the check box to deselect it as a member of the VLAN Do one of the following e Click Submit e Click Back to return to the VLAN Configuration page without making changes The modified VLAN configuration is displayed in the VLAN Table Figure 75 Creating a MAC SA based VLAN To create a MAC SA based VLAN From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 75 In the VLAN Creation section choose MAC SA Click Create VLAN The VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based setting page opens Figure 80 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 184 Configuring application settings Figure 80 VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based setting page Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based
203. ion request Note A value of 1 indicates that a connection retry should not be attempted after a failed attempt Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 306 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Table 102 Agent page items continued Section Item and MIB association Range Description Allow Packet Reordering ntnQosConfigAllowPacket Reordering 1 Yes 2 No Support for certain PHBs requires that packets within a flow not be reordered when transmitted Choose e Yes Allows full flexibility of assigning packet to egress queue e No Agent verifies that in profile and out of profile actions associated with the flow do not cause packets from same flow to be assigned to different egress queues Maintain Policing Statistics ntnQosConfigMaintainPolicing Stats 1 Yes 2 No Policing statistics such as in profile and out of profile octets are often important to evaluate the efficacy of the installed policies Tracking these statistics uses additional system resources which limits the amount of filters available for classification Choose e Yes Tracks statistics for all policies defined after value is set e No Does not track statistics for new policies Policy Class Support Table Policy Class Names The name of the policy Current Instances The current class entries Maximum Installed I
204. ir AEEA Eee ea OSE 302 Agent page 1of2 icon i aieee teat i duneda bee aA 304 Agent page 2 OF 2 ccc cee ei gcksceanebes ni ddwetoeeseedeeoe ene 305 Plas AOE sii 644 ee2eei0 Ge boi Ceo ABEER ed CRAMER ARa 308 Comigo PAG accecrenheriaadedene ee aGean ahs ana EE 312 Online Helo wihGOW ccccsdee se dek cageke cue Sedeeeedascaeeee 316 Nortel Networks Technical Documentation Web site 317 Nortel Networks Customer Support Web site 318 209570 C 21 Tables Table 1 Main headings and options sa0ncacaseeenasdeees ee ee ene page a ws 37 Table 2 PACS E E E E E E E E EEE EE ET ET 38 Table 3 Page BUMONS And ICONS ocre Sued ava dakan knn waked e A e E 40 Table 4 System Information page items 0000 ee eee 43 Table 5 CPU Memory Utilization page items 0 0 00 c eee eee 44 Table 6 Console page MOMS cis icewise ea sees wees eevee eee sears ERARA 45 Table 7 RADIUS page NEMS ccc5cctoctscpewetaseidavedveteienneonee Os 46 Table 8 User levels and access levels 000 cece eee eee 48 Table 9 Stack Information page fields 0 20 cece eee eee 54 Table 10 Switch Information page fields 0 000 c eee eee eee 56 Table 11 BPS 2000 switch LED descriptions 20 000 cease 58 Table 12 Stack Numbering Setting page fields 0 00 00 eee 60 Table 13 IP page Reme oi cece siee seeder ede b ind oss boeer see eee eina 65 Table 14 System page items c a
205. is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 Gi of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software
206. ist Click Submit Note COPS configurations are not modifiable They must be deleted and the information recreated Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 314 Implementing Common Open Policy Services COPS Deleting a COPS client configuration To delete a COPS client configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt COPS gt Configuration The Configuration page opens Figure 174 2 Inthe COPS Configuration Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the configuration e Click Cancel to return to the Configuration page without making changes 209570 C 315 Chapter 11 Support menu The customer support options available to you are e Help e Release Notes e Manuals e Upgrade Using the online help option You can read information about management page functions in the online help menu embedded in the Web based management interface To open online help 1 From the main menu choose Support gt Help or click the Help icon located in the upper right corner of any management page a The Online Help menu opens in a separate Web browser Figure 175 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 316 Support menu Figure 175 Online help window Online Help
207. it Number field 61 Not in Time Window field 72 Notification page 83 Notify Name field 83 Notify Tag field 83 Notify Type field 83 Notify View field 79 numbering ports 33 stacks 60 unit 33 56 60 62 O Octets field 136 141 online help accessing 315 Open Attempts field 310 Open Failures field 310 Operational State field 54 56 Operational Status field 93 Operational Traffic Control field 93 Order field 274 276 285 287 Out Discards field 151 Out Errors field 151 Out Frames field 158 Out Non Unicast field 151 Out Octets field 151 Out Packets field 309 Out Profile field 303 Out Unicast field 151 Out of Profile Action field 300 301 Out Profile Action field 293 Overflow in Profile Octets field 303 Overflow Out Profile Octets field 303 Overflow Packet Hits field 302 Overflow Shaping Q Drops field 303 Oversize field 137 141 Oversized Packets field 145 P Packet Hits field 302 Packet Type field 166 Packets field 137 141 145 Packets length field 137 145 Parameter field 131 Parameter Tag field 88 Participation field 198 Partition Port on Intrusion Detected field 98 Partition Time field 99 passwords setting console 44 remote dial in access 46 Telnet 44 Web 44 Path Cost field 198 Permit field 270 275 277 physical view 57 PIDs 180 Policies page 298 Policy Class Name field 306 Policy Name field 300 302 Policy Order field 300 301 Policy Statistics page 301 Port Chart page 147
208. itch correspond to its unit number 2 To continue viewing summary information or to start the configuration process choose another option from the main menu 209570 C 63 Chapter 4 Configuring the switch The switch configuration options available to you are e Configuring BootP IP and gateway settings next e Modifying system settings on page 67 e About SNMP on page 68 e Configuring SNMPv1 on page 69 e Configuring SNMPv3 on page 70 e Configuring SNMP traps on page 89 e Configuring EAPOL based security on page 91 e Managing remote access by IP address on page 94 e Configuring MAC address based security on page 96 e Viewing learned MAC addresses by VLAN on page 108 e Locating a specific MAC address on page 109 e Configuring port s autonegotiation speed duplex status and alias on page 111 e Configuring high speed flow control on page 114 e Downloading switch images on page 116 e Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFIP server on page 124 e Configuring port communication speed on page 127 e Setting system operational modes on page 128 Note To access the software version 2 0 features in a mixed stack you must access a BPS 2000 unit Additionally only 64 VLANS are available in a mixed stack multiple STG support is not available in a mixed stack Using Web bas
209. ive Phy The current operating physical port The physical port options are left or right NOTE This field may not appear depending on the MDA you are using In the upper left hand corner click on the unit number of the gigabit MDA to configure Select from the lists Click Submit Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 116 Configuring the switch Downloading switch images You can download the BPS 2000 software image that is located in non volatile flash memory To download the BPS 2000 software image a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server must be present in your network and the policy switch must have an IP address To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address refer to Configuring BootP IP and gateway settings on page 64 Caution Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download process A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image In addition to downloading switch images this section covers the following topics e Observing LED indications next e Upgrading software on page 119 To download a switch image 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Software Download The Software Download page opens Figure 45 and Figure 46 Figure 45 Software Download page for a Pure BPS 2000 stack Configuration gt Software Download Software Download S
210. ize ore General Discipline Discipline Bandwidth E Allocation Order Bytes NS ek oON Priority Queuing 0 Relative 1 64000 Weighted Fair Queuing 5 0 Relative 2 48000 Weighted Fair Queuing 0 0 F 0 Relative 2 40000 Weighted Fair Queuing 0 0 20 0 Relative 2 32000 Priority Queuing 0 0 100 0 Relative 1 38400 Priority Queuing 0 0 100 0 Relative 2 153600 Interface Group Table Action Role Combination Capabilities Interface Class Entry Storage l xl allBPSlfcs moriar Cro mise Untrusted Read Only Input IP Classification Display Interface ID Table Interface Group Creation Role Combination Interface Class Untusted Table 77 describes the items on the Interface Queue Table section of the QoS Advanced Interface Configuration page Table 77 QoS Interface Queue Table section items Item Description Set ID The number that identifies a specific queue set Queue ID The number that identifies the queue in the given set General Discipline The queueing discipline that is associated with the specified queue The options are 1 Other Use goslfQueueExtDiscipline 2 fifo First In First Out Queuing 3 pq Priority Queuing 4 fg Fair Queuing and 5 wfq Weighted Fair Queuing Extended Discipline The queueing discipline that is associated with the specified queue This attribute provides a means to add additional queueing mechanisms Bandwidth The percentage
211. lable only in the Pure BPS 2000 stack operational mode If SVL is selected the VLAN shares the same filtering database as all other VLANs with SVL Type information in the text boxes or click the check box of a port to associate it with the VLAN or if the port is already a member click the check box to deselect it as a member of the VLAN To create MAC address associations click the modify icon The VLAN Configuration MAC Address page opens Figure 82 Figure 82 VLAN Configuration MAC Address page Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration MAC Address MAC Address Table VLAN 3 lIndex MAC Address X 1 00 00 00 00 00 07 xX 2 00 00 00 00 00 08 MAC Address Creation MAC Address XK XX XK KKK EID ax 209570 C Configuring application settings 187 5 Inthe MAC Address Creation section type the MAC address to associate with the VLAN The MAC address appears in the MAC Address Table Figure 82 Note You can delete an existing MAC address by clicking the delete icon in the row of the MAC address you want to delete 6 Doone of the following e Click Submit to save your changes and return to the VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based setting page e Click Back to return to the VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based setting page without making changes 7 Onthe VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based setting page do one of the following e Click Submit e Click Back to return t
212. lication gt MultiLink Trunk gt Utilization The Utilization page opens Figure 92 Figure 92 Utilization page Application gt MultiLink Trunk gt Utilization MultiLink Trunk Utilization Selection View By Trunk LES Traffic Type Rx and Tx MultiLink Trunk Utilization Table Unit Por Last 5 Minutes Last 30 Minutes Last Hour ie 2i 0 0 0 0 0 0 lee 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 HE 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 76 describes the items on the Utilization page Table 76 Utilization page items Section Item Range Description MultiLink Trunk Trunk 1 6 Choose the trunk to be monitored Utilization Selection View By Traffic Type 1 RX and TX Choose the traffic type to be monitored for percentage of 2 RX bandwidth utilization 3 TX Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 206 Configuring application settings Table 76 Utilization page items continued Section Item Range Description MultiLink Trunk Utilization Table Unit Port A list of the trunk member switch ports that correspond to the trunk specified in the Trunk column Last 5 Minutes The percentage of packets of the type specified in the Traffic Type field used by the port in the last five minutes This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every 15 seconds Last 30 Minutes The percentage of packets of the type
213. lication gt Spanning Tree gt Port Configuration The Spanning Tree Port Configuration page opens Figure 89 Figure 89 Spanning Tree Port Configuration page r Application gt Spanning Tree gt Port Configuration STP Group Group Group1 ED Spanning Tree Port Setting 1 Untagged Access Normal Learning 128 fo Forwarding 2 Untagged Access Normal Learning fies po Forwarding 3 Untagged Access Normal Leaming fize ho Forwarding 4 Untagged Access Normal Learning fize Eo Forwarding 5 Untagged Access Normal Leaming fies po Forwarding 6 Untagged Access Normal Leaning fize fo Forwarding 7 Untagged Access Normal Learning Pze fo Forwarding 8 Untagged Access Normal Leaming fies fo Forwarding g Untagged Access Normal Leaming fize fo Forwarding 10 Untagged Access Normal Learning 28 fo Forwarding 11 Untagged Access Normal Leaming fize fho Forwarding Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 198 Configuring application settings Table 73 describes the items on the Spanning Tree Port Configuration page Table 73 Spanning Tree Port Configuration page items Section Item Description STP Group Group Choose the STG Group you want to view Spanning Tree Port The port number of the currently displayed unit Port Setting Trunk The trunk that corresponds to the swi
214. licy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 66 Configuring the switch Table 13 IP page items Section Item Range Description BootP or Last Address Choose this mode to inform the switch at each startup to obtain its IP configuration using BootP If the BootP request fails the switch uses the network parameters stored in its non volatile memory Note Valid parameters obtained in using BootP always replace current information stored in the non volatile memory Note Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests the BootP process times out if a reply is not received within approximately 7 minutes When the process times out the BootP request mode automatically changes to BootP Disabled mode To restart the BootP process change the BootP request mode to any of the three following modes BootP When Needed BootP Always or to BootP or Last Address IP Setting In Band Stack IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX Type a new stack IP address in the appropriate format In Band Switch IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX Type a new switch IP address in the appropriate format Note When the IP address is entered in the In Band IP Address field and the In Band Subnet Mask field value is not present the software provides an in use default value for the In Band Subnet Mask field that is based on the class of the IP address entered in the In Band IP Address field Mast In Band Subnet XXX XXX XXX X
215. lt Gateway 134 177 212 1 134 177 212 1 0 0 0 0 P Submit Note To change the IP information for a specific unit in the stack choose that unit and enter the desired IP information into the In Band Switch IP address field Table 13 describes the items on the IP page Table 13 IP page items Section Item Range Description Boot Mode BootP Request BootP When Choose this mode to inform the switch to send a BootP request Setting Mode Needed when the switch IP address stored in nonvolatile memory is the factory default value If the stored IP address differs from the factory default value the switch uses the stored network parameters If the switch cannot find a BootP server it tries five more times to find one and then defaults to the factory settings BootP Always Choose this mode to inform the switch each time the switch boots to ignore any stored network parameters and send a BootP request If the BootP request fails the switch boots with the factory default IP configuration This setting disables remote management if no BootP server is set up for the switch but it allows the switch to boot normally BootP Disabled Choose this mode to inform the switch each time the switch boots to use the IP configuration parameters stored in non volatile memory If a BootP configuration is in progress when you issue this command the BootP configuration stops Using Web based Management for the Business Po
216. management VLAN Note To access the software version 2 0 features in a mixed stack you must access a BPS 2000 unit Additionally only 64 VLANS are available in a mixed stack multiple STG support is not available in a mixed stack To open the VLAN Configuration page From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 75 Figure 75 VLAN Configuration page Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration VLAN Table Action VLANIVLAN Name VLAN Type Protocol Se Defined Learning Protocol Constraint VLAN 1 Port None 0x0 IVL Active VLAN Creation VLAN Type Port X VLAN Setting Management VLAN pa peame AutoPVID Setting AutoPVID Disabled Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 174 Configuring application settings Table 61 describes the items on the VLAN Configuration page Table 61 VLAN Configuration page items Section Item Description VLAN Table E Displays a modification page X Deletes the row VLAN The number assigned to the VLAN when the VLAN was created VLAN Name The name assigned to the VLAN when the VLAN was created VLAN Type The base type assigned when the VLAN was created The base types are Port based IP Subnet based Protocol based and MAC SA based Protocol The protocol assigned when th
217. mbering if one or more units were previously moved or modified The entries can also include unit numbers of units that are no longer participating in the stack not currently active 209570 C Viewing summary information 61 Table 12 Stack Numbering Setting page fields continued Item Range Description MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX MAC address of the corresponding unit listed in the Current Unit Number field New Unit Number 1 8 None Choose a new number to assign to your selected policy switch Note If you leave the field blank the system automatically selects the next available number Choose the new number to assign to your switch Click Submit A message opens prompting you to confirm your request Do one of the following e Click OK to renumber the stack e Click Cancel to return to the Stack Numbering page without making changes Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 62 Viewing summary information Identifying unit numbers You can identify the unit numbers of the switches participating in a stack configuration by viewing the LEDs on the front panel of each switch To identify unit numbers in your configuration 1 From the main menu choose Summary gt Identify Unit Numbers The Identify Unit Numbers page opens Figure 16 Figure 16 Identify Unit Numbers page Port LEDs lit on the front panel of the sw
218. mbership page Table 20 Group Membership page items Item and MIB association Range Description x Deletes the row Security Name 1 32 Type a string of character to create a security name for the vacmSecurityToGroupStatus principal which is mapped by this entry to a group name Security Model 1 SNMPv1 Choose the security model within which the security name to vacmSecurityToGroupStatus 2 SNMPv2c group name mapping is valid 3 USM Group Name 1 32 Type a string of character to specify the group name vacmGroupName Entry Storage 1 Volatile Choose your storage preference Selecting Volatile requests vacmSecurityToGroupStorageType 2 Non Volatile information to be dropped lost when you turn the power off Selecting Non Volatile requests information to be saved in NVRAM when you turn the power off 209570 C Configuring the switch 77 2 Inthe Group Membership Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit The new entry appears in the Group Membership Table Deleting an SNMPv3 group membership configuration To delete an SNMPv3 group membership configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Group Membership The Group Membership page opens Figure 23 2 Inthe Group Membership Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Do one of
219. menting QoS using QoS Advanced 2 Inthe Layer2 Filter Table in the layer 2 filter configuration row of your choice click the Delete icon A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the filter configuration e Click Cancel to return to the Layer2 Classification page without making changes Note A Layer 2 filter configuration cannot be modified The configuration must be deleted and then recreated Creating a layer 2 filter group configuration To create a Layer 2 filter group configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt Layer2 Classification The Layer2 Classification page opens Figure 160 This table displays all layer 2 filters you created using QoS wizard Qos Quick Config or QoS Advanced pages Table 92 describes the items on the Layer2 Filter Group Table section of the Layer2 Classification page Table 92 IP Filter Group Table section items Item Description Opens a modification page E x Deletes the row Filter Group Name Lists existing filter group configurations Opens a filter group creation page 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 285 2 Click Create Filter Group The Layer2 Group page opens Figure 162 Figure 162 Layer2 Group page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt Layer2 Group Filter Group Name
220. message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the IP filter group configuration e Click Cancel to return to the IP Classification page without making changes Note You cannot delete a filter group that is referenced by a policy You must first delete the policy Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 278 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Layer 2 filter and layer 2 filter group configurations You can configure layer 2 filters by defining IEEE 802 based parameters and selective layer 3 and layer 4 parameters Layer 2 filter groups are defined by specifying the layer 2 filter to be included in the given filter group Beginning with software version 2 0 you can match up to 32 VLANs in one layer 2 filter Creating a layer 2 filter configuration To create a layer2 filter configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt Layer2 Classification The Layer2 Classification page opens Figure 160 and Figure 161 Figure 160 Layer2 Classification page 1 of 2 _ Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt Layer2 Classification Layer2 Filter Table VLAN 802 1p Destination IP Destination IP Source IP Action nstancefvi an Nletnertype e021 DSCPIIP Protocol 4 port Min L4
221. ms 193 Table 73 Spanning Tree Port Configuration page items 198 Table 74 Spanning Tree Bridge Information page items 200 Table 7S Group page NEMS 56645 od 6 SSR Mao RHR ROW RM iw Da 204 Table 76 Utilization page EMS scarccaccaianenadioeeeeeee ee a wee wakes 205 Table 77 QoS Interface Queue Table section items 255 Table 78 Interface Group Table section items 000000 cee eee 256 Table 79 Interface Group Creation section page items 5 257 Table 80 Interface ID page items 2c eee 258 Table 81 Interface Group Assignment page items 0000e eee 259 Table 82 802 1p Priority Assignment Table section page items 262 Table 83 802 1p Priority Mapping page items 00 e eee eee eee 264 Table 84 DSCP Queue Assignment page items 0000 eee 265 Table 85 DSCP Mapping Table page items 00 0 c eee 266 Table 86 DSCP Mapping Modification page items 000 ce eee 267 Table 87 IP Filter Table and Filter Creation sections page items 270 Table 88 IP Filter Group section page items 00 0c eee eee 273 Table 89 IP Classification Group page items 00 cee ee 274 Table 90 IP Modification Group page items 00 cee 276 Table 91 Layer2 Filter Table and Layer2 Filter Creation section items 279 Table 92 IP Filter Group T
222. n up to 100Mb s in full duplex mode NOTE This field is disabled for all fiber optic ports Additionally you cannot disable this field for the ports on the BPS2000 1GT and BPS2000 2GT MDAs Use the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen next to set autonegotiation for all gigabit ports The default setting is Enabled Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 114 Configuring the switch Table 35 Port Management page items Item Range Description Speed Duplex 1 10Mbs Half Choose the Ethernet speed you want the port to support 2 10Mbs Full 3 100Mbs Half NOTE Fiber optic ports can only be set to 100 Mb s Half or 4 100Mbs Full 100 Mb s Full Use the High Speed Flow Control Configuration 5 1000Mbs Full screen next to set autonegotiation for all gigabit ports The default setting is 100Mbs Half when autonegotiation is disabled and 1000 Mb s full duplex for gigabit ports only Note Disabling ports that are trunk members automatically disables all ports within that trunk 2 Inthe upper left hand corner click on the unit number of the policy switch to manage The page is updated with the information for the selected switch In the port row of your choice select from the lists Click Submit Configuring high speed flow control You can set switch port parameters for gigabit Ethernet media dependent adapters MDAs Use this
223. n 2 0 180 Configuring application settings The new protocol based VLAN configuration appears in the VLAN Table on the VLAN Configuration page Figure 75 Caution BayStack 450 GBIC 450 1SR 450 1SX 450 1LR 450 LX MDA ports and BayStack 410 ports do not have the ability to assign incoming untagged frames to a protocol based VLAN To allow gigabit ports and BayStack 410 ports to participate in protocol based VLANs set the tagging field value to Tagged Trunk see Configuring broadcast domains on page 188 Table 65 defines the standard protocol based VLANs and PID types that are supported by the Business Policy Switch and BayStack 450 and 410 switches See Table 66 for a list of rereserved PIDS that are not available for user defined PIDs Table 65 Standard protocol based VLANs and PID types PID Name Encapsulation PID Value hex VLAN Type IP Ether2 Ethernet type 2 0800 0806 Standard IP on Ethernet Type 2 frames Ipx 802 3 Ethernet 802 2 FF FF Novell IPX on Ethernet 802 3 frames Ipx 802 2 Ethernet 802 0 E0 EO Novell IPX on Ethernet 802 2 frames Ipx Snap Ethernet Snap 8137 8138 Novell IPX on Ethernet SNAP frames lpx Ethernet II Ethernet type 2 8137 8138 Novell IPX on Ethernet Type 2 frames Apple Talk Ethernet type 2 or 809B 80F3 AppleTalk on Ethernet Type 2 and Ethernet Snap Ethernet Snap frames DEC Lat Ethernet type 2 6004 DEC LAT protocol DEC Other Eth
224. n 2 0 features in a mixed stack you must access a BPS 2000 unit Additionally only 64 VLANS are available in a mixed stack multiple STG support is not available in a mixed stack Viewing port statistics You can view detailed statistics about a selected switch port in a stacked or standalone configuration Both received and transmitted statistics are displayed so that you can compare throughput or other port parameters To view statistical data about a selected switch port 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Port The Port page opens Figure 57 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 144 Viewing system statistics Figure 57 Port page Statistics gt Port Port Statistics View By Unit fia Port 1 Port Statistics Table i Packets O Packets Multicasts 0 Multicasts Broadcasts 0 Broadcasts Total Octets O Total Octets Lost Packets D Lost Packets Packets 64 bytes D Packets 64 bytes 65 127 bytes 0 65 127 bytes 128 255 bytes 0 128 255 bytes 256 511 bytes 0 256 511 bytes 512 1023 bytes 0 512 1023 bytes 1024 1518 bytes 0 1024 1518 bytes FCS Errors 0 Collisions Undersized Packets 0 Single Collisions Oversized Packets 0 Multiple Collisions Filtered Packets 0 Excessive Collisions Flooded Packets 0 Deferred Packets Frame Errors 0 Late Collisions xx Zero All Ports Table 49 describes the items on the Port page Table 49 P
225. n a pie chart format 159 Trap Receiver Index field 90 traps 89 Triggered By field 134 troubleshooting 30 access 94 address filtering 96 autonegotiation 111 113 configuration file 126 COPS 313 defaults 50 gigabit ports 114 LEDs 119 MDAs 111 memory 43 mixed stack 32 port speed 111 QoS 208 211 254 256 261 263 264 265 268 294 298 software upgrading 33 116 123 spanning tree groups 32 192 197 stacking 30 59 128 VLANs 32 171 174 178 188 197 Trunk field 198 Trunk Mode field 204 Trunk Name field 204 Trunk Port Members field 204 Trunk Status field 204 trusted ports 256 259 267 U UDP RADIUS Port field 47 Unavailable Context field 72 Undersize field 137 141 Undersized Packets field 145 Unit field 54 56 unit number 33 56 60 unit numbers identifying 62 unit numbes numbering units 54 Unknown Context field 72 Unknown Ctype field 310 Unknown Engine IDs field 72 Unknown Opcode field 310 Unknown User Name field 72 unregistererd frames 188 unrestricted ports 256 259 267 Unsupported Client Type field 310 Unsupported Security Level field 72 Unsupported Version field 310 Untagged Access 190 untagged access 177 untagged frames 188 untrusted ports 256 259 267 Update 802 1p Priority field 290 Update DSCP field 289 209570 C Index 333 upgrades 29 ser Defined Port field 271 ser Defined Protocol field 174 179 user interface upgrading 317 User Name field 73 User Specificatio
226. n eake 39 Figure 4 System Information home page 0 0 cee eee eee 42 Figure 5 CPU Memory Utilization page 0 00 eee 43 Figure6 Console password setting page 0 cece eee eee 45 Figure RADIUS Page 26 cccsccacheteseenmh iran oieni cen eeigeteimas os 46 Figure 8 Web based management interface log on page 5 47 Figure9 System Information home page 0 e cece eee eee 48 Figure 10 Reset Pade cic sckce ded eebeeu tae ee dees ou eben thei sie baieds 49 Figure 11 Reset to Default page 0 cee ee 50 Figure 12 Stack Information page 0 00 c eee ee 54 Figure 13 Switch Information page 00 00 cece eee 55 Figure 14 Switch View paga 2cccoteeeaasnekhed eSeeueaesie ARE RoE OS 57 Figure 15 Stack Numbering Setting page 0000 c cee eee 60 Figure 16 Identify Unit Numbers page 00 cee eee 62 Figure 17 IP page fora standalone BPS 2000 0 cece eee ee 64 Figure 1S IP page rorastack i ccied cess dei ee de ees eeen ear deeendseeee 65 Foures System page conn eee chad ROR eRe ee ohne 67 Figure 20 SNMPV Page 2 ania dee dceeer aw sbacde Re cob eugene ee ae hadees ws 69 Figure 21 System Information page 0 00 e eee eee 71 Figure 22 User Specification page 0 cee eee eee 73 Figure 23 Group Membership page 0 cece eee eee eee 76 Figure 24 Group Access Rights page 00 e e
227. n event is detected 209570 C Configuring the switch 99 Table 29 Security Configuration page items continued Section Item Range Description Partition Time 1 to 65535 Sets the time to partition a port on intrusion Note Use this field only if the Partition Port on Intrusion Detected field is set to Enabled DA Filtering on 1 Enabled Enables you to isolate the intruding node discard the Intrusion 2 Disabled packets Detected Generate SNMP 1 Enabled Enables generation of an SNMP when an intrusion is Trap on Intrusion 2 Disabled detected Clear by Ports MAC Security Table Action Allows you to clear specific ports from participation in the MAC address security features Port List Will be blank Current Learning Mode Will be blank Learn by Ports MAC Security Table Action Allows you to identify ports that will learn incoming MAC addresses All source MAC addresses of any packets received on a specified port s are added to the MAC Security Table maximum of 448 MAC addresses allowed Port List Displays all the ports that will learn incoming MAC address to detect intrusions unallowed MAC addresses Current Learning Mode 1 Enabled 2 Disabled Enables learning 2 On the Security Configuration page type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit Configuring ports In this section y
228. n in a line graph format be Help Accesses the Help menu in a new Web browser Item Specific Accesses the item specific Help menu in a new Web browser Note Text within a table that is highlighted blue and underlined is a hyperlink to a related management page 209570 C 41 Chapter 2 Administering the switch The administrative options available to you are e Viewing general information next e Configuring system security on page 44 e Logging on to the management interface on page 47 e Resetting the BPS 2000 on page 49 e Resetting the BPS 2000 to system defaults on page 50 e Logging out of the management interface on page 51 For more information on the feature discussed in this chapter refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 This book also has instructions using the Console Interface CI menus to configure and manage the switch Refer to Reference for the Command Line Interface for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Management Software Version 2 0 for instructions on managing the BPS 2000 using the CLI and to Reference for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Management Software Version 2 0 for instructions on managing the switch using the DM Note To access the software version 2 0 features in a mixed stack you must access a BPS 2000 unit Additionally only 64 VLANS are available in a mixed stack multiple STG support is not avail
229. n menu choose Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 75 2 Inthe VLAN Table section in the MAC SA based VLAN row of your choice click the Modify icon The VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based modification page opens Figure 81 Figure 81 VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based modification page Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based VLAN MAC SA Based Setting 3 VLAN 3 MAC Addresses gl Learning Constraint IVL Port Membership 10111213 14 15 16 17 16 19 2 HOT r Poo Oooo L HOOT r Port 1 Smg 9 Unit 1 a Or im Unit 2 ml a Unit 3 a Or a r r Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 186 Configuring application settings Table 69 describes the items on the VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based modification page Table 69 VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based modification page items Item Description VLAN The number assigned to the VLAN when the VLAN was created VLAN Name Re name the VLAN E Opens the VLAN Configuration MAC Address page Figure 82 Learning Constraint The type of learning constraint selected when the VLAN was created The learning constraint choices are IVL and SVL Note If IVL is selected the VLAN uses an independent filtering database from all other VLANs IVL is avai
230. n page Table 32 Port Configuration page items Item Range Description Unit 1to 8 Displays the unit number of the ports shown in the table Port 1 to 28 Lists each port on the unit Trunk Blank 1 to 6 Displays the MultiLink Trunk that the port belongs to Security 1 Enabled Enables MAC address based security on that port 2 Disabled gt Note You must configure the port for MAC address based security before enabling the security Deleting ports You can delete ports from the security system in a variety of ways e Inthe Ports List View Port List page Figure 35 click on the checkmark of a selected port to delete that port from the specified port list Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 106 Configuring the switch e Inthe Ports List View Learn by Ports page Figure 36 click on the checkmark of a selected port to remove that port from those that learn MAC addresses e Inthe Port Configuration page Figure 39 click Disabled to remove that port from the MAC address based security system it will disable all MAC address based security on that port Filtering MAC destination addresses To drop all packets from a specified MAC destination address DA 1 From the main menu choose Application gt MAC Address Security gt DA MAC Filtering The DA MAC Filtering page opens Figure 40 Figure 40 DA MAC Filtering page Application gt
231. n page 72 U U U tilization page 205 V VID used for Tagged BPDU field 194 201 View Mask field 81 View Name field 81 View Subtree field 81 View Type field 81 VLAN Configuration MAC SA Based modification page 185 MAC SA Based setting page 183 Protocol Based modification page 182 Protocol Based setting page 178 VLAN Configuration page 173 VLAN field 279 287 VLAN Membership Add VLAN page 196 Remove VLAN page 196 VLAN Membership page 195 VLAN Name field 174 175 179 183 184 186 191 VLAN Tag field 279 281 VLAN Tag Required field 285 287 VLAN Type field 174 191 VLANs 30 171 about 171 autoPVID 172 174 broadcast domains configuring 188 configuring 173 deleting 188 finding MAC addresses 109 learned MAC addresses 108 MAC SA based about 172 assigning MAC addresses 186 configuring 183 187 deleting MAC addresses 187 mixed stack 171 number of 30 32 171 port information viewing 190 port based about 172 configuring 175 protocol based about 172 configuring 178 number of 172 number of protocols 178 reserved PID types 181 supported PID types 180 selecting a management VLAN 187 STG 32 tagging 279 281 285 W Web browser requirements 33 Web Page Access field 95 Web Password Setting page 44 Web Use List field 96 Web based management interface home page graphic 35 logging in 34 main menu icons 38 40 management page 39 navigating the menu 36 requirements to use 33 Web page layout 35 Web
232. n some cases you can use a list of ports or a port list In this case the same unit port number notation applies In addition you can use hyphens to specify ranges of ports For example 1 1 7 2 1 7 2 9 3 1 4 4 12 is a valid unit port number list It represents the following port order e Unit 1 ports 1 to7 e Unit 2 ports 1 to 7 and port 9 e Unit 3 ports 1 to 4 e Unit 4 port 12 Logging in to the Web based management interface Before you log in to the Web based management interface use the console interface to verify the VLAN port assignments and to ensure that your switch CPU and your computer are assigned to the same VLAN If the devices are not connected to the same VLAN you cannot access the Web based management system To log in to the Web based management interface follow these steps Start your Web browser 2 Inthe Web address field enter the IP address for your host switch or stack for example http 10 30 31 105 and press Enter The home page opens Figure 1 209570 C Using the Web based management interface 35 Figure 1 Web based management interface home page Administration gt System Information Business Policy Switch 2000 sysDescription Business Policy Switch 2000 HW PILOT FW V0 24 SW v1 0 0 70 sysUpTime 15 Hours 55 Minutes 14 Seconds sysName sysLocation sysContact Copyright 2000 Nortel Networks Inc Allzights reserved Network security does not yet exist
233. nagement interface 000 cee ee 51 Chapter 3 Viewing summary information 0000 c eee 53 Viewing Stack IMOMNAUON cccccte cee ieee eb see ee dawi a duriei arene riras 53 Viewing summary switch information 00 00 55 Viewing switch information in real time 2 0 0 eee 57 Changing stack numbering 0 0c 60 Leer UM NUMDES et ee SRE eRe Oh one bees A SS 62 Chapter 4 Configuring Ihe SWITCH ios csceca sie retvecsivscayeews cea wears eaees 63 Configuring BootP IP and gateway settings 0 0 cece eee eee 64 PASI G system BUS iis ceeds ie ek Greene Swe em Raion Ae Ch oe doe 67 POGULSHIIE ciouetesees Semis eeeteeare eed eoeneee e eaten es 68 Conga SNMP T 4p arer cttw eee iuc beh ey Ripe een dees S eee ee 69 Conkgutng SNMPYS hice bs econ dace dirk Ga thcietaG aoaboh oe eRe dil id Heavies alates ee hones 70 Viewing SNMPv3 system information 000 00 e eee eee 70 Configuring user access to SNMPV3 0 72 Creating an SNMPv83 system user configuration 00000 72 Deleting an SNMPv3 system user configuration 000 eee 75 Configuring an SNMPv3 system user group membership 75 Mapping an SNMPv8 system user to a group 1 ees 75 Deleting an SNMPv3 group membership configuration 77 Configuring SNMPv3 group access rights 0 0 0 cee eens 78 Creating an SNMPv3 group access rights configuration 78
234. ncluding framing characters Out Octets The number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters In Unicast The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Out Unicast The number of packets that higher layer protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent In Non Unicast The number of non unicast packets for example subnetwork broadcast or subnetwork multicast packets delivered to a higher protocol Out Non Unicast The number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a non unicast address For example a subnetwork broadcast or a subnetwork multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent In Discards The number of inbound packets which were selected to be discarded even though no errors were detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher layer protocol Packet discarding is not arbitrary One reason for discarding packets is to free buffer space Out Discards The number of outbound packets which were selected to be discarded even though no errors were detected to prevent their being transmitted Packet discarding is not arbitrary One reason for discarding packets is to free buffer space In Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Out Errors
235. nd when the switch is part of a stack the values that set in the stack row affect all ports in the entire stack except the gigabit media dependent adaptor MDA ports or fiber optic ports when installed For information on setting high speed flow control for MDAs see Configuring high speed flow control on page 114 Alias 27 alphanumeric characters Displays the name or alias you assigned the port To assign a name or to change the name enter up to 26 alphanumeric characters Trunk The trunk group that the switch port belongs to as specified in the Trunk Member fields on the MultiLink Trunk page For more information see Configuring MultiLink Trunk MLT members on page 202 Status 1 Enabled 2 Disabled Choose to enable or disable the port You can also use this field to control access to any switch port The default setting is Enabled Link The current link state of the corresponding port as follows e Up The port is connected and operational e Down The port is not connected or is not operational Link Trap Choose to control whether link up down traps are sent to the configured trap sink from the switch The default setting is On Autonegotiation 1 Enabled 2 Disabled Choose to enable or disable the autonegotiation feature Choosing to enable autonegotiation sets the corresponding port speed to match the best service provided by the connected statio
236. ne of the following e Click Yes to delete the interface group configuration e Click Cancel to return to the Interface Configuration page without making changes Configuring 802 1p priority queue assignment Note Nortel Networks recommends using the default 802 1p assignments to ensure end to end QoS connectivity You can assign 802 1p user priority values to a queue for each interface with a specific queue set This information is used for assigning egress traffic to outbound queues To configure 802 1p user priority 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Priority Q Assign The 802 1p Priority Queue Assignment page opens Figure 151 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 262 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Figure 151 802 1p Priority Queue Assignment page 802 1p Priority Assignment View By Queue Set 15 K Submit 802 1p Priority Assignment Table __802 1p Priority Queue 0 a 1 K 2 B 3 B 4 a 5 R 5 E 7 h K Submit d Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt 802 1p Priority Queue Assignme Table 82 describes the items on the 802 1p Priority Queue Assignment page Table 82 802 1p Priority Assignment Table section page items Section Item and MIB association Description 802 1p Priority Assignment View By Queue Set Choose the
237. nected to any secure ports When the switch software detects an SA security violation the response can be to send a trap turn on destination address DA filtering for all SAs disable the specific port or any combination of these three options 209570 C Configuring the switch 97 Beginning with software version 2 0 you can configure the BPS 2000 to drop all packets having a specified MAC destination address DA You can create a list of up to 10 MAC DAs you want to filter The packet with the specified MAC DA will be dropped regardless of the ingress port source address SA intrusion or VLAN membership Note Ensure that you do not enter the MAC address of the switch or stack you are working on This feature is available only with BPS2000 software version 2 0 and higher Also this feature is unavailable on the BayStack 450 or 410 switches In a Hybrid stack only the BPS 2000 will filter the specified MAC DAs Note After configuring the switch for MAC address based security you must enable the ports you want using the Port Configuration page Configuring MAC address based security To configure MAC address based security using the Web based management system 1 From the main menu choose Application gt MAC Address Security gt Security Configuration The Security Configuration page opens Figure 33 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 98 C
238. ness Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 part number 210676 F Documents important changes about the software and hardware that are not covered in other related publications e Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 part number 208700 C Describes how to use the BPS 2000 e Business Policy Switch 2000 Installation Instructions part number 209319 A Describes how to install the BPS 2000 e Reference for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Command Line Interface Software Version 2 0 part number 212160 B Describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLD to configure and manage the BPS 2000 e Reference for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Management Software Version 2 0 part number 209322 C 209570 C 27 Describes how to use the Java Device Manager to configure and manage the BPS 2000 e Installing Media Dependent Adapters MDA s part number 302403 H Describes how to install optional MDAs in your Business Policy Switch 2000 e Installing Gigabit Interface Converters and Small Form Factor Pluggable Interface Converters part number 312865 B Describes how to install optional GBICs and SFP GBICs into the optional MDA in your Business Policy Switch 2000 e Installing Optivity Policy Services part number 306972 E Rev 00 Describes how to install Optivity Policy Services e Managing Policy Information in Optivity Policy Services part number 306969 F Rev 00 Describes how to configure
239. ng QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 227 Figure 116 Policy label page QoS Wizard Step 1 Policy Label Type in a label name for the flow to be prioritized Name 2 Enter the name of the flow and click Next A page opens Figure 117 that asks if you want to set an IP filter or a layer 2 filter Figure 117 Policy definition page QoS Wizard Step 2 Policy Definition Select the type of filter for test E IP Filter O Layer Filter a If you want an IP filter click IP Filter and click Next A page opens that requests the customer to choose the IP filter criteria for the specified flow Figure 118 and Figure 119 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 228 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 118 IP classification rules page 1 of 2 QoS Wizard Step 2 Policy Definition Select the classification rules for test E Ignore O Addresses foooo po IP Address ooo T foooo po Address Mask Bits BSer Jignore x IP Protocol Ignore X Figure 119 IP classification rules page 2 of 2 E Ignore Dst L4 Port O Preconfigured Port FTP x User Defined Port E Ignore Src L4 Port Preconfigured Port FTP x O User Defined Port l anD ax 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 229 Choose the IP filter parameters you want the flow to have Refer to Chapter 9 for a d
240. ng Tree Bridge Information page items Section Item Range Description STP Group Group Choose the STP Group you want to work with Spanning Tree Bridge 0 65535 Type the priority value of the bridge ID in hexadecimal notation which is Bridge Priority the most significant byte of the bridge ID The Spanning Tree Algorithm Information uses this parameter to determine the root bridge or designated bridge For example the bridge with the lowest bridge ID becomes the root bridge with Bridge Priority values compared first followed by the hardware addresses The default setting is 8000 Designated XXXXXXX The bridge ID of the root bridge as determined by the Spanning Tree Root XXXXXXX Algorithm Root Port 1 28 The port number of the port which offers the lowest cost past from this bridge to the root bridge Root Path Integer The cost of the path to the root as seen from this bridge Cost Hello Time 1 10 The actual Hello Interval the amount of time between transmissions of seconds configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs that the root bridge is currently using Note Bridges participating in the spanning tree network use the root bridge s Hello Interval parameter value See also Bridge Hello Time Maximum 6 40 The Maximum Age Time parameter value that the root bridge is currently Age Time seconds using This value specifies the maximum age that a Hello message can attain before it is
241. ng page QoS Wizard Welcome to the Business Policy Switch 2000 QoS Wizard QoS configuration using the wizard will reset all QoS parameters to default 2 To continue the configuration process click Next A packet prioritization selection page opens Figure 94 Figure 94 Packet prioritization selection page QoS Wizard This Wizard automates the most common QoS settings for the Business Policy Switch Do you want to prioritize certain packets O No Give all packets equal treatment Standard E Yes Certain packets are more important than others 3 Select No Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 210 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 4 Click Next A Standard prioritization page opens Figure 95 Note If you want to prioritize traffic skip this step and continue the steps outlined in Prioritizing traffic with the QoS Wizard Figure 95 Standard prioritization page QoS Wizard Your Business Policy Switch will be configured for the following service class Standard ax anD 5 To complete the configuration process click Finish The session confirmation page appears Figure 96 Figure 96 Session confirmation page QoS Wizard Your Business Policy Switch has been configured for QoS Prioritizing traffic with the QoS Wizard You can specify that different types of traffic in your network configuration be marked wi
242. nit Numbers page 62 IGMP Multicast Group Membership page 170 IGMP page 167 IGMP VLAN Configuration page 168 IGMP configuring 167 In Discards field 151 158 In Errors field 151 309 In Frames field 158 In Non Unicast field 151 In Octets field 151 In Packets field 309 In Unicast field 151 In Unknown Protos field 151 In Band Stack IP Address field 66 In Band Subnet Mask field 66 In Band Switch IP Address field 66 Initialize field 93 In Profile Action field 293 300 301 In Profile Octets field 302 Interface chart field 151 209570 C Index 323 Interface Chart page 152 interface class trusted untrusted and unrestricted 256 259 267 Interface Class field 256 259 Interface Configuration page 254 Interface Direction field 300 Interface Group Assignment page 258 259 Interface Group Creation 254 Interface Group Table 254 Interface ID page 257 Interface ID Table 257 Interface page 150 Interface Queue Table 254 interface statistics viewing 150 151 viewing in a bar graph format 152 viewing in a pie chart format 152 Internal MAC Receive Errors field 154 Internal MAC Transmit Errors field 154 Interval field 132 In Use field 66 IP address 64 per unit 30 64 IP Address field 54 56 90 313 IP Classification Group page 273 IP Classification page 268 IP Filter Creation 268 IP Filter Group Table 268 IP Filter Table 268 IP gateway address 64 IP Group Modification page 275 IP manager list
243. not have to enter a value if you want to use the default priority of 128 4 Enter the spanning tree path cost value for the specified port You do not have to enter a value if you want to use the default path cost of 10 5 Click Submit 209570 C Configuring application settings 199 Changing spanning tree bridge switch settings You can view and configure existing Spanning Tree switch settings To configure Spanning Tree switch settings 1 From the main menu choose Application gt Spanning Tree gt Bridge Information The Spanning Tree Bridge Information page opens Figure 90 Figure 90 Spanning Tree Bridge Information page Application gt Spanning Tree gt Bridge Information STP Group Group Group 1 7 ED Spanning Tree Bridge Information Bridge Priority 08000 0 OxFFFF Designated Root 80 00 00 00 81 c1 36 58 Root Port Port 1 Root Path Cost 110 Hello Time 2 seconds Maximum Age Time 20 seconds Forward Delay 15 seconds Bridge Hello Time ff _ seconds a Bridge Maximum Age Time 20 seconds 40 Bridge Forward Delay hs sogeconds 30 Tagged BPDU on Tagged Port No z VID used for Tagged BPDU or a a Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 200 Configuring application settings Table 74 describes the items on the Spanning Tree Bridge Information page Table 74 Spanni
244. nstances The maximum number of allowed class entries Policy Device Identification Table Description The system description Maximum Message Size The maximum target message size supported by the device 2 Inthe QoS Configuration section type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit 209570 C 307 Chapter 10 Implementing Common Open Policy Services COPS Enabling COPS in your networks allows the policy server to e Gather all relevant information e Make a decision based on your as network administrator set policies and network resources e Communicate that decision in the form of proper service to the appropriate group or client bandwidth ACLs QoS A solid COPS strategy is closely tied to Internet Protocol IP address management and network management This chapter discusses the COPS options available to you in the Web based management interface The COPS options are e Viewing COPS statistics and capabilities next e Creating COPS client configurations page 312 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 308 Implementing Common Open Policy Services COPS Viewing COPS statistics and capabilities You can view a list of the capabilities of the COPS client to connect to a COPS server and view a table displaying the current status of all COPS server connections To view COPS
245. nting QoS using QoS Advanced Table 91 Layer2 Filter Table and Layer2 Filter Creation section items continued Section Item Range Description EtherType Ignore Netmap TCP Netmap XNS XTP LOOP Vines Vines IP Banyan Vines Echo Vines Banyan Echo ARP RARP IP IPv6 3Com NBP 3Com NBP Ack 3Com NBP ConnReq 3Com NBP ConnRsp 3Com NBP ConnComplt 3Com NBP CloseReq 3Com NBP CloseRsp 3Com NBP Datagram 3Com NBP Broadcast 3Com NBP NBP NameClaim 3Com NBP DelName LAP Atalk ARP Atalk IBM Net Mon IBMRT XNS Compatibility XNS IPX Netware SNMP User Defined Displays the EtherType to match 802 1p Priority Ignore 0 7 Displays the 802 1p priority level DSCP Ignore Integer 0 63 Displays the value that the DSCP in the packet must have and match this filter 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 281 Table 91 Layer2 Filter Table and Layer2 Filter Creation section items continued Section Item Range Description IP Protocol Ignore Displays the IP protocol to match against the packet s IP TCP protocol field UDP ICMP IGMP RSVP Destination IP L4 Port Ignore Integer Displays the least value that the packet s layer 4 Min 0 65535 destination port number can have and match this filter Destination IP L4 Port Ignore Integer Displays the maximum value that the packet s layer 4 Max 0 65535 destination port number can
246. nze E OxF 0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard B 0x10 3 Not Loss Sensitive Silver E 0x11 0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard B 0x12 3 Loss Sensitive Silver Fl 0x13 0 Not Loss Sensitive Standard Table 85 describes the items on the DSCP Mapping Table page Table 85 DSCP Mapping Table page items Item Format A Opens a modification page DSCP The attribute used internally to determine the appropriate Layer 2 cost of service CoS mappings 802 1p Priority The IEEE802 CoS value used when mapping the DSCP value specified by the qos802DscpMappingDscp attribute to an IEEE 802 CoS Drop Precedence The drop value precedence used for traffic with the associated 802 1D user priority value with the identified queue Note Generally low packet drop precedence receives preferential treatment Service Class The current service class The options are Standard Bronze Silver Gold Platinum Premium and Network Note This field corresponds to the adjacent user priority levels 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 267 2 Inthe row of your choice click the Modification icon The DSCP Mapping Modification page opens Figure 155 Figure 155 DSCP Mapping Modification page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt DSCP Mapping DSCP Mapping Modification DSCP 0x1 802 1p Priority Oy Drop Precedence Not Loss Sensitive Service Class Standard z Em ar
247. o the VLAN Configuration page without making changes The modified VLAN configuration is displayed in the VLAN Table Figure 75 Selecting a management VLAN You can select any VLAN to perform as the management VLAN VLAN 1 is the default management VLAN for the switch To set this field the VLAN State field value must be active To select a VLAN as the management VLAN 1 From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 75 2 Inthe VLAN Setting section choose the VLAN to assign as your management VLAN 3 Click Submit Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 188 Configuring application settings Deleting a VLAN configuration To delete a VLAN configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 75 2 Inthe VLAN Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the VLAN configuration e Click Cancel to return to the VLAN Configuration page without making changes Note You cannot delete VLAN 1 gt Configuring broadcast domains You can configure specified VLAN switch ports with the appropriate PVID VLAN association that enables the creation of broadcast domains If you have enabled automatic PVI
248. ol based VLAN Ethernet 802 2 or Ethernet Snap For a list of rereserved PIDs that are unavailable for user defined PIDs see Table 66 on page 181 Modifying a protocol based VLAN To modify an existing protocol based VLAN 1 From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration page opens Figure 75 2 Inthe VLAN Table section in the protocol based VLAN row of your choice click the Modify icon The VLAN Configuration Protocol Based modification page opens Figure 79 Figure 79 VLAN Configuration Protocol Based modification page Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Configuration Protocol Based VLAN Protocol Based Setting VLAN 2 VLAN Name VLAN 2 Protocol IP User Defined Protocol 0x0 Learning Constraint IVL Port Membership 2m 3m A Sl ga 2 gm ge HAG Ti 12 a0 i 151 HGH z a as MoOooOoOoOoOon Monon OT r m OT HOOT m OT B HOOT 209570 C Configuring application settings 183 Table 67 describes the items on the VLAN Configuration Protocol Based modification page Table 67 VLAN Configuration Protocol Based modification page items Item Description VLAN The number assigned to the VLAN when the VLAN was created VLAN Name Re name the VLAN Learning Constraint The type of learning constraint selected when the VLAN was created The learning constra
249. ombinations adding 259 deleting 260 modifying 257 removing 259 service order 255 shaper groups 301 shaping 29 295 statistics 298 301 304 306 tagging 279 281 285 trusted ports 256 267 unrestricted ports 256 267 untrusted ports 256 267 VLAN tagging 278 Wizard prioritizing traffic 212 standard traffic 208 QoS Policy Agent Reset to Defaults field 305 QoS Policy Agent Retry Timer field 305 QoS Policy Agent State 305 QoS policy agent configuring 304 QoS Policy Server Control field 305 QoS Quick Config 30 236 aggregate shaping 248 filter groups 245 interface class 237 Interface Group page 237 IP filters 241 Layer 2 filters 243 meters 247 multiple VLANs 243 policies 250 Policy page 239 port membership 237 role combinations 237 shaper groups 248 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 328 Index shapers 248 QoS Wizard 29 211 meters 211 prioritizing user defined traffic flows 226 prioritizing VLANs 213 proitizing IP applications 220 QoS Policies to Configure window 211 shapers 211 Query Time field 168 169 Queue field 262 265 Queue Set field 262 265 Queue Sets field 258 Queue Size field 296 297 Quiet Period field 93 R RADIUS page 46 RADIUS Shared Secret field 47 RADIUS based network security 46 91 Rate field 296 rate limiting about 165 configuring 165 Rate Limiting page 165 Read View field 79 Read Only Community String field 70 Read Only Stack Password f
250. ommitted rate you want for this Meter Enter the expected burst rate you want for this Meter The system calculates a series of 7 or fewer possible durations for the committed and expected burst rates you set Choose the Duration you want Click Next A page opens Figure 102 that allows you to select a Service Class separately for both the In Profile and Out of Profile Action for the specified VLAN Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 216 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 102 Service Class selection for VLAN page QoS Wizard Step 3 Service Select the service class or action for VLAN 1 In Profile E Service Class REMER C Drop Out of Profile E Service Class Standard E Drop 9 Click either Service Class or Drop If you click Service Class choose the Service Class you want from the pull down menu If you click Drop the traffic in the specified VLAN is dropped 10 Click Next A page opens Figure 103 that allows you to set shaping criteria for the specified VLAN Note You must be using either the BPS2000 1GT BPS2000 2GT or BPS2000 2GE MDA with the Business Policy Switch in order to implement the QoS shaping features 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 217 Figure 103 Shaper for VLAN page QoS Wizard Step 4 Shape Would you like to shape the traffic for
251. on System Description Business Policy Switch 2000 HW A FW 1 1 0 1 SWv1 2 0 Software Version v1 2 0 03 MAC Address 00 E0 7B CC 68 1F IP Address 10 10 40 29 Manufacturing Date Code 20000624 Serial SSGDFLO05Q Operational State Normal Stack Inventory Ta Software Operational 2 Business Policy Switch 24 10 100BaseTX plus 1 MDA slot and 1 Cascade Slot None v1 2 0 03 Normal 4 Business Policy Switch 24 10 100BaseTX plus 1 MDA slot and 1 Cascade Slot None 1 2 0 03 Normal Table 9 describes the fields on the Stack Information and Stack Inventory sections of the Stack Information page Table 9 Stack Information page fields Section Fields Description Stack Information System Description The name created in the configuration process to identify the stack Software Version The version of the running software MAC Address The MAC address of the stack IP Address The IP address of the stack Manufacturing Date Code The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format YYYYMMDD Serial Number The serial number of the base unit Operational State The current operational state of the device The operational states are Other Not Available Removed Disabled Normal Reset in Progress Testing Warning Non Fatal Errors Fatal Error and Not Configured Stack Inventory Unit The unit number assigned to the device by the network manager For more information on stack numbering see page 6
252. on gt Software Download In the BPS 2000 Diagnostics Filename field enter the name of the BPS 2000 diags file In the TFTP Server IP Address enter the IP address of your TFIP load host In the Start TFTP Load of New Image field choose BPS 2000 Diagnostics Click Submit The system resets which may take a few minutes The system opens to the System Information page Figure 4 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Software Download Refer to the documentation for the BayStack 450 and BayStack 410 switches to upgrade the software on those switches Upgrading software when ISVN is 1 To upgrade a Hybrid stack to BPS 2000 software version 2 0 when the ISVN numbers of the units are 1 Choose Configuration gt Software Download from the main menu The Software Download screen appears Figure 46 In the BPS 2000 Image Filename field enter the name of the BPS 2000 image file In the 450 Image Filename field enter the name of the BayStack 450 410 image file In the TFTP Server IP Address enter the IP address of your TFIP load host 209570 C Configuring the switch 123 5 Inthe Start TFTP Load of New Image field choose Both BPS 2000 and 450 Image Note If you do not download both the BPS 2000 and BayStack 410 450 images simultaneously the stack may not form 6 Click Submit The system resets which may take a few minutes The system opens to the System Information page Figure 4 7 From the m
253. on area create the meter Table 96 describes the fields in the Meter Creation area which you use to set new meters Table 96 Meter Creation fields Item Range Description Name 1 to 16 alphanumeric Enter the name for the meter you are creating characters with no spaces Committed Rate 13 1 700 000 Kbps Enter the Committed Rate in Kbps here Committed Burst Size 2 047 to 131 071 bytes Maximum Burst Rate Enter the Maximum Burst Rate in bytes Up to 7 durations Duration From the pull down menu choose 1 of up to 7 durations for the period that the Maximum Burst Rate is allowed 3 Click Submit 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 293 4 If you have not already specified the interface assignments choose Applications gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Interface Configuration page to connect the desired ports to the desired filters Note Meter configurations are not modifiable They must be deleted gt and the information re entered Viewing meters To view a meter From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Meters The QoS Advanced Meters page opens Figure 165 View created meters in the Meter Table Table 97 describes the fields in the Meter Table area Table 97 Meter Table fields Item Range Description Action x Deletes the meter Name Displays the name of the meter Instance Displays the unique
254. on page items Item and MIB association Range Description xI Deletes the row Notify Name 1 32 Type a character string to identify the entry snmpNotifyRowStatus Notify Tag 1 32 Type a value which to use to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable snmpNotifyTag Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable which contains a tag value which is equal to the value of an instance of this object is selected If this object carries a zero length no entries are selected Notify Type 1 Trap Choose the type of notification to generate snmpNotifyType 2 Inform Entry Storage 1 Volatile Choose your storage preference Selecting Volatile requests information snmpNotifyStorageType 2 Non Volatile to be dropped lost when you turn the power off Selecting Non Volatile requests information to be saved in NVRAM when you turn the power off Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 84 Configuring the switch 2 Inthe Notification Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit The new entry appears in the Notification Table Figure 26 Note This Notification Table section of the Notification page contains hyperlinks to the Target Parameter page For more information see Configuring an SNMPv3 management target parameter on page 87 Deleting an SNMPv3 system notification configuration To delete an S
255. on the unit number of the switch to monitor Type information in the text boxes or select from a list Click Submit Viewing VLAN port information 1 You can view VLAN information about a selected switch port To view VLAN port information From the main menu choose Application gt VLAN gt Port Information The Port Information page opens Figure 84 209570 C Configuring application settings 191 Figure 84 Port Information page Application gt VLAN gt Port Information VLAN Port Information View By Unit fix Port PYID 1 Port Name Unit 1 Port 1 VLAN Port Information Table 1 VLAN 1 Port Table 71 describes the items on the Port Information page Table 71 Port Information page items Section Item Range Description VLAN Port Unit 1 8 Choose the number of the switch to view Information View By Port 1 28 Choose the number of the switch s port to view PVID The PVID assigned when the VLAN port was created Port Name The port name assigned when the VLAN port was created VLAN Port VLAN The number assigned to the VLAN when it was created Information Table VLAN Name The name assigned to the VLAN when it was created VLAN Type The VLAN type assigned to the VLAN when it was created 2 Inthe VLAN Port Information View By section enter the unit and port number of the VLAN you want to view Click Submit The results of
256. onfig filters Using Step 1 Rule you either configure a new filter group or use an existing group To configure a new IP filter group 1 Click Configure IP Filters The QoS Quick Config Policy page for configuring IP filters opens Figure 136 and Figure 137 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 242 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 136 QoS Quick Config page for configuring IP filters page 1 of 2 QoS Quick Config gt Policy Step 1 Rule E Configure IP Filters Configure L2 Filters Using Existing Filter Gr Order Destination Address Mask Source Address Mask DSCP IP Protocol E Ignore E Ignore C Network Address E Network Address Joooo o 0 0 0 Address Address Joooo foo o0 Ignore z ignore z Subnet Mask Subnet Mask O Host Address E Host Address Joo o0 foooo IP Address IP Address Filter Group Name f p2 Figure 137 QoS Quick Config page for configuring IP filters page 2 of 2 Group Destination Layer4 Port Source Layer4 Port Ignore Ignore Preconfigured Port Preconfigured Port MFP gt TFIP E C User Defined Port User Defined Port 0 0 65535 0 0 65535 2 Enter the number you want for the order of the IP filter you are configuring 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 243 3 Complete the Destination Address Mask area by either
257. onfiguration 209570 C Using the Web based management interface 33 Also a mixed or Hybrid stack does not support multiple Spanning Tree Groups STG You have a single instance of STG when working with a mixed stack Note Refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 for complete information on upgrading software for a Pure BPS2000 stack and for a Hybrid stack Requirements To use the Web based management interface you need the following items e A recent computer connected to any of the network ports e One of the following Web browsers installed on the computer check the memory requirements Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4 0 or later Windows 95 98 NT Netscape Navigator version 4 51 or later Windows 95 98 NT amp Unix e The IP address of the BPS 2000 e A web browser optimized for 800 by 600 pixel screen size Note The Web based management interface Web pages may load at different speeds depending on the Web browser you use Port numbering syntax When you enter a port number in a stack configuration you must specify a unit port number A unit port number consists of the unit number a slash and the port number For example 1 1 is the unit number 1 and port number 1 and 3 11 is unit number 3 and port number 11 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 34 Using the Web based management interface I
258. onfiguring the switch Figure 33 Security Configuration page Application gt MAC Address Security gt Security Configuration MAC Address Security Partition Time MAC Address Security Setting Disabled MAC Address Security SNMP Locked Disabled gt Partition Port on Intrusion Detected Disabled 1 65535 DA Filtering on Intrusion Detected Disabled Generate SNMP Trap on Intrusion Disabled MAC Security Table Clear by Ports E Learn by Ports E Current Learning Mode Disabled Table 29 describes the items on the Security Configuration page Table 29 Security Configuration page items SNMP Locked Section Item Range Description MAC Address MAC Address 1 Enabled Enables the MAC address security features Security Setting Security 2 Disabled MAC Address 1 Enabled Enables locking SNMP so that you cannot use SNMP to Security 2 Disabled modify the MAC address security features Partition Port on Intrusion Detected 1 Forever 2 Enabled 3 Disabled Configures how the switch reacts to an intrusion event e Forever The port is disabled and remains disabled partitioned until reset The port does not reset after the Partition Time elapses e Enabled The port is disabled then automatically reset to enabled after the time specified in the Partition Time field elapses e Disabled The port remains enabled even if an intrusio
259. or Type information in the text boxes or select from a list Click Submit Note To avoid broadcast storms when the volume of a particular packet type is extreme placing severe strain on the network set the forwarding rate of the packet type to not exceed a lower percentage of the total available bandwidth 209570 C Configuring application settings 167 Configuring IGMP You can configure a VLAN s switch ports to optimize IP multicast packets in a bridged Ethernet environment and you can view a table of existing IGMP configurations For more information about IGMP configuration see Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 208700 C To configure IGMP 1 From the main menu choose Application gt IGMP gt IGMP Configuration The IGMP Configuration page opens Figure 72 Figure 72 IGMP Configuration page Application gt IGMP gt IGMP Configuration IGMP Table Action VLAN Snooping Proxy Robust Value Query Time seconds El 1 Enabled Enabled 2 125 Table 58 describes the items on the IGMP Configuration page Table 58 IGMP Configuration page items Item Description el Displays a modification page for the selected VLAN VLAN The number assigned to the VLAN when the VLAN was created For more information on creating VLANs see Creating and managing virtual LANs VLANs on page 171 Snooping The operational status for the IGMP snoopin
260. or the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 136 Configuring remote network monitoring RMON Viewing RMON Ethernet statistics You can gather and graph RMON Ethernet statistics in a variety of formats To gather and graph RMON Ethernet statistics 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt RMON Ethernet The RMON Ethernet page opens Figure 53 Figure 53 RMON Ethernet page Statistics gt RMON Ethernet RMON Ethernet Statistics Table unit JJ 2 2 CRC art Broadcast Align Oversize Fragments Collisions Jabbers Errors o o Ch la 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 43 Table 47 describes the items on the RMON Ethernet page Table 47 RMON Ethernet page items Item Description Displays statistics as a bar graph 7 Displays statistics as a pie chart Port The port number that corresponds to the selected switch Drop Events The number of events in which packets were dropped by the interface due to a lack of resources Octets The number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence FCS octets 209570 C Configuring remote network monitoring RMON 137 Table 47 RMON Ethernet page items continued Item Description Packets The number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast addr
261. ormat Unit 1 Port 20 Received W Packets 33 4 8692364 M multicasts 19 1 4989357 W Broadcasts 13 9 3622106 DLost Packets 0 0 0 FCS Errors 0 0 0 ClUndersized Packets 0 0 0 E Oversized Packets 0 0 0 DiFittered Packets 33 4 8692364 WiFiooded Packets 0 0 0 GiFrame Errors 0 0 0 Unit 1 Port 20 Received W Packets 64 bytes 82 8 7201833 Packets 65 127 bytes 12 9 1128099 Mipackets 128 255 bytes 3 1 274793 Packets 256 511 bytes 0 7 64678 Packets 512 1023 bytes 0 2 22955 Packets 1024 1518 bytes 0 0 6 Unit 1 Port 20 Transmitted BiPackets 51 8 530184 Dmutticasts 47 2 482924 W Broadcasts 0 0 0 Lost Packets 0 0 0 Wicollisions 0 3 3936 Single Collisions 0 2 2513 Hi multiple Collisions 0 0 678 excessive Collisions 0 0 0 Wi Deferred Packets 0 1 2016 Bate Collisions 0 0 0 Unit 1 Port 20 Transmitted Hipackets 64 bytes 92 3 489763 Packets 65 127 bytes 2 7 14574 W Packets 129 255 bytes 0 9 4805 Packets 256 511 bytes 0 6 3657 Packets 512 1023 bytes 3 2 17364 Packets 1024 1518 bytes 0 0 21 Table 49 describes the items on the Port Chart page 2 Click Back to return to the Port page Viewing port statistics in a bar graph format You can view port statistics in a bar graph format To view the displayed statistical information in a bar graph format
262. ort page items Section Item Description Port Statistics Unit Choose the number of the switch to monitor View By Port Choose the switch s port number to monitor Displays statistics in a bar graph format Displays statistics in a pie chart format 209570 C Viewing system statistics 145 Table 49 Port page items continued Section Item Description Port Statistics Table Packets The number of packets received transmitted on this port including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets Multicast The number of good multicast packets received transmitted on this port excluding broadcast packets Broadcasts The number of good broadcast packets received transmitted on this port Total Octets The number of octets of data received transmitted on this port including data in bad packets and FCS octets and framing bits Lost Packets The number of packets discarded on this port when the capacity of the port transmit buffer was exceeded Packets 64 bytes The number of packets this size received transmitted successfully on this port Packets 65 127 bytes The number of packets this size received transmitted successfully on this port Packets 128 255 bytes The number of packets this size received transmitted successfully on this port Packets 256 511 bytes The number of packets this size received transmitted successfully on
263. ortMax Permit 1 True If the frame matches the filter when this is set to 2 False true the matching process stops IP Filter Creation Ignore Click if you want the filter to ignore the packet s Destination destination IP address Address Network Address XXX XXX XXX Click if you want the filter to match the packet s XXX destination network address Enter the IP address to match against the packet s destination IP address Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX Enter the mask for the matching of the destination XXX IP address A zero bit in the mask means that the corresponding bit in the address always matches One 1 bits must be left justified 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 271 Table 87 P Filter Table and Filter Creation sections page items continued Item and Section MIB association Range Description Host Address XXX XXX XXX Click if you want the filter to match the packet s XXX destination host IP address Enter the IP address to match against the packet s destination IP address IP Filter Creation Ignore Click if you want the filter to ignore the packet s Source Address source IP address Network Address XXX XXX XXX Click if you want the filter to match the packet s XXX source network address Enter the IP address to match against the packet s source IP address Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX Enter the mask for the matching of the source IP XXX address One 1 bits must
264. ose the group number you want to create Bridge Priority Enter the priority you want Hello Time Enter the hello time you want for this STG in seconds range is 1 to 10 Max Age time Enter the maximum age time you want for this STG in seconds range is 6 to 40 sec I Forward Delay Time sec Enter the forward delay time you want for this STG in seconds range is 4 to 30 Tagged BPDU on Tagged Port Set the frames as tagged Yes or untagged No on tagged ports VID used for Tagged BPDU Enter the VLAN ID you want to send the tagged BPDUs for the specified STG Note The default VIDs are 4001 through 4008 for STG 1 through 8 respectively 209570 C Configuring application settings 195 2 Complete the fields as shown 3 Click Submit Associating STG with VLAN membership To add a VLAN to an STG 1 From the main menu choose Application gt Spanning Tree gt VLAN Membership The Spanning Tree VLAN Membership page opens Figure 86 Figure 86 Spanning Tree VLAN Membership page Application gt Spanning Tree gt VLAN Membership STP Group VLAN Membership STP Add Remove Current VLAN Group VLAN VLAN Membership EY Je The table displays the spanning tree group and the current VLAN membership You can add or remove one or more VLANs to an STG Note Beginning with software version 2 0 you can move a VLAN from one STG to anot
265. otification generation to specify the communication parameters used for exchanges with notification recipients You can view a table of existing SNMPv3 target parameter configurations create SNMPv3 target parameters that associate notifications with particular recipients and delete existing SNMPv3 target parameter configurations Creating an SNMPv3 target parameter configuration To create an SNMPV3 target parameter configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Target Parameter The Target Parameter page opens Figure 28 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 88 Configuring the switch Figure 28 Target Parameter page Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Target Parameter Target Parameter Table Parameter Tag Msg Processing Model Security Model Security LeveljEntry Storage Target Parameter Creation Parameter Tag Msg Processing Model SNMPv1 bd Security Name noAuthNoPriv Volatile fad Security Level Entry Storage m Table 25 describes the items on the Target Parameter page Table 25 Target Parameter page items snmpTargetParamsRowStatus Item Range Description x Deletes the row Parameter Tag 1 32 Type a unique character string to identify the parameter tag Msg Processing Model snmpTargetParamsMPModel 0 SNMPv1 1 SNMPv2c 2 SNMPv2 3 SNMPv3 USM Choose t
266. ou create a list of ports and you can add ports to or delete ports from each list To activate an entry or add or delete ports to a list 1 From the main menu choose Application gt MAC Address Security gt Port Lists The Port Lists page opens Figure 34 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 100 Configuring the switch Figure 34 Port Lists page Application gt MAC Address Security gt Port Lists Application gt MAC Address Security gt Port Lists Te Action f PortList S1 El s2 El s3 El S4 E s5 El 86 El s7 El 8 El s9 El s10 El 511 E 512 El s13 El 514 El 515 El S16 El s17 El R E Table 30 describes the items on the Ports Lists page Table 30 Ports Lists page items Item Range Description Entry These are the lists of ports Action El Allows you to add or delete ports to the lists Port List Displays which ports are associated with each list 2 To add or delete ports to a list click the icon in the Action column in the list row you want The Port List View Port List page opens Figure 35 209570 C Configuring the switch 101 Figure 35 Port List View Port List page Application gt MAC Address Security Port List View Application gt MAC Address Security gt Port List Entry S1 Pot NONE1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25262728 Unit 1 J Be eee
267. ous patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress To reset the BPS 2000 to system defaults 1 From the main menu choose Administration gt Reset to Default The Reset to Default page opens Figure 11 Note When you are working on a single nonstacked switch the system returns the message Are you sure your want to reset the switch When you press OK the switch resets Figure 11 Reset to Default page Administration gt Reset To Default Reset To Default Selection Reset To Default Entire Stack 7 K Submit i 209570 C Administering the switch 51 2 From the list choose to reset the switch only to system defaults or the entire stack 3 Click Submit Note If you have not configured system password security a reset returns you to the home page as shown in Figure on page 35 If you have configured system password security a reset returns you to a log on page as shown in Figure 8 on page 47 Logging out of the management interface To log out of the Web based management interface 1 From the main menu choose Administration gt Logout A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 2 Do one of the following e Click OK to logout of the Web based management interface e Click Cancel to return to the Web based management interface home page Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 52 Administering
268. p section of the IP Classification page Table 88 IP Filter Group section page items Item Description Opens a modification page E x Deletes the row Filter Group Name A list of existing filter group configurations Opens a filter group creation page 2 Click Create Filter Group The IP Classification Group page opens Figure 159 This table displays all IP filters you created using QoS wizard Qos Quick Config or QoS Advanced pages Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 274 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced Figure 159 IP Classification Group page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt IP Classification Group Filter Group Name z mi C C mi r m E mi C m C IP Filter Group Table enr Destination Destination Source Source DSCP Protocol Destination Source P Address Address Mask Address Address Mask L4 Port L4 Port o000 0 0 0 0 0000 J 0 0 0 0 a J 0 0 0 0 z J 0 000 3833 J o000 4 4 4 4 o000 56555 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 2 22 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 4444 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255
269. page i 2 0c Scewd cee bh deem ewes dda een ken 105 DA MAC Filtering page 0 c ccseeeee sc ceedu Bue eedee redor abeee 106 MAC Address Table page 0 anaua eee 108 Find MAC Address Table page 0 0 e eee e eens 110 Port Management page 00 eee 112 High Speed Flow Control page 5 20 0e cena ewes eda e enue 115 Software Download page for a Pure BPS 2000 stack 116 Software Download page for a Hybrid stack 000000s 117 Configuration File Download Upload page 0 0000 124 Console Communication Port page 20 2c eee ee ees 127 Stack Operational Mode page 0c cece eee eee 128 RMON Threshold Page ecaiaigvceruchbeedesesusuubus eee k poia 130 RMON Event Log page s 0 0c lt b4ees ieee saede dee dew ranei 133 System Log page crrr ods ish repann a A A A 134 RMON Ethernet page 0 0 eects 136 RMON Ethernet Chart in a bar graph format 138 RMON Ethernet Chart in a pie chart format 00005 139 AMON History page as cc csi decade ai Cheese ee ienei ninkin dimri 140 aod isso 5 hie Peete pete e eet erate oe eee daw eet ge 144 Port Chart page ina pie chart format 0 00 e eee eee 147 Port Chart page in a bar graph format 0000 0c eee 148 Poit Error Summary page o cers deere ee dene wad Sd Lave anne 149 IMG ACE PAOG credence recuse tbees Sad tb mato S06 dna pam eee 150 Interface Chart in
270. page items Section Item Range Description MAC Address Aging Time 10 1000000 Type the timeout period in seconds for aging out Setting dynamically learned forwarding information If the entry is inactive for a period of time that exceeds the specified aging time the address is removed Note Nortel Networks recommends that you use the default value of 300 seconds Select VLAN 1 256 Choose the VLAN on which to view learned MAC addresses MAC Address MAC Address The unicast MAC address for which the bridge has Table forwarding and or filtering information Source The source of the discovered MAC address 2 Inthe MAC Address Setting section choose the aging time and VLAN you want to view learned MAC addresses on Click Submit Your request is displayed in the MAC Address Table Figure 41 Locating a specific MAC address You can search for a specific MAC address among all the MAC addresses learned from all the VLANs This is a useful tool for finding whether or not a switch has learned a particular address To locate a specific MAC addresses 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Find MAC Address The Find MAC Address page opens Figure 42 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 110 Configuring the switch Figure 42 Find MAC Address Table page Configuration gt Find MAC Address Table Find MAC Address Setting Find MAC Add
271. page layout graphic 36 Write View field 79 Wrong Digest field 72 Wrong Objects field 311 Wrong OpCode field 311 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 334 Index 209570 C
272. parameters on a Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server You can retrieve the configuration parameters of a standalone switch or an entire stack and use the retrieved parameters to automatically configure a replacement switch or stack To store a switch or stack configuration you must set up the file on your TFTP server and set the filename read write permission to enabled To download the BPS 2000 configuration file a properly configured TFTP server must be present in your network and the policy switch must have an IP address To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address refer to Configuring BootP IP and gateway settings on page 64 To store or retrieve a switch or stack configuration file 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt Configuration File The Configuration File Download Upload page opens Figure 47 Figure 47 Configuration File Download Upload page Configuration gt Configuration File Download Upload Configuration File Setting Configuration Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 XXX XXX XXX XXX Copy Configuration Image to Server No Retrieve Configuration Image from Server NEE 209570 C Configuring the switch 125 Table 39 Configuration File page items Table 39 describes the items on the Configuration File page Item Range Description Configuration Image 1 32 Type the configuration file name Filename TFTP Se
273. port Y screen fields where you can choose up to two ports to monitor Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 164 Configuring application settings Table 55 describes the port based monitoring modes Table 55 Port based monitoring modes Item Description Disabled Choose this option to disable port based monitoring The default setting is Disabled gt Port X Choose this option to monitor all traffic received by port X Port X gt Choose this option to monitor all traffic transmitted by port X lt gt Port X Choose this option to monitor all traffic received and transmitted by port X gt Port X or Port Y gt Choose this option to monitor all traffic received by port X or transmitted by port Y Note Do not use this mode for multicast and broadcast traffic gt Port X and Port Y gt Choose this option to monitor all traffic received by port X destined to port Y and then transmitted by port Y one way conversation steering Note Do not use this mode for multicast and broadcast traffic lt gt Port X and Port Y lt gt Choose this option to monitor all traffic received by port X and then transmitted by port Y or transmitted by port X and received by port Y two way conversation steering Note Do not use this mode for multicast and broadcast traffic Selecting any one of the address based monitoring modes acti
274. port through which the MAC address is allowed Entry Select the port list through which the MAC address is allowed 2 Complete fields as described in the table Note If you choose an Entry as the Allowed Source you must have configured that specific entry on the Port View List Port List page 3 On the Security Table page type information in the text boxes or select from a list 4 Click Submit Note Be certain to include the MAC address for the default LAN router as an allowed source MAC address Clearing ports You can clear all information from the specified port s for the list of ports that learn MAC addresses If Learn by Ports is enabled the specified ports will begin again to learn the MAC addresses To clear information from selected ports Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 104 Configuring the switch 1 From the main menu choose Application gt MAC Address Security gt Security Configuration The Security Configuration page opens Figure 33 2 Inthe MAC Security Table section click the icon in the Action column of the Clear By Ports row The Port List View Clear by Ports page opens Figure 38 Figure 38 Port List View Clear by Ports page Application gt MAC Address Security Port List View Application gt MAC Address Security gt Security Configuration Clear by Ports Pot NONE1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
275. pter 9 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced The QoS application delivers a set of tools that when optimally configured combats escalating bandwidth costs and optimizes application performance in your network QoS tools allow you to prioritize your critical applications and sensitive traffic You can tailor appropriate services to support this traffic over the wide area thus maintaining the necessary performance levels on an end to end basis You can configure Quality of Service QoS features in your network by using the Web based QoS Wizard using the QoS Quick Config pages or using the Advanced QoS configuration pages available in the Web based management user interface Refer to Chapter 8 for descriptions of the QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config options Refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 for a sample QoS configuration using the advanced QoS Web pages This chapter explains configuring QoS using the Advanced QoS pages The chapter covers the following topics e Configuring an interface group next e Configuring 802 1p priority queue assignment on page 261 e Configuring 802 1p priority mapping on page 263 e Creating a DSCP queue assignment on page 264 e Configuring DSCP mapping on page 265 e TP filter and IP filter group configurations on page 268 e Layer 2 filter and layer 2 filter group configurations on page 278 e Configuring QoS actions on pa
276. queue set you want to modify 802 1p Priority Assignment Table 802 1p Priority ntnQoslfPriAssignmentPri The 802 1p user priority mapped to a queue Queue ntnQoslfPriAssignmentQueuet Type a number that signifies the desired queue in the specified queue set with which this priority is associated 2 Inthe 802 1p Priority Assignment section select the queue set to view in the 802 1p Priority Assignment Table 3 Click Submit The table is updated with the queue set you requested 4 Inthe 802 1p Priority Assignment Table section type the information in the text boxes 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 263 5 Click Submit Note Clicking Submit in the 802 1p Priority Assignment Table section results in a system reset Configuring 802 1p priority mapping Note Nortel Networks recommends using the default 802 1p priority to DSCP mappings to ensure end to end QoS connectivity To configure 802 1p priority to DSCP mapping 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt Priority Mapping The 802 1p Priority Mapping page opens Figure 152 Figure 152 802 1p Priority Mapping page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Devices gt 802 1p Priority Mapping 802 1p Priority Mapping Table o po 1 po 2 pa 3 ZA 4 Ox A 5 A 6 eE 7 0x30 ei Using Web based Management for the Business Policy
277. r forwarding the packet type specified in the Packet Type field When the threshold is exceeded any additional packets are discarded Note Rate limiting is disabled if this field is set to none This allows you to select and view the percentage of specific packet types present in the network without inadvertently limiting the forwarding rate The default setting is None Last 5 Minutes 0 100 The percentage of packets received by the port in the last five minutes This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every 15 seconds Last Hour 0 100 The percentage of packets received by the port in the last hour This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every five minutes Last 24 Hours 0 100 The percentage of packets received by the port in the last 24 hours This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every hour Note The Last 5 Minutes Last Hour and Last 24 Hours fields indicate the receiving port s view of network activity regardless of the rate limiting setting Note When the volume of broadcast and multicast packets is high placing severe strain on the network often referred to as a storm you can set the forwarding rate of those packet types to not exceed a specified percentage of the total available bandwidth 2 Inthe upper left hand corner click on the unit number of the device to monit
278. r the VLAN For more information see Table 65 on page 180 User Defined Protocol If you selected User Defined from the Protocol pulldown list specify the protocol identifier for the VLAN Note Any frames that match the specified PID in any of the following ways are assigned to that user defined VLAN e The ethertype for Ethernet type 2 frames e The PID in Ethernet SNAP frames e The DSAP or SSAP value in Ethernet 802 2 frames For a list of rereserved PIDs that are unavailable for user defined PIDs see Table 66 on page 181 Learning Constraint 1 IVL 2 SVL Choose your learning constraint type Note If IVL is selected the VLAN uses an independent filtering database from all other VLANs If SVL is selected the VLAN shares the same filtering database as all other VLANs with SVL Note If the stack is set to a pure operational mode the default setting is IVL IVL is available only in Pure BPS 2000 stack operational mode If the stack is set to a hybrid operational mode the default setting is SVL For more information on setting your stack operational mode see Setting system operational modes on page 128 4 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list 5 Doone of the following Click Submit Click Back to return to the VLAN Configuration page without making changes Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Versio
279. r you are metering the data in the flow associated with the policy Service Class In Profile Displays the service class of the flow associated with the policy If you are metering the data this is the service class for the data that fits the metered profile Service Class Out Profile Displays the service class of metered data that falls outside the profile Shape Displays whether you are shaping the data in the flow associated with the policy To assign priority levels to different types of network traffic 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Wizard The QoS Wizard opens Figure 93 2 To continue the configuration process click Next 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 213 A packet prioritization selection page opens Figure 94 Select Yes Click Next A packet prioritization explanation page opens Figure 98 Figure 98 Packet prioritization explanation page QoS Wizard Wizard allows you to configure QoS policies based upon criteria you select You may prioritize traffic control bandwidth utilization or apply traffic shaping You may also build your own policies if the predefined objects do not meet your needs Please make a selection VLAN O IP Application User Defined Flow a To see the policies you have configured click Status The QoS Policies to Configure table opens in a pop up window Figure 97 Prioritizing VL
280. rds 44 RADIUS based 46 remote dial in access 46 SNMPv3 68 70 Security Configuration page 97 Security field 105 Security Level field 79 88 Security Model field 76 79 Security Name field 76 88 Security page 97 Security Table page 102 Select VLANs field 109 Serial Number field 54 56 Server Timeout field 93 service class 211 Service Class field 266 267 Service Order field 255 Set Drop Precedence field 290 Shaper Creation 295 Shaper field 300 301 Shaper Group field 300 301 Shaper page 295 Shaper Table 295 Shaping Q Drops field 303 Shaping Rate field 295 Single Collision Frame field 155 S S NANNRHRARARAUARANARA YN S S S ingle Collisions field 146 NMP about 68 MAC address security 98 trap receivers configuring 89 deleting 90 MP Engine Boot field 71 NMP Engine Dialect field 71 NMP Engine ID field 71 MP Engine Maximum Message Size field 71 MP Engine Time field 71 MP Trap Receiver page 89 NMP Access field 95 NMP Use List field 95 NMPv1 about 68 configuring 69 NMPv 1 page 69 NMPv3 70 about 68 configuring 70 group access rights 78 deleting 79 group membership 75 deleting 77 management information views 80 deleting 82 system information viewing 70 system notification entries 82 deleting 84 target addresses 85 deleting 87 target parameters 87 deleting 89 user access 72 deleting 75 nooping field 167 168 Z 2 Z Z software downloading 116 Using Web based
281. reated using QoS wizard Qos Quick Config or QoS Advanced pages IP Group Modification page Filter Group Name HTTP_FLTR Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt IP Group Modification IP Filter Group a Destination Destination Source Source DSCPIProt Destination Source ees Address Address MaskjAddress Address Mask roroco l L4 Port L4 Po Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore TCP HTTP Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore TCP Ignore HTTP Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore TCP SMTP Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore TCP Ignore SMTP Vv 1 1 aiee 2 rel 3 E 4 ea am Table 90 describes the items on the IP Group Modification page Table 90 IP Modification Group page items Item Range Description Filter Group Name 1 16 Displays the name of the selected the filter group Group Select or deselect the filter from membership in the filter group Order Integer Displays the order for existing groups Enter the desired order for the entries you are adding to the group Instance Displays unique identifier Filter ID Displays the filter identifier Destination Address The IP address that is matched against the packet s destination IP address Destination Address Mask The mask for the matching of the destination IP address Note A zero bit in the mask means that the corresponding bit in the address always matches Source Address The
282. rectly upstream and directly downstream from the failed unit automatically wrap their cascade connectors and indicate this condition by lighting their Cas Up and Cas Dwn LEDs see Cas Up and Cas Dwn description in this table If the temporary base unit fails the next unit directly downstream from this unit becomes the new temporary base unit This process can continue until there are only two units left in the stack configuration This automatic failover is a temporary safeguard only If the stack configuration loses power the temporary base unit will not power up as the base unit when power is restored For this reason you should always assign the temporary base unit as the base unit set the Unit Select switch to Base until the failed unit is repaired or replaced 10 100 10 100 Mb s port speed indicator Green The corresponding port is set to operate at 100 Mb s and the link is good Amber The corresponding port is set to operate at 10 Mb s and the link is good The link connection is bad or there is no connection to this port Link Link status Green Valid communications link established The communications link connection is bad or there is no connection to this port Activity Port activity Green or Amber Blinking Indicates network activity for the corresponding port A high level of network activity can cause the LEDs to appear to be on continuously 2
283. ress 00 00 00 00 00 00 Not Found MAC Address Table MAC Address Source 00 10 A4 E8 35 52 Unit 1 Port 10 00 80 2D 8C 26 20 Unit 2 Port 2 00 80 2D 8C 26 21 Unit 2 Port 2 00 80 2D 8C 36 FF 08 00 20 79 7E 02 Unit 2 Port 2 Previous 20 Next 20 Table 34 on page 109 describes the items on the Find MAC Address Table page 2 Inthe MAC Address Setting section type the MAC address you want to search for 3 Click Submit to enter the request If the address is located it is shown in the first row in the MAC Address Table section If the address is not located the system response Not Found is shown to the right of the Find MAC Address input field 209570 C Configuring the switch 111 Configuring port s autonegotiation speed duplex status and alias You can configure a specific switch port or all switch ports to autonegotiate for the highest available speed of the connected station or you can set the speed for selected switch ports Autonegotiation is not supported on fiber optic ports Note You cannot disable autonegotiation using the BPS2000 1GT or BPS2000 2GT MDA ports you cannot enable autonegotiation using the BPS2000 2GE MDA ports Use the High Speed Flow control page to work with autonegotiation and gigabit ports With software version 2 0 you can name each port or assign an alias to it using 27 alphanumeric characters To configure a switch port s alias status
284. resses Web Page Access Displays allowed Web access Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 96 Configuring the switch Table 28 Remote Access page fields continued Section Item Range Description Web Use List 1 Yes Restricts Web access to the specified 10 source IP 2 No addresses Allowed Source IP_ Allowed Source IP XXX XXX XXX Enter the source IP address you want to allow and Subnet Mask XXX switch access Allowed Source Mask XXX XXX XXX Enter the source IP mask you want to allow switch XXX access 2 Complete fields as described in the table 3 Click Submit Configuring MAC address based security Beginning with software version 1 1 the MAC address based security system allows you to specify a range of system responses to unauthorized network access to your switch with the Web based management system The system response can range from sending a trap to disabling the port The network access control is based on the MAC source addresses SAs of the authorized stations You can specify a list of up to 448 MAC SAs that are authorized to access the switch You can also specify the ports that each MAC SA is allowed to access The options for allowed MAC SA port access include NONE ALL and single or multiple ports that are specified in a list for example 1 4 6 9 and so forth You must also include the MAC SA of any router con
285. riority 2 priority to 7 highest priority 5 Priority 3 6 Priority 4 7 Priority 5 8 Priority 6 2 9 Priority 7 Note Use Defaults Use 802 1p priority from DSCP mapping 10 Use Defaults table 11 Use Egress 1 Map The default setting is Use Defaults 2 Inthe Action Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit The new filter action configuration appears in the Action Table Figure 164 Note Actions are not modifiable They must be deleted and re created gt Deleting an action configuration To delete an action configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Actions The Action page opens Figure 164 2 Inthe Action Table section in the filter action configuration row of your choice click the Delete icon A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 291 e Click Yes to delete the filter configuration e Click Cancel to return to the Action page without making changes Note You cannot delete an action that is referenced by a meter you must first delete the meter Configuring QoS meters Using the QoS Advanced pages you can create view or delete meters If you do not want to meter the data in your flow go to Configuring QoS shapers on page 294 Creating a meter To create a met
286. rnet Chart page 3 To refresh statistical information click Update or click Back to return to the Ethernet Statistics page Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 140 Configuring remote network monitoring RMON Viewing RMON history You can view a periodic statistical sampling of data from various types of networks To view periodic statistical data 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt RMON History The RMON History page opens Figure 56 Figure 56 RMON History page Statistics gt RMON History RMON History Statistics View By Unit 1 Port M K Submit d RMON History Statistics Table CRC Start Octets Broadcast Multicast Align Errors 4 Days 17 Hours 20 Minutes 33 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 21 Minutes 3 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 21 Minutes 33 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 22 Minutes 3 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 22 Minutes 33 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 23 Minutes 3 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 23 Minutes 33 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 24 Minutes 3 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 24 Minutes 33 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 25 Minutes 3 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 25 Minutes 33 Seconds 4 Days 17 Hours 26 Minutes 3 Seconds f Baa te hans Mines 33 enema a e ol ol la ea a A Fn ees cen fice Ven eed Vesa fc Fee fee ec te 1 ia a ia la a o O ol o ol o o o 1 SEE O a la o a al ol fic la a a 2 1o 0o 5 a oo oa ii rOO0O9090000000000 209570 C Configuring
287. rs Using Existing Filter Group Step 2 Meter No Meter Configure Meter Use Existing Meter Step 3 Shaper NoShaper Configure Shaper Use Existing Shaper Step 4 Policy Policy Name tats Policy Order 2 Bo Role Combination fallBPSiics Filter Group Type IP Fiter Group zf Filter Group wizardlP Action Drop_Trafic I Track Statistics Yes B 2 Goto Configuring QoS Quick Config meters on page 247 Deleting Qos Quick Config filters from the filter group The filters of the filter group you created are displayed in a table at the top of the Step 1 Rule section of the QoS Quick Config Policy page To delete a filter from the filter group 1 Click QoS Quick Config gt Policy The filter group you just configured displays in the table at the top of the Step 1 Rule section of the QoS Quick Config Policy page Figure 141 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 247 Figure 141 QoS Quick Config Policy page with displayed filter group QoS Quick Config gt Policy Step 1 Rule E Configure IP Filters E Configure L2 Filters Using Existing Filter Group Order Destination Address Mask Source Address Mask __ DSCP_ IP Protocol Destination Layerd Por x 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ignore Ignore Ignore E Ignore E Ignore C Network Address E Network Address 0 0 0 0 Jo c oo EJ Ignore Address Address E Preconfigured Port 4 a
288. rse compile reverse engineer or otherwise translate the Software c create derivative works or modifications unless expressly authorized or d sublicense rent or lease the Software Licensors of intellectual property to Nortel Networks are beneficiaries of this provision Upon termination or breach of the license by Customer or in the event designated hardware or CFE is no longer in use Customer will promptly return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction Nortel Networks may audit by remote polling or other reasonable means to determine Customer s Software activation or usage levels If suppliers of third party software included in Software require Nortel Networks to include additional or different terms Customer agrees to abide by such terms provided by Nortel Networks with respect to such third party software 2 Warranty Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between Nortel Networks and Customer Software is provided AS IS without any warranties conditions of any kind NORTEL NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES CONDITIONS FOR THE SOFTWARE EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABLITITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF NON INFRINGEMENT Nortel Networks is not obligated to provide support of any kind for the Software Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties and in such event the above exclusions may no
289. rver IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX Type the IP address of the TFTP load host Copy Configuration Image 1 Yes Choose whether or not to copy the configuration image to the to Server 2 No server Retrieve Configuration 1 Yes Choose whether or not to retrieve the configuration image from a Image from Server 2 No server If you choose Yes the download process begins immediately and when completed causes the switch or stack to reset with the new configuration parameters 2 Type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 126 Configuring the switch Table 40 describes the requirements for storing or retrieving configuration parameters on a TFIP server Table 40 Requirements for storing or retrieving configuration parameters on a TFTP server Requirements configure a standalone switch e The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone switch configuration parameters to other standalone switches or to copy stack configuration parameters to other stack configurations For example you cannot duplicate the configuration parameters of a unit in a stack configuration and use it to e A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used to configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware revision and model type as the donor standalone switch
290. s null Read Only xI communitySnmpWrite SNMPy2c noAuthNoPriv snmpv1Objs snmpy1Objs null Read Only xI community SnmpNotify SNMPy1 noAuthNoPriv null z null snmpy1Objs Read Only x community SnmpNotify SNMPyv2c noAuthNoPriv null null snmpv1 Objs Read Only Group Access Creation Group Name LOOO Security Model SNMP E Security Level ncAuthNoPriv m Read View Ee e a Write View OO NotifyView Entry Storage volatile E 209570 C Configuring the switch 79 Table 21 describes the items on the Group Access Rights page Table 21 Group Access Rights page items vacmAccessToGroupStatus Item and MIB association Range Description x Deletes the row Group Name 1 32 Type a character string to specify the group name to which access is granted Security Model vacmAccessSecurityModel 1 SNMPv1 2 SNMPv2c Choose the security model to which access is granted Security Level vacmAccessSecurityLevel 1 noAuthNoPriv 3 USM 2 authNoPriv Choose the minimum level of security required in order to gain the access rights allowed to the group vacmSecurity ToGroupStorageType 2 Non Volatile Read View 1 32 Type a character string to identify the MIB view of the SNMP vacmAccessReadViewName context to which this entry authorizes read access Write View 1 32 Type a character string to identify the MIB vie
291. s Frames 1 Multiple Collisions Frames 1 W Lite Collisions 0 Excessive Collisions 0 anD ax Table 53 describes the items on the Ethernet Errors Chart page 3 To update the statistical information click Update or click Back to return to the Ethernet Errors page Viewing Ethernet error statistics in a bar graph format You can view Ethernet Errors statistics in a bar graph format To view Ethernet errors statistics in a bar graph format 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Ethernet Errors The Ethernet Errors page opens Figure 61 In the port row of your choice click the bar graph icon The Ethernet Errors Chart page opens in a bar graph format Figure 66 209570 C Viewing system statistics 157 Figure 66 Ethernet Error Chart in a bar graph format Statistics gt Ethernet Errors Chart Unit 1 Port1 Balignrent Errors 0 DFcs Errors 0 W internal MAC TX Errors 0 Internal MAC RX Errors 0 H Carrier Sense Errors 0 Frame Too Long 0 BBsoe Test Errors 0 M Deferred Transmissions 12 W Single Collisions Frames 1 M multiple Collisions Frames 1 W Late Collisions 0 H Excessive Collisions 0 ap a Table 52 describes the items on the Ethernet Errors Chart page 3 To update the statistical information click Update or click Back to return to the Ethernet Errors page Viewing transparent
292. sUpTime 2 Days 4 Hours 43 Minutes 50 Seconds gt Statistics Name gt Application W Administration sysLocation System Information sysContact gt Security 7 Logout Reset Reset To Default gt Support Copyright 2000 Nortel Networks Inc Allzights reserved With Web access enabled the switch can support up to four concurrent Web page users Two predefined user levels are available and each user level has a corresponding username and password Table 8 shows an example of the two predefined user levels available and their access level within the Web based management user interface Table 8 User levels and access levels User name for Password for each User level Access Level each level user level Read only RO XXXXXXXX Read only Read write RW XXXXXXXX Full read write access 209570 C Administering the switch 49 Resetting the BPS 2000 You can reset a standalone switch a specific unit in a stack configuration or an entire stack without erasing any configured switch parameters While resetting the switch initiates a self test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress Resetting means rebooting in this context To reset the BPS 2000 without making changes since your last Submit request 1 From the main menu choose Administration gt Reset The Reset page
293. sczechaeee sears eepedane cease ease ia eees 68 Table 15 SNMPv1 page items 0 002 c es 70 Table 16 System Information section fields 0 0 000 e eee ene 71 Table 17 SNMPv3 Counters section fields 0 0000 cee eee 72 Table 18 User Specification Table section items annann aaae 73 Table 19 User Specification Creation section items 0000 c ee eee 74 Table 20 Group Membership page items 00 cece eee 76 Table 21 Group Access Rights page items 0000 eee 79 Table 22 Management Information View page items 08 81 Table 23 Notification page items 00 ees 83 Table 24 Target Address page items 0 eee es 86 Table 25 Target Parameter page items 00 eee eee es 88 Table 26 SNMP Trap Receiver page items 000 90 Table 27 EAPOL Security Configuration page fields 005 93 Table 28 Remote Access page fields 0 0c eee eee 95 Table 29 Security Configuration page items 00 cee eee eee 98 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 22 Tables Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table
294. server Client Type The protocol client type for this entry Note Multiple client types can be served by a single COPS server Note The value 0 zero indicates that this entry contains information about the underlying connection In Packets The total number of COPS packets that the client has received from this COPS server marked for the selected client type Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Out Packets The total number of COPS packets that the client has sent to this COPS server marked for the selected client type Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections In Errors The total number of COPS packets that the client has received from this COPS server marked for the selected client type that contained errors in syntax Note This is a cumulative value and is not zeroed on new connections Last Error The code contained in the last COPS protocol Error Object received by the client from this COPS server marked for the selected client type Note This value is not zeroed on COPS Client Open operations Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 310 Implementing Common Open Policy Services COPS Table 103 Status page items continued Section Item Descriptions COPS Statistics Table cont TCP Connection Attempts The number of times that the COPS client attempted to open a
295. signed to the VLAN when the VLAN was created VLAN Name Re name the VLAN Learning Constraint The type of learning constraint selected when the VLAN was created The learning constraint choices are IVL and SVL Note If IVL is selected the VLAN uses an independent filtering database from all other VLANs IVL is available only in the Pure BPS 2000 stack operational mode If SVL is selected the VLAN shares the same filtering database as all other VLANs with SVL Port Port Membership Click the check boxes of standalone or stacked unit ports to associate it with the VLAN or if the port is already a member click the check box to deselect the it as a member of the VLAN A port can be configured in one or more VLANs This field is dependent on the Tagging field value in the VLAN Port Configuration screen For example e When the Tagging field is set to Untagged Access you can set the Port Membership field as an untagged port member or as a non VLAN port member e When the Tagging field is set to Tagged Trunk you can set the Port Membership field as a tagged port member or as a non VLAN port member Type information in the text boxes or click the check box of a port to associate it with the VLAN or if the port is already a member click the check box to deselect it as a member of the VLAN Do one of the following e Click Submit e Click Back to return to the VLAN Configuration page without making changes T
296. sion 1 1 QoS metering added to policy enabled networks refer to Chapter 8 Support for the BayStack 450 1GBIC MDA EAPOL based security refer to Chapter 4 Automatic PVID refer to Chapter 5 Table of port statistics refer to Chapter 6 Note To access the software version 2 0 features in a mixed stack you must access a BPS 2000 unit Additionally only 64 VLANS are available in a mixed stack multiple STG support is not available in a mixed stack Stacking compatibility You can stack the BPS 2000 up to 8 units high There are two types of stacks e Pure BPS 2000 This stack has only BPS 2000 switches It is sometimes referred to as a pure stack The stack operational mode for this type of stack is Pure BPS 2000 Mode 209570 C Using the Web based management interface 31 e Hybrid This stack has a combination of BPS 2000 switches and BayStack 450 and or BayStack 410 switches It is sometimes referred to as a mixed stack The stack operational mode for this type of stack is Hybrid Mode When you work with the BPS 2000 in standalone mode you should ensure that the stack operational mode shows Pure BPS 2000 Mode and does not show Hybrid Mode All BPS 2000 switches in the stack must be running the identical version of software and all the BayStack switches must be running the identical version of software When you are working with a mixed stack you must ensure that the Interoperability Software Version
297. sion of the BPS 2000 software is running use the console interface CI menus or the Web based management system e CI menus From the main menu of the console choose Systems Characteristics menu The software currently running is displayed in sysDescr e Web based management system Open the System Information page which is under Administration on the main menu The software currently running is displayed in the sysDescription field You can use 256 port protocol and MAC SA based VLANs for the stack with a Pure BPS 2000 stack running software version 1 2 The maximum number of MAC SA based VLANs available is 48 If you are working with a mixed or Hybrid stack you can use 64 VLANs for the entire stack When you change from a Pure BPS 2000 Stack mode to a Hybrid Stack mode e If you have up to 64 VLANs on the Pure BPS 2000 Stack they will be retained when you change to a Hybrid Stack e If you have more than 64 VLANs on the Pure BPS 2000 Stack you will lose them all The Hybrid Stack will return to the default VLAN configuration Also a mixed or Hybrid stack does not support multiple Spanning Tree Groups STG You have a single instance of STG when working with a mixed stack e If you have up to 64 VLANs on the Pure BPS 2000 Stack they will be retained when you change to a Hybrid Stack e If you have more than 64 VLANs on the Pure BPS 2000 Stack you will lose them all The Hybrid Stack will return to the default VLAN c
298. string for the specified trap receiver In the Trap Receiver Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list Click Submit The new entry appears in the Trap Receiver Table Figure 29 Deleting an SNMP trap receiver configuration To delete SNMP trap receiver configurations 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMP Trap The SNMP Trap Receiver page opens Figure 29 209570 C Configuring the switch 91 2 Inthe Trap Receiver Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the SNMP trap receiver configuration e Click Cancel to return to the table without making changes Configuring EAPOL based security Beginning with software version 1 1 you can configure security based on the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL protocol Refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 for more information EAPOL based security To configure EAPOL 1 From the main menu choose Application gt EAPOL Security The EAPOL Security Configuration page opens Figure 30 and Figure 31 Use the scroll bar on the right to move down the page and the scroll bar on the bottom to move across the page Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 92 Configuring the switch Figure 30 EAPO
299. t apply 3 Limitation of Remedies INNO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING a DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM b LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO CUSTOMER S RECORDS FILES OR DATA OR c DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY The forgoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and or supplier of the Software Such developer and or supplier is an intended beneficiary of this Section Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions and in such event they may not apply 4 General a If Customer is the United States Government the following paragraph shall apply All Nortel Networks Software available under this License Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation and in the event Software is licensed for or on behalf of the United States Government the respective rights to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U S Federal Regulations at 48 C F R Sections 12 212 for non Odd entities and 48 C F R 227 7202 for Odd entities b Customer may terminate the license at any time Nort
300. t for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 318 Support menu Nortel Networks Customer Support opens in a separate Web browser Figure 177 Figure 177 Nortel Networks Customer Support Web site NORTEL NETWORKS Welcome Guest You are not Logged In Customer Support About This Site Feedback Register Login Solutions Documentation Listings Training Listings Software Knowledge Services Documentation Home Training Home Certification Home You can call us North America 1 800 4 NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Navigate Our Site ba Go Your Location Home Customer Support Customer Support Welcome to the NEW Customer Support portal Your feedback is appreciated Solutions z Enter keywords and click Go Go O View Summary Hide Click the View by a Product link under the blue Products bar on the right side to view content for a specific product Description Document Type Release Date Load QLIV4BC not allowed with continuity Bulletins Oct 31 2001 OPTC Data corruption on inte demux communication Bulletins Oct 31 2001 Passprt 400 15000 Documentation PCR3 1 NTP Oct 30 2001 Course number transition will result in global News Release Oct 30 2001 consistency Juniper Routers Advanced Features Overview News Release Oct 29 2001 trainina 2 Follow the prompts to download the software release 3 Close the Web browser Contact Us H
301. t the packet s IP protocol field The options are Ignore TCP UDP ICMP IGMP or RSVP Destination L4 Port The value that the packet s layer 4 destination port number can have and match the filter entry 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 275 Table 89 IP Classification Group page items Item Range Description Source L4 Port The value that the packet s layer 4 source port number can have and match the filter entry Permit 1 True If the frame matches the filter when this is set to true the matching 2 False process stops Note To group multiple filters in a single group assign Filter Index and Filter Order the same filter group name 3 Type information in the text boxes or click the check box 4 Click Submit The new configuration appears in the IP Filter Group Table Figure 156 Modifying an IP filter group configuration To modify an IP filter group configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt IP Classification The IP Classification page opens Figure 156 In the IP Filter Group Table section in the IP filter group configuration of your choice click the Modify icon Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 276 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced The IP Group Modification page opens Figure This table displays all IP filter you c
302. tch ports specified as MLT members Tagging Displays whether the port is a tagged or an untagged port Participation Choose any or all of the switch ports for Spanning Tree participation Your options are 1 Normal Learning 2 Fast Learning 3 Disabled Note When an individual port is a trunk member changing this setting for one of the trunk members changes the setting for all members of that trunk Consider the effect changing this value has in your network topology before making changes The default settings is Normal Learning Priority The bridge spanning tree parameter that prioritizes the port s lowest path cost to the root When one or more ports have the same path cost the STA selects the path with the highest priority lowest numerical value Path Cost The bridge spanning tree parameter that determines the lowest path cost to the root State The current state of the port as defined by application of the Spanning Tree Protocol This state controls what action a port takes on reception of a frame Note If the bridge has detected a port that is malfunctioning it will place that port into the broken 6 state For ports which are disabled this object will have a value of disabled 1 2 Using the Spanning Tree Port Settings fields in the port row s of your choice choose to enable STP normal learning or fast learning or disable STP 3 Enter the spanning tree priority value for the specified port You do
303. teger Type the UDP RADIUS port number RADIUS Shared Secret 1 16 Type a unique character string to create a secret password 2 Type the information 3 Click Submit Logging on to the management interface Once switch and stack passwords and RADIUS authentication settings are integrated into the Web based management user interface anyone who attempts to use the application is presented with a log on page Figure 8 Figure 8 Web based management interface log on page 7 Akirutere Movsoce E WebMed E Prole E Yetow Pages Oowloed E NewSanp Cod lt 4 Orawels E RosPiyer This graphical network device management tool is compatible with the latest versions of Internet Explorer version 4 0 minimum and Netscape Navigator version 4 5 minimum Optimized for 800 x 600 pixel display sername Password To log on to the Web based management interface Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 48 Administering the switch 1 Inthe Username text box type RO for read only access or RW for read write access In the Password text box type your password Click Log On The System Information home page opens Figure 9 Figure 9 System Information home page NORTEL Administration gt System Information NETWORKS Business Policy Switch 2000 Access RW gt Summary 7 gt Configuration sysDescription Business Policy Switch 2000 HW AB3 FW V0 9E SWV v1 0 0 68 gt Fault sy
304. tem statistics Figure 64 Ethernet Errors page Statistics gt Ethernet Errors FEEE Ethernet Errors Statistics Table Unit 1 2 2 Internal Internal 3 i P kimara tre ree ea eE a AE OSE iet rt Port P ia Sense Too Test PERR Collisions Collisions ial Errors Errors Transmit Receive Transmissions Collisions Errors Long Errors Frames Frames Errors Errors Cha la Table 52 describes the items on the Ethernet Errors page Table 52 Ethernet Errors page items Item Description La Displays statistics in a bar graph format e Displays statistics in a pie chart format Port The port number corresponding to the selected switch Alignment Errors The number of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check FCS Errors The number of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check Internal MAC Transmit Errors The number of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error A frame only is counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object Internal MAC Receive Errors The number o
305. tep 4 Service Select the service class or action for test In Profile Service Class Standard x Drop Out of Profile E Service Class Standard x O Drop arD acm 9 Click either Service Class or Drop If you click Service Class choose the Service Class you want from the pull down menu If you click Drop the traffic in the specified flow is dropped 10 Click Next A page opens Figure 125 that allows you to set shaping criteria for the specified flow 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 233 Note You must be using either the BPS2000 1GT BPS2000 2GT or BPS2000 2GE MDA with the Business Policy Switch in order to implement the QoS shaping features Figure 125 Shaper for user defined flow page QoS Wizard Step 5 Shape Would you like to shape the traffic for test E No O Yes ax ax 11 If you do not want to shape traffic for the specified flow click No A page opens Figure 127 that asks if you want to prioritize traffic for another user defined flow 12 If you want to shape traffic for the specified flow click Yes A page opens Figure 126 that allows you to set shaping parameters for the specified flow Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 234 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 126 Setting shaping parameters for user defined flow page QoS Wizard
306. th different priority levels The QoS Wizard allows you to prioritize traffic flows by e VLAN e IP application e User defined flow 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 211 Using the QoS Wizard you can prioritize traffic by one of these categories by two categories or by all three Also you can define more than one flow in each category The QoS Wizard leads you through the following four general steps in defining each flow you want to prioritize e Step 1 is setting the category of prioritized traffic flow VLAN IP Application or User defined flow The User defined flow has two steps in classifying the flow Policy Label Policy Definition e Step 2 3 is setting a Meter for the flow if you want e Step 3 4 is choosing the Service Class or Drop for the flow If you are metering traffic within the flow you choose two separate Service Classes one for In Profile traffic and one for Out of Profile traffic If you are not metering traffic within the flow you choose only one Service Class e Step 4 5 is setting a Shaper or shaping criteria for the flow if you want Note You must be using either the BPS2000 1GT BPS2000 2GT or BPS2000 2GE MDA with the Business Policy Switch in order to implement the QoS shaping features The QoS Wizard automatically steps you through each of these four steps for each flow you want to prioritize You can prioritize flows within three different
307. the Policy Table section in the filter group configuration of your choice click the View icon The Policy Statistics page opens Figure 170 Figure 170 Policy Statistics page Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Policy Statistics Packet Hits 422 it 0 0 Policy Statistics Table Policy Role Name Filter Group Type Filter Group Combination Octets HTTP IP Filter Group HTTP_FLTR allBPSifes SMTP IP Filter Group SMTP_FLTR allIBPSifes VlanID1_IP Layer2 Filter Group VianID1_IP_FLTR allBPSifcs VianID1 Layer2 Filter Group VlanID1_FLTR allBPSIfcs Table 101 describes the items on the Policy Statistics page Table 101 Policy Statistics page items Item and MIB association Description Policy Name The name of the selected policy Filter Group Type The type of group that is referenced by this instance of the filter policy class The options are IP Filter Group or Layer2 Filter Group Filter Group The filter group associated with the selected policy Role Combination The interfaces to which this policy applies specified in terms of a role combination Packet Hits ntnQosTargetStats PkHits The packets selected for additional processing The action taken is based on a match with specified filter and or threshold information Overflow Packet Hits wPkHits ntnQosTargetStatsOverflo The number of times the associated ntnQosTarg
308. the main menu choose Application gt COPS gt Configuration The Configuration page opens Figure 174 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 312 Implementing Common Open Policy Services COPS Figure 174 Configuration page Application gt COPS gt Configuration COPS Configuration Table X IPv4 10 30 30 42 2 None 3288 5 COPS Client Creation IP Addres O aano TCP Pot Prioity COPS Retry Setting Retry Algorithm Sequential Retry Count 1 Retry Interval feo seconds Table 104 describes the items on the COPS Configuration Table section of the Configuration page Table 104 COPS Configuration Table section items Section Item Range Description COPS Configuration Table X Deletes the row Address Type The type of address in copsClientServerConfigAddress Address The IPv4 IPv6 or DNS address of the COPS server Client Type The COPS protocol client type this COPS server is capable of serving Note A single COPS server can serve multiple client types 209570 C Implementing Common Open Policy Services COPS 313 Table 104 COPS Configuration Table section items continued Section Item Range Description COPS Configuration Table cont Auth Type The authentication mechanism for this COPS client to request when negotiating se
309. the switch 209570 C 53 Chapter 3 Viewing summary information The summary information options are e Viewing stack information next e Viewing summary switch information on page 55 e Viewing switch information in real time on page 57 e Changing stack numbering on page 60 e Identifying unit numbers on page 62 Note To access the software version 2 0 features in a mixed stack you must access a BPS 2000 unit Additionally only 64 VLANS are available in a mixed stack multiple STG support is not available in a mixed stack Viewing stack information You can view a summary of your stack framework for example the current version of the running software and the IP address of the Web based management interface Note The Web based management user interface automatically detects the operational mode of your system If the system is in standalone mode the Stack Information page is not an option listed in the menu For information on how to set system operational modes see Setting system operational modes on page 128 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 54 Viewing summary information To view stack information 1 From the main menu choose Summary gt Stack Information The Stack Information page opens Figure 12 Figure 12 Stack Information page Summary gt Stack Information Stack Informati
310. the traffic in the specified IP Application is dropped 10 Click Next A page opens Figure 112 that allows you to set shaping criteria for the specified IP Application Note You must be using either the BPS2000 1GT BPS2000 2GT or BPS2000 2GE MDA with the Business Policy Switch in order to implement the QoS shaping features Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 224 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 112 Shaper for IP Application page QoS Wizard Step 4 Shape Would you like to shape the traffic for HTTP O No E Yes arm 11 If you do not want to shape traffic for the specified IP Application click No a If you chose more than one IP Application to prioritize a page opens that asks if you want to set a Meter for the next specified IP Application Figure 109 Repeat steps 3 through 17 for each IP Application you chose If you chose just one IP Application you have completed the QoS Wizard prioritization process for that flow Go to The system returns you to the packet prioritization page Figure 114 with a check mark next to IP Application If you fill the resources of the QoS Wizard you will not be prompted for another IP Application If you click Status the QoS Policies to Configure table listing your new entry simultaneously appears in a pop up window Figure 115 12 If you want to shape traffic for the spe
311. this port Packets 512 1023 bytes The number of packets this size received transmitted successfully on this port Packets 1024 1518 bytes The number of packets this size received transmitted successfully on this port FCS Errors The number of valid size packets received on this port with proper framing but discarded because of cyclic redundancy check CRC errors Undersized Packets The number of packets received on this port with fewer than 64 bytes and with proper CRC and framing also known as short frames or runts Oversized Packets The number of packets that were received on this port with proper CRC and framing that meet the following requirements e 1518 bytes if no VLAN tag exists e 1522 bytes if a VLAN tag exists Filtered Packets The number of packets filtered but not forwarded on this port Flooded Packets The number of packets flooded forwarded through this port because the destination address was not recognized in the address database Frame Errors The number of valid size packets received on this port but discarded because of CRC errors and improper framing Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 146 Viewing system statistics Table 49 Port page items continued Section Item Description Port Statistics Table Collisions The number of collisions detected on this port cont Singl
312. tination L4 Port Max The maximum value that the packet s layer 4 destination port number can have and match this filter Source L4 Port Min The least value that the packet s layer 4 source port number can have and match this filter Source L4 Port Max The maximum value that the packet s layer 4 source port number can have and match this filter 3 Type information in the text boxes or click the check box 4 Click Submit Deleting a layer 2 filter group configuration To delete a layer 2 filter group configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Rules gt Layer2 Classification The Layer2 Classification page opens Figure 160 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 288 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 2 Inthe Layer2 Filter Group Table section in the layer 2 filter group configuration row of your choice click the Delete icon A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Doone of the following e Click Yes to delete the filter group configuration e Click Cancel to return to the Layer2 Classification page without making changes Note You cannot delete a filter group that is referenced by a policy You must first delete the policy Configuring QoS actions When you create a filter action you specify the actions to be associated with specific IP and IEEE 802 filter
313. to the Web based management system discussed in this book you can manage the BPS 2000 using SNMP the Command Line Interface CLI Device Manager DM or the console interface CI menus Refer to the documents listed Related publications on page 26 for information on using and managing the BPS 2000 This guide describes how to use the Web based management user interface to configure and maintain your BPS 2000 and the devices connected within its framework Before you begin This guide is intended for network managers who are responsible for configuring BPS 2000 Consequently this guide assumes prior knowledge and understanding of the terminology theories and practices and specific knowledge about the networking devices protocols and interfaces that comprise your network You should have working knowledge of the Windows operating system graphical user interfaces GUIs and Web browsers Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 26 Text conventions This guide uses the following text conventions italic text Indicates new terms and book titles separator gt Shows menu paths Example Configuration gt Port Management identifies the Port Management option on the Configuration menu Related publications For more information about using the Web based management user interface and the BPS 2000 refer to the following publications e Release Notes for the Busi
314. to the packet prioritization page Figure 128 with a check mark next to User Defined Flow Press the Status button to view the QoS Policies to Configure table listing your new entry in a pop up window Figure 129 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 236 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 128 Packet prioritization page with prioritized User Defined Flow s QoS Wizard Wizard allows you to configure QoS policies based upon criteria you select You may prioritize traffic control bandwidth utilization or apply traffic shaping You may also build your own policies if the predefined objects do not meet your needs Please make a selection O VLAN C IP Application User Defined Flow ee ace as ID Figure 129 QoS Policies to Configure window with user defined flow entry QoS Policies to Configure Service Class Service Class In Profile Out Profile test Yes Standard Standard 19 When you are through viewing the table click Back and then Submit You see a session confirmation page Using QoS Quick Config This section describes how to use the QoS Quick Config option to configure QoS parameters for the BPS 2000 This section includes the following topics Using QoS Quick Config to configure interface groups on page 237 Using QoS Quick Config to configure policies on page 239 209570 C Implementing QoS Using Qo
315. to which this qosTargetlnterfaceRoles policy applies specified in terms of a role combination Policy Order Integer Enter a number to use as a determinate of qosTargetOrder the order of precedence for this filter Meter Choose the meter associated with this entry qosTargetMeter In Profile Action Choose the action you want to take for the qosTargetlnProfilelAction data associated with this policy Out of Profile Action Choose the action you want to take qosTargetOutOfProfilelAct associated with this policy for metered data ion that is not within the configured profile Shaper Choose the shaper if any to apply to this qosTargetShaping policy Params Shaper Group 2 63 Choose the shaper group if any to apply to qosTargetShapingGroup this policy Track Statistics 1 Yes Choose whether or not to track statistics for ntnQosTargetStatsTrack 2 No policy 2 Complete the fields as described 3 Click Submit Note Beginning with software version 2 0 you can enable or disable a policy The default setting is Enabled Viewing hardware policy statistics To view statistics for a selected hardware policy configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Policies The QoS Advanced Policies page opens Figure 167 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 302 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 2 In
316. tocol based VLAN 00 ccc ete ee 178 Modifying a protocol based VLAN 0 2 00 cece eee 182 Creating a MAC SA based VLAN 00 0c eee tee 183 Modifying a MAC SA based VLAN 000 e eee eee ee 185 Selecting a management VLAN 000 0c cece ee 187 Deleting a VLAN configuration 20 6 000000000 e0ee a dee 188 Configuring broadcast domains lt 2 4es4icscsedes een ga KAip akani ia bens 188 Viewing VLAN port information 2 ssc2esaeees0n ee ah ee epee eae en RRA eo aan 190 Managing spanning tree groups 000 ee eee 192 Creating spanning tree groups 2 25 ceeded ae weeded ed ode ee 193 Associating STG with VLAN membership 0000 0c eee e eee 195 Configuring ports for spanning tree 0 0 diuo 197 Changing spanning tree bridge switch settings 00 2c eee eee eee 188 Configuring MultiLink Trunk MLT members 0 0000 cee eee eee eee 202 Moniorna MLT TANG ccis4aeendeabad ALG BRO od Re AN Re E OTRO 205 Chapter 8 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Conte ceseseceaceesiusgiedestosetarscese ove eewacns 207 Sing QoS VAN 441 c04o cre aaree anes ooeEn sees eH ee he aaieka acage 208 Configuring Standard traffic with the QOS Wizard 20020 0 eae 208 Prioritizing traffic with the QoS Wizard 22 2 secscseeawees ewes voe wee ees 210 Prioritizing VLANs with the QoS Wizard 000 cece eee eee 213 Prioritizing IP applications with the QoS
317. ts of machine readable instructions its components data audio visual content such as images text recordings or pictures and related licensed materials including all whole or partial copies Nortel Networks grants you a license to use the Software only in the country where you acquired the Software You obtain no 209570 C rights other than those granted to you under this License Agreement You are responsible for the selection of the Software and for the installation of use of and results obtained from the Software 1 Licensed Use of Software Nortel Networks grants Customer a nonexclusive license to use a copy of the Software on only one machine at any one time or to the extent of the activation or authorized usage level whichever is applicable To the extent Software is furnished for use with designated hardware or Customer furnished equipment CFE Customer is granted a nonexclusive license to use Software only on such hardware or CFE as applicable Software contains trade secrets and Customer agrees to treat Software as confidential information using the same care and discretion Customer uses with its own similar information that it does not wish to disclose publish or disseminate Customer will ensure that anyone who uses the Software does so only in compliance with the terms of this Agreement Customer shall not a use copy modify transfer or distribute the Software except as expressly authorized b reverse assemble reve
318. tware Version 2 0 18 Figures Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Meter for VLAN Page oiaesctee soe eh si ae ew ee EN bes ee REN cE RRES 214 Meter setting for VLAN page 2 12 u5 ss ceee eee dee e ne eked a deees 215 Service Class selection for VLAN page 00 cece eeeae 216 Shaper for VLAN page sssrcrsrccsrseisreeisterdisddfikstiis 217 Setting shaping parameters for VLAN page 00000 eee 218 Additional VLANS page cocci ccke eee be eee wae e eee eee ee 219 Packet prioritization page with prioritized VLAN s 220 QoS Policies to Configure window with VLAN entry 220 IP Application prioritization page eee ee 221 Meter for IP Application page 0 000 eee eee 221 Meter setting for IP Application page 0 cee eee ee eee 222 Service Class selection for IP Application page 223 Shaper for IP Application page 0 0c cece eee 224 Setting shaping parameters for IP Application page 225 Packet prioritization page with prioritized IP Application s
319. tware version 1 2 you can configure the remote access you allow You can specify up to 10 IP addresses to allow Web access SNMP access or Telnet access to the BPS 2000 To configure remote access using the Web based management system 1 From the main menu of the Business Policy Switch 2000 Web based Manager choose Configuration gt Remote Access The Remote Access page opens Figure 32 209570 C Configuring the switch 95 Figure 32 Remote Access page Configuration gt Remote Access Remote Access Settings a ee Use List Telnet SNMP Web Page Allowed Allowed Yes z Allowed z Yes z Yes z 4 fo 0 0 0 Allowed Source IP and Subnet Mask Allowed Source IP Allowed Source Mask 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 5 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 10 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 iii Table 28 describes the fields on the Remote Access page Table 28 Remote Access page fields Section Item Range Description Remote Access Telnet Access 1 Allowed Allows Telnet access Settings 2 Disallowed Telnet Use List 1 Yes Restricts Telnet access to the specified 10 source 2 No IP addresses SNMP Access 1 Allowed Allows SNMP access 2 Disallowed SNMP Use List 1 Yes Restricts SNMP access to the specified 10 source 2 No IP add
320. u cannot delete a shaper that is referenced by a policy You must delete the policy first Configuring QoS policies You can configure QoS policies by creating filters in the hardware that apply a set of packet filtering criteria and actions to individual interfaces Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 298 Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced If you want to meter your data you must reference both an In Profile action and an Out Profile action The In Profile action directs the switch how to handle the data flow that is within the meter you set refer to Configuring QoS meters and the Out Profile directs the switch how to handle all other data Installing defined filters To create a hardware policy filter configuration 1 From the main menu choose Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Policies The QoS Advanced Policies page opens Figure 167 Figure 168 and Figure 169 This table displays all configured policies including ones created with QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 167 QoS Advanced Policies page 1 of 3 Application gt QoS gt QoS Advanced gt Policies Policy Table Policy Role Interface Policy PX Enabled eal wizardIP 1 IP Filter Group PX Enabled 7 wizardL2 2 wizardIP_FLTR allBPSIfcs Ingress 1 Layer2 Filter Group wizardL2_FLTR allBPSlics Ingress 2 Policy Creation Policy Name Filter Group
321. u click an option the corresponding page opens 209570 C Using the Web based management interface 37 Table 1 lists the main headings in the Web based management user interface and their associated options Table 1 Main headings and options Main menu titles Options Summary Stack Information stack mode only Switch Information Switch View Identify Unit Numbers stack mode only Stack Numbering stack mode only Configuration IP System Remote Access SNMPv1 SNMPv3 SNMP Trap MAC Address Table Find MAC Address Port Management High Speed Flow Control Software Download Configuration File Console Comm Port Stack Operational Mode Fault RMON Threshold RMON Event Log System Log Statistics Port Port Error Summary Interface Ethernet Errors Transparent Bridging RMON Ethernet RMON History Application Port Mirroring Rate Limiting EAPOL Security MAC Address Security IGMP VLAN Spanning Tree Multilink Trunk Qos COPS Administration System Information CPU Memory Utilization Security Logout Reset Reset to Defaults Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 38 Using the Web based management interface Table 1 Main headings and options Main menu titles Options Support Help Release Notes Manuals Upgrades Has additional menus Table 2 Menu i Tools are provid
322. ular interface for which transmission is inhibited by a single collision Late Collisions The number of times a collision is detected on a particular interface later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet Excessive Collisions The number of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions 2 Inthe upper left hand corner click on the unit number of the device to monitor The table is updated with the information for the selected device 3 To refresh the statistical information click Update Viewing Ethernet error statistics in a pie chart format You can view Ethernet Errors statistics in a pie chart format To view Ethernet Errors statistics in a pie chart format 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt Ethernet Errors The Ethernet Errors page opens Figure 61 2 Inthe port row of your choice click the pie chart icon The Ethernet Errors Chart page opens in a pie chart format Figure 65 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 156 Viewing system statistics Figure 65 Ethernet Error Chart in a pie chart format Statistics gt Ethernet Errors Chart Unit 1 Port1 W Alignment Errors 0 Orcs Errors 0 W internal MAC TX Errors 0 Dintemal MAC RX Errors 0 M Carrier Sense Errors 0 Frame Too Long 0 SQE Test Errors 0 M Deferred Transmissions 12 W Single Collision
323. uring VLANs on page 173 Configuring broadcast domains on page 188 Viewing VLAN port information on page 190 Managing spanning tree groups on page 192 Configuring ports for spanning tree on page 197 Changing spanning tree bridge switch settings on page 199 Configuring MultiLink Trunk MLT members on page 202 Monitoring MLT traffic on page 205 Note To access the software version 2 0 features in a mixed stack you gt must access a BPS 2000 unit Additionally only 64 VLANS are available in a mixed stack multiple STG support is not available in a mixed stack Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 162 Configuring application settings Configuring port mirroring The BPS 2000 supports port mirroring to analyze traffic You can view existing port mirroring activity and you can configure a specific switch port to mirror up to two specified ports or two MAC addresses When you configure port mirroring you have the option to specify either port based monitoring or address based monitoring Refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 for configuration guidelines for port mirroring In a stack configuration you can monitor ports that reside on different units within the stack For more information see Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 To configure port mirroring 1 From the main m
324. us button to view the QoS Policies to Configure table listing your new entry in a pop up window Figure 115 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 226 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config If you fill the resources of the QoS Wizard you will not be prompted for another IP Application Figure 114 Packet prioritization page with prioritized IP Application s QoS Wizard Wizard allows you to configure QoS policies based upon criteria you select You may prioritize traffic control bandwidth utilization or apply traffic shaping You may also build your own policies if the predefined objects do not meet your needs Please make a selection VLAN x IP Application O User Defined Flow Figure 115 QoS Policies to Configure window with IP Application entry QoS Policies to Configure Service Class Service Class In Profile Out ee HTTP Yes Standard Standard 18 When you are through viewing the table click Back then Submit You see a session confirmation page Prioritizing user defined flows with the QoS Wizard You can specify that different user defined flows in your network configuration be marked with different priority levels 1 In the packet prioritization window Figure 98 click User Defined Flow and click Next A page opens Figure 116 that asks the user to assign a name to the flow 209570 C Implementing QoS Usi
325. val parameter value becomes the Actual Hello Interval parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network Max Age time sec For the STP Group specifies the maximum age in seconds that a Hello message can attain before it is discarded This parameter specified by management for this bridge takes effect only when the bridge becomes the root bridge Note that if this bridge becomes the root bridge its Maximum Age Time parameter value becomes the Actual Maximum Age Time parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network Forward Delay Time sec For the STP Group indicates the Forward Delay parameter value specified by management for this bridge This parameter takes effect only when this bridge becomes the root bridge The Forward Delay parameter value specifies the amount of time that the bridge ports remain in the Listening and Learning states before entering the Forwarding state Note that all bridges participating in the spanning tree network use the root bridge s Forward Delay parameter value Tagged BPDU on Tagged Port Displays whether you are sendin g either tagged or untagged BPDUs from a tagged port VID used for Tagged BPDU Displays the VLAN ID you are sending the tagged BPDUs for the specified STG to STPG State The current operational state of the spanning tree group Enabled or Disabled STP Group Creation STP Group Index Cho
326. vates the Address A and Address B screen fields where you can specify MAC addresses to monitor Table 56 describes the address based monitoring modes Table 56 Address based monitoring modes Item Description Disabled Choose this option to disable port based monitoring The default setting is Disabled Address A gt any Address Choose this option to monitor all traffic transmitted from Address A to any address any Address gt Address A Choose this option to monitor all traffic received by Address A from any address lt gt Address A Choose this option to monitor all traffic received by or transmitted by Address A Address A gt Address B Choose this option to monitor all traffic transmitted by Address A that goes to Address one way conversation steering Address A lt gt Address B Choose this option to monitor all traffic received by Address A and then transmitted by Address B or transmitted by Address A and received by Address B two way conversation steering 209570 C Configuring application settings 165 Configuring rate limiting You can view the current forwarding rate of broadcast and or multicast packets and configure the BPS 2000 to limit the forwarding rate of broadcast and multicast packets on each interface When you configure rate limiting you are setting the percentage of port bandwidth allowed for a packet type When the thr
327. w of the SNMP vacmAccessWriteViewName context to which this entry authorizes write access Notify View 1 32 Type a character string to identify the MIB view to which this vacmAccessNotifyViewName entry authorizes access to notifications Entry Storage 1 Volatile Choose your storage preference Selecting Volatile requests information to be dropped lost when you turn the power off Selecting Non Volatile requests information to be saved in NVRAM when you turn the power off 2 Inthe Group Access Creation section type information in the text boxes or select from a list 3 Click Submit The new entry appears in the Group Access Table Deleting an SNMPv3 group access rights configuration To delete an SNMPv3 group access configuration 1 From the main menu choose Configuration gt SNMPv3 gt Group Access Rights The Group Access Rights page opens Figure 24 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 80 Configuring the switch 2 Inthe Group Access Table click the Delete icon for the entry you want to delete A message opens prompting you to confirm your request 3 Do one of the following e Click Yes to delete the group access configuration e Click Cancel to return to the Group Access Rights page without making changes Note This Group Access Table section of the Group Access Rights page contains hyperlinks to the Management Information View page
328. witch 2000 Software Version 2 0 68 Configuring the switch Table 14 System page items Table 14 describes the items on the System page Item Range Description System Description The factory set description of the hardware and software versions System Object ID The character string that the vendor created to uniquely identify this device System Up Time The elapsed time since the last network management portion of the system was last re initialized Note This field is updated only when the screen is redisplayed System Name 0 255 Type a character string to create a name to identify the switch for example Finance Group System Location 0 255 Type a character string to create a name for the switch location for example First Floor System Contact 0 255 Type a character string to create the contact information for the network manager or the selected person to contact regarding switch operation for example mcarlson company com Note To operate correctly with the Web interface the system contact should be an e mail address 2 Type information in the text boxes 3 Click Submit About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the standard for network management that uses a common software agent to manage local and wide area network equipment from different vendors part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP suite and defined in RFC1157 SNMPv1 is version one
329. without specific prior written permission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties 209570 C USA requirements only Federal Communications Commission FCC Compliance Notice Radio Frequency Notice Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual it may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case users will be required to take whatever measures may be necessary to correct the interference at their own expense European requirements only EN 55 022 statement This is to certify that the Nortel Networks Business Policy Switch 2000 is
330. y 2001 add them to your Bookshelf after you 911 1343 014 23 May 2001 Personalize oe Home Personalize Now What s New News Bulletins Customize News Bulletins Catalog Search Shopping Cart The Personalize feature allows you N Documentation Collection Gaanranhice to create update your user profile as May 2001 o sd hi well as to view a selected subset of EOL for FDDI on Passport 6400 platform Oni Product Families and Products when REA PETA nline End Of Life Notice for Five Optivity Documentation nadgating he aoe and products 31 October 2000 Eee jocumentation site Related Links Personalize Now o Contacts Help Feedback a Online Documentation Quick Links Training The Online Documentation button provides direct access to any online documentation fsecure and non securel The Catalogo Search nntinn should 2 Locate your product and click the document you want to download The BPS 2000 documentation is in the Data and Internet Product Family 3 Click on the PDF icon to start the download process you need Adobe Acrobat 3 0 or later to view or print documents from this site Follow the prompts to download the documentation Close the Web browser Upgrade option You can upgrade your Web based management user interface to the most recent software release To upgrade to the most recent software release 1 From the main menu choose Support gt Upgrade Using Web based Managemen
331. ybrid Queuing Discipline Interface Class The type of traffic received on interfaces associated with the specified role combination The options are Trusted Untrusted and Unrestricted Entry Storage Specifies whether or not the interface group can be deleted Note For more information on QoS interface classes or trusted untrusted and unrestricted ports refer to Using the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 209570 C Implementing QoS using QoS Advanced 257 Table 79 describes the items on the Interface Group Creation section of the QoS Advanced Interface Group page Table 79 Interface Group Creation section page items Item and MIB association Range Description Role Combination 1 64 Type a character string to identify the role combination qosInterfaceTypeRoles Interface Class 1 Trusted Choose an interface class qosInterfaceTypeExtlfClass 2 Untrusted Selecting Trusted requests the incoming DSCP value to 3 Unrestricted not be changed and instead be used for 802 1p user priority and queue assignment based on values in the DSCP mapping table and DSCP mapping table Selecting Untrusted forces the incoming DSCP value and associated mappings to modify to a standard value by default Actions associated with untrusted interfaces must re mark the DSCP Selecting Unrestricted allows you to configure actions that e re mark the DSCP or leave the DSCP
332. your request are displayed in the VLAN Port Information Table Figure 84 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 192 Configuring application settings Managing spanning tree groups You can configure system parameters for Spanning Tree Protocol the industry standard for avoiding loops in switched networks You can configure individual switch ports or all switch ports for participation in the spanning tree algorithm STA Note STP resolves duplicate paths in networks and is not necessary for ports that have workstations directly attached to the switch When STP is enabled on these ports the default workstations are unable to attach to servers for a few seconds while STP stabilizes With software version 1 2 and higher the BPS 2000 supports multiple instances 8 of spanning tree groups STGs running simultaneously either all in one standalone switch or across a Pure BPS 2000 Stack Each STG sends its own Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs and each STG must be independently configured With software version 2 0 you can choose which VLAN in the STG will send the tagged BPDU Note You must be in Pure BPS 2000 Stack mode in the Stack Operational Mode screen to enable more than 1 STG If you change to Hybrid mode you lose all but the default STG In the default configuration of the BPS 2000 a single STG with the ID of 1 includes all ports on the switch It is
333. z 0 0 0 0 fo ooo ignore z ignore x TFTP Subnet Mask Subnet Mask E User Defined Port Host Address Host Address b Towa T Maaa ma 2 To delete the filter from the filter group click the X icon at the far left of the table Configuring QoS Quick Config meters Using Step 2 Meters you choose to use nonmetered data for specified flow to configure a new meter for the flow or to use an existing meter for the flow To choose no metered data for the flow 1 Click No Meter 2 Goto Configuring QoS Quick Config shapers on page 248 To create a new meter for the flow 1 Click Configure Meter The system returns a page with the Step 2 Meter area expanded to allow you to configure QoS metering parameters Figure 142 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 248 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 142 QoS Quick Config Policy page with expanded meter area Step 2 Meter ClNo Meter Configure Meter Use Existing Meter Meter Name mett Committed Rate Kbps ___ Maximum Burst Rate Q J Kbps Committed Burst Size Duration Bip pe Enter the name you want for the meter in the Meter Name field In the Committed Rate field enter the rate you want for your meter In the Committed Burst Size field Enter the burst you want to allow Choose among the 6 or fewer durations the system calculates for the meter 5 Goto
334. ze The number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize The number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed 2 Inthe RMON History Statistics section choose the unit and port number to be monitored 3 Click Submit The RMON History Statistics Table is updated with information about the selected device and port Figure 56 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 142 Configuring remote network monitoring RMON Viewing RMON statistics in a line graph format You can view RMON statistical data in a line graph format To view statistics in a line graph format 1 From the main menu choose Statistics gt RMON History The RMON History page opens Figure 56 In the RMON History Statistics Table click the line graph icon Click Back to return to the RMON History page 209570 C 143 Chapter 6 Viewing system statistics The options available to monitor system statistical data are e Viewing port statistics next e Viewing all port errors on page 148 e Viewing interface statistics on page 150 e Viewing Ethernet error statistics on page 153 e Viewing transparent bridging statistics on page 157 Note To access the software versio
335. ze traffic for another VLAN If you fill the resources of the QoS Wizard you will not be prompted for another VLAN 209570 C Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config 219 Figure 105 Additional VLANs page QoS Wizard Would you like to define another VLAN to prioritize E No Yes arD ax 18 If you want to prioritize traffic for another VLAN click Yes and Next The system returns you to the VLAN prioritization page Figure 99 and you continue through steps 1 to 17 for the next VLAN 19 If you do not want to prioritize traffic for another VLAN click No and Next The system returns you to the packet prioritization page Figure 106 with a check mark next to VLAN If you click Status the QoS Policies to Configure table listing your new entry simultaneously appears in a pop up window Figure 107 Using Web based Management for the Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2 0 220 Implementing QoS Using QoS Wizard and QoS Quick Config Figure 106 Packet prioritization page with prioritized VLAN s QoS Wizard a Wizard allows you to configure QoS policies based upon criteria you select You may prioritize traffic control bandwidth utilization or apply traffic shaping You may also build your own policies if the predefined objects do not meet your needs Please make a selection v VLAN O IP Application O User Defined Flow ane EED ET ED Figure 107 QoS Policies to Configure w

Avaya Business Policy Switch 2000 Software Version 2.0 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents